Home

Triton Water Treatment Controller Manual

1. 4mA Value This Interpreted Measurement submenu is where the user defines the value that should be assigned to the 4 mA amperage reading Since 4 mA is the bottom of this Input s sensing range usually the lowest value for the Interpreted Measurement is entered here such as the zero 0 0 value shown in Figure 8 50 20 mA Value The next Interpreted Measurement submenu is where the user defines the value that should be assigned to the 20 mA amperage reading Since 20 mA is the top of this Input s sensing range the user should enter the highest expected value for the Interpreted Measurement here Figure 8 51 Highlight on the Interpreted Measurement sub menu 20 mA Value Entering too low a value could result in false out of range alarms so be sure the value entered is the maximum expected value for the device the 4 20 mA Input is monitoring In Figure 8 51 a value of 100 can be seen as the 20 mA Value setting If one were to do the math the settings used in the examples above would interpret the 6 4 mA raw measurement into the 15 0 Grm interpreted measurement shown in Figure 8 51 AlarmSettngs Alarm Settings Now going back to the main menus for this 4 20 mA input the next item to describe is the Alarm Settings menu Figure 8 52 Like for most inputs there are submenus where the user defines the High and Low Alarm values and for controlling what Alarm Actions should take place if either of those alarms or a
2. ce eesesssssessssessecesessseseeecscseseeecscsesesecssseseeeesseseeeeesaceeeeeeraee 132 A NN 134 ID RN 134 Timer Start amp Stop Modes 28 Day Timer eesessssecesssessecessseseeeeesscseeeesscseseeecssscseeeeasseseeeeesaseeseeereeee 134 00200 canta coacalco eae ane aes leed 135 ON D rat N rd 136 Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed innisis ieii ieies eA e EE EK EE Eas 136 Timer Start amp Stop Modes Add PreBleed ou ee essssssesseseeseesseseceecsesseeessceceeeeessseeeeeessseseeeesaeees 137 Bleed Relay ccna sree Nel an Abou a Se Raa SUSAN AUS A Sua 137 Timer Control crias aeaea Ae RE Aa Re AMAA Ea EA Seen EA D Beane eas 137 SetPtComtro le ase 138 Cod 138 PreBld Pta SALAS sion 138 Timer Start amp Stop Modes Add Pre Feed 0 0 eeessssssscessssssssecesesseeeecscsceceeesssceseeesssceeeeeasseseeeesaeees 139 Feed Relay UR SNS SUIS aa 139 Pre Feed Hime cuna aoanas aan cacuan Gaus case ues Ene dado casal occ 139 Use Pe EF ec 140 Timer Start with Set Point Stop Control Modes eessessssecssssseseeesssesceecsssceceeeesscseeescseseeeesasseseeesaseeeeeesaees 140 SE LECH IN D IAR EER E E NA 140 ODESSA BEE BERERE EEA NA AE AE EE A E A AN E O 140 Contrl Effe cana a a BY SR ANA A Se ea a SERRA AE a AN E R me ant 141 LEMA rada 141 Daly Time A A At addict 141 WEEKLY MA id EAS 141 2D ME a ee eh Re a ee ee ee ea 141 Add PreBl di animen E E E E Et 141 Add Pr e EEE EEE oE o E ata EEE EE EE a EEEE R A EEEE CEEE EEE EE A E 141 Timer Start wit
3. HydrAlkaline Hydrate Alkalinity Hydrate Alkalinity is a measure of the alkalinity of the water due to the presence of the hydroxyl ion OH Chloride Cl Chloride as Chlorine Is a measurement of Chloride solution concentrations Chloride salts in water PhosphatePO4 Phosphate as PO4 Is a measurement of the Phosphates usually added to cooling system water as corrosion inhibitors and sequestering agents that help control scale Sulfite SO3 Sulfite as SO3 A measurement of the Sulfite compounds generally added to boiler water as an oxygen scavenger to reduce corrosion Wet Test pH This is a place where the user can store the results of a wet test on the system water that indicates the pH level Wet Test Cnd Wet Test Conductivity This menu will store the wet test measurement of the Conductivity of the system water in micro Siemens uS which is an abbreviation for the true units micro Siemens per centimeter or uS cm 257 12 Password and Access Control Overview A Triton water treatment controller has four levels of access to its menus and controls The first three levels require a password entry to gain access and to be able to make changes Administrator Level is the highest level of control Entering the proper Admin password admin by default will allow the user to change any setting including passwords User Level 1 is the second highest level of control From the factory the User 1 pa
4. The Set Point Control Modes SetPnt Modes Moving the highlight to the SetPnt Modes category will show four Set Point control modes which use an Input measurement value to activate the relay vrvv t t 7 5 3 o 1 v 3 ig 2 30m r rt z 2 Df un i de w gt a Figure 6 9 The Set Point Control Mode Category SetPnt OnOff Set Point On Off This mode activates the relay when the selected Input value passes the Set Point value and then turns off the relay after the Set Point is passed going the other way although a Dead Band setting may keep the relay active longer The active box in Figure 6 9 indicates this is the control mode currently in use SetPnt TimeP Set Point Time Proportional This mode checks the Input measurement value against the Set Point at the beginning of a user defined time cycle like every hour If the Input value has passed the set point the relay is activated for a portion of the pre set time proportional to how far the measurement was from the set point SetPnt Spike Set Point with Spike This mode activates and deactivates the relay much like the Set Point On Off mode but with an option to use a different spike Set Point on any particular day Often used with Biocides this allows the user to have one level of chemical in the water normally with a higher level automatically added periodically 119 SetPnt Cycle Set Point Cycles of Concent
5. e seseeseseeseseeseseessssesssstsrsstssssrrsreresrsrtrsrresrsrerenresrsrenese 63 Timer controlled Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor 2 0 eee ceecesesseseeseseesesceceseecesceceseesesseaesecaeeecseeeeseeaeeeaeereaeeeeens 64 Make up Volume controlled Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor eeeeseseeeeeeseseeeeeessseeeeeessseseserseeeeneeeseeees 64 Conductivity controlled Bleed Inhibitor as of Time Cycle eeesesesseeeseseeceeeseseseseeesseeeeeesaeeeeetees 64 Conductivity controlled Bleed Timed Inhibitor by Water Volume ooonncicncnicocicicononanonannonnnononnononononocnos 64 Conductivity controlled Bleed Feed Inhibitor with one Biocide 0 eee eeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseees 64 Conductivity controlled Bleed Feed Inhibitor with dual Biocide oe ee eeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneees 65 Conductivity Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor wW ORP amp PH essesssessecssseeseeescseseeeescseseseessscsesenesseeeeeesseees 65 Whe User Mod siar A a a a n 65 Output Control wissnscccissnsssuscsesssesesssssasesesesssosessesentesebosesasosscnseessuscasesencdeseseevecasescdesesacesenseusnseasnscaseslesedesesessdseassdedsnececs 66 Bleed ValvUse LL A A A A ORO EAE E dad WRIA 67 Blowdowi Use cuota ae cadnines lade cate Casitas E ceda a o E EEO EE A EEE e Era Eo A EEE 67 P mpRelayU Senee niente aoa A SLAM a SERA Ana anaes 67 AlarmR Us tidecheolta thie beeen db dui a eine abhidh ind enh a 67 NOt MUS aan 67 Input Set up and Calibration scssccssscccscsccsscsesscsecs
6. 2 Point Reference Cal ie 186 CAMA inn ioei inin tiie i e EpC E E TAEA AEAEE AAEE EE Ta KEANE 186 Pio be Removal 00 iii E AAA AAA E a E E a 186 S spension OF CoOmtolii eeaeee aaa tesao Roe iaaa fides ob ceueredssoispsdedsbsvetavidevodsdatecsteyausosaey 186 ACTUA o A 187 Calibrate Temperature First sesosescscososososososososososososssosososososcooseosssossssossososoococosososssosssssorossscscsossossssssosessssesesesso 187 Deas tC al DA AAA AAA AA AAA AAA da 188 Next Cal Dire Ganeah nea R A seahauabahab sins 188 1Pt Fiel dCal cccsssssssrssssssesevevevevevevesesesesesesesesessesesecesecssesesssesssssecessssssssssssssssssssssessssssesssssosssosssosossosossososososess 188 Calibrate Temperature Firstini ini RN Ree BA ANAL Ge LAR Ree at 189 Remember No Activity Timeout osinn ae E E a N ae ea e akerat 190 Will Flow stop Probe be r mov ed acucicanecensciocaca uenea a 190 Calibration dis 192 1Pt Ref Call ccssssssscsssvsvsvssssevesevevevesesesesesesesesessesecesesesecssesesecssesssssssnsssssssessssssssssssessssssesssssssososososososossososssosess 192 Calibrate Temperature Fl thai iaa 193 Remember No Activity Time linen ibi 194 Water Treatment Control will be Suspended 0 eseeescesseseeeessseseeeeecscseeseesscseseeecacseseeeessaeseseeeeaeees 194 11 Calibracion atu anka Tend abe 197 2Pt Ref A RARAS 198 OR ON 199 Input options and Settings cscccscsssscsscscsscscssccessscessssecscsscsessscessssesssce
7. If there is more than one data entry for a particular date the times are listed below the date along with the data for that log entry as shown in Figure 9 6 The user can simply move the highlight up or down to display any data log entry The next menu after the View Data Log item is a menu for setting the Log Interval that is used to define when sensor data is logged Log Interval The sensor logging interval is used with all the sensor style Inputs which includes some of the Digital Input usages and the optional 4 20 mA Outputs Since these devices provide continuous measurements that may be constantly changing their measurements are recorded periodically at a fixed time interval the Log Interval as defined by the user in this menu The default interval is 30 minutes but the user can set the interval from one minute to 1440 minutes once a day There are enough memory locations to provide over 45 days worth of data recording for each and every device using a log interval of 30 minutes A Figure 9 7 Highlight on Log Interval menu showing the input tray and default value The example shown in Figure 9 7 shows the input tray for the user definition of the Sensor Logging Interval with its factory default setting of 30 minutes There is the usual 239 Edit Value submenu for changing the interval The interval can be set from one minute to as much as 1440 minutes 24 hours All the sensor style devices us
8. The Menu key Pressing this key will bring the user instantly to the top level Menu Screen from anywhere in the menu system The Help key will cause helpful context sensitive text to appear when pressed The helpful text will automatically be about the menu item that was highlighted when the user pressed the Help key The Back Cancel key works two ways When navigating the menus it works just like the Back function in a web browser taking the user back to the screen that was just previously displayed When entering data it works as a Cancel key to revert the entry to its previous value 42 The number pad works like the one on a cell phone and is used to enter numbers and alphabetic characters The first press will input the number on the key the second press will input the first letter if available and so forth Notice that the space character is under the plus minus and the shift function is under the decimal point When entering information the location where the entry will appear is shown by the insertion prompt a blinking line at the bottom of the position in the entry field To delete a character just entered press the Left arrow of the Navigator On the other hand if the user keeps pressing the Right arrow instead the insertion prompt will wrap around to the front of the field and the user can make a new entry over the previous entry Two special function keys are provided at the bottom
9. water temperature becomes too extreme 175 Other Inputs like the Conductivity sensor often have their measurements involved in control decisions like having the Relay controlling the Bleed Valve activate if the Conductivity measurement goes beyond a user defined Set Point value If a user looks at the Auto Control modes explained in the Output Control chapter earlier in this manual it can be seen that some control modes use an Input sensor s measurements to decide when a Relay activates and or deactivates But there are also control modes that make no use of an Input that do their control strictly based on time or the activation of some other relay Two features of the Triton controller make this Input Set up chapter smaller the digital Modbus network used for Input expansion and the emphasis on Control by Output The Modbus digital network means there is less setting up and configuring for an installer to do initially or when expansion is required Whenever a Modbus network sensor is connected to the controller the Triton automatically knows what kind of sensor has been added what its measurement range is and even assigns the Input a meaningful default custom name The new Input is then automatically listed in the menu structure right after any similar inputs ready for the user to monitor or use in controlling their outputs The Control by Output philosophy means that many of the control settings found in an Input s
10. what happens if an Alarm occurs but in these ClosedStatus and Open Status menus the user must decide which one will cause the Alarm to occur One state will always be set to Normal and the other state set to Digital Alarm If ClosedStatus is set to Normal then Open Status will automatically be set to Digital Alarm and if ClosedStatus is set to DigitalAlarm then Open Status will automatically be set to Normal Open Name Open State Name The user can choose any 12 character name for the Open state of this Input Digital Open is the default Open Name Care should be taken to use a name that makes the condition as clear as possible for example a name like Drum Empty will paint a better picture of what this state means than the factory default name Digital Open Open Status Open State Status Here the user can choose whether the open state for this Digital Input should be considered the Normal or DigitalAlarm status Digital Alarm is the default Open Status One state will always be set to Normal and the other state set to Digital Alarm If ClosedStatus is set to Normal then Open Status will automatically be set to Digital Alarm and if ClosedStatus is set to Digital Alarm then Open Status will automatically be set to Normal 222 Alarm Settings There only one possible alarm conditions for a General Purpose Digital Input the DigitalAlarm explained above Alarm Delay This Alarm Delay me
11. Control Effect is Force Low with the Activation Limit Timer set to 90 minutes by default Relay 02 Activates Inhibitor Pump after Relay 01 deactivates with a O minute Delay with an Activation Limit Timer set to 90 minutes all of which may be adjusted by the user Relay 03 Activates Oxidizing Biocide Pump Set Point On Off Input is ORP sensor Control Effect is Force High with the Activation Limit Timer set to 30 minutes by default all of which may be adjusted by the user Relay 04 Activates Acid Pump Set Point On Off Input is pH sensor Control Effect is Force Low with the Activation Limit Timer set to 30 minutes by default Relay 08 will be pre set to activate as the Alarm relay for the various Alarm conditions possible in the control modes available Inputs Available Only the Conductivity ORP and pH sensor Inputs will be available for control The Conductivity sensor willbe pre set to control the Bleed Valve the ORP sensor pre set to control the Oxidizing Biocide pump and the pH sensor pre set to control the Acid pump The Alarm conditions described below have a default one minute Alarm delay except the Flow Switch that by default has no delay set The Flow Switch will cause an Alarm condition if flow becomes insufficient The Conductivity sensor will have its High Alarm and Low Alarm available The Temperature sensor is available to allow for Conductivity calibration but can also be used to trigger alarms The ORP s
12. F gt A 1 E address E 15 co lola a File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ae y Qs Q wi J Search 15 Folders fap ES aA id E Address E E Triton_Configt1161234321 O OO OOOO Go tem_Datg bin Ita z ivity_Log bi 1KB BIN File 3 7 2011 4 40 PM 1 612KB BIN File 3 8 2011 6 44 AM n 145KB BIN File 3 8 2011 9 43 4M Triton_Help_Template xml 294KB XML Document 2 16 2011 4 56 PM 2 Triton_Menu_Template xml 145KB XML Document 3 3 2011 7 45 AM Type BIN File Date Modified 3 8 2011 9 43 AM Size 144 KB 4 My Computer 304 B3 Once the ghost image of the file is inside the window of the top level of the USB drive as shown in the picture above release the mouse button to Drop the copy into that window The copy of the System_Data bin file will be made into the top level of the USB drive and that window will be bought to the foreground The picture below shows the copy completed and you should now be ready to upload the Config File the file named System Data bin to the Triton Controller s y lol File Edit View Favorites Tools Help AY Om O BD Osea gt rors ee X 9 E Address ae S E Go name Tel gps Tote modes E Triton_Logs11161234321 File Folder 3 8 2011 9 43 AM SpTriton_Configi 1161234321 File Folder 3 8 2011 9 27 AM System_Data bin N 145KB BIN File 3 8 2011 9 43 AM 3 7 2011 4 40 PM BIN File 3 8 2011 6 44 AM
13. Input Set up and Calibration and Output Control for the details of setting the Alarm values and the Alarm Actions Active Alarms If an Alarm occurs the ActiveAlarms menu is the place to go The easiest way is simply to press the Alarm key on the front panel That will move the front panel display to the Active Alarms menu as shown in Figure 7 2 in one easy step i Baten en Y gt 4 20mA Out04 itputStetus ear A Figure 7 1 Highlight on ActiveAlarms with Alarm example shown and the Alarm key The submenu to the right of the Active Alarms menu item will display either 1 A list of Outputs or Inputs that are in Alarm followed by the Clear All item 2 The text No Alarms 172 In Figure 7 1 an Alarm associated with the fourth of the 4 20 mA Outputs is displayed as an example Figure 7 2 Highlight on a device in Alarm showing the sub menus Highlighting an individual Alarm in the list of alarms will display the submenus shown in Figure 7 2 This is also where the direct access Alarm key moves to Status The Status of the Output or Input which may help define the type of Alarm Measurement If an Input is in Alarm its current measurement is displayed next Figure 7 2 shows an Output in Alarm which do not have the Measurement item Go To Set up This shortcut item will take the user directly to the Input Set up or Output Control menu for the device in alarm so the user can inspect or c
14. clear the alarm but it will deactivate the external alarm indicator Since Relay Off is the normal default for an Alarm Relay this deactivation is safe in that any subsequent alarm condition will again activate the Alarm Relay 174 8 Input Set up and Calibration Overview The Inputs to the Triton water treatment controller are the electronic signals from the outside world which the controller monitors to make its decisions about activating relays or setting off alarms They also provide information about the water s condition Some of the incoming signals are very precise and continuously changing like the measurements provided by the Conductivity Temperature and pH sensors but other signals are much simpler like the on off signals from a simple Flow Switch or the pulses coming from a Reed Switch Water Meter tt tout Sure input Set ipl a w Switet vvVYVVYYYYYYYYY Figure 8 1 Highlight on Input Set up showing the list of Inputs The Triton controller could be used just to observe or monitor these Input signals and have the measurements stored in the Data Logs without using the signals to control anything But it s more likely the user willemploy the information provided to make output control decisions and set off alarms The Temperature sensor is an example of an Input that is not often used to control an output yet the user can easily set High or Low Alarms for its measurements in case the
15. cleared from the controller If the situation that caused the alarm is still present when the alarm is cleared the alarm will just reoccur In some situations like a 183 malfunctioning Input sensor the alarm willreoccur immediately there may be some small delay before the controller notices but there will be other situations where the alarm will not reoccur until sometime later when an Output Relay is activated for example In any case the user should find and resolve the problem that caused the alarm before clearing the alarm condition at the controller Now that the Alarm Settings menus have been examined in detail it is time to look at the next submenu of the Input Set up for the Conductivity sensor the Calibration menu From Figure 8 7 pressing the Left arrow twice and the Down arrow once would bring the user to Figure 8 8 Calibration Menu Input sensor calibration during installation or periodic maintenance is another common reason for visiting the Input Set up and Calibration menu Almost every Input can be calibrated is some way to increase or confirm the accuracy of its measurements Figure 8 8 Highlight on the Calibration menu for the Conductivity sensor Most Inputs as will be shown with the Conductivity sensor can be calibrated using two different methods with two variations of the second method The two methods are 1 Calibrating to match a measurement taken in the field 184
16. ry set up lt 4F Vv 1g 1 D W rat MOCE pi st SOrz PasswdA es OR Sen HomeScrnEdit MANE icital In i gt Netwrk InELG Digita n Ipu atus I Digital In 3 DigtlinUsager Y Figure 8 31 Highlight on Input Set up for Digital Input 1 Every Triton water treatment controller comes equipped with eight fully configurable Digital Inputs The simple devices that are connected to these inputs can only cause pulses of voltage change but volume information can be associated with each pulse and the rate at which regular pulses are detected can be measured as well Figure 8 31 In order for the controller to interpret these signals properly the user must specify the appropriate Digital Input Usage This is very similar to the Relay Usage selection in the Output Control menu the Digital Input Usage choice alters what Status displays are used and what items are listed under the Settings Menu for that Digital Input Before the Digital Input Usage explanation there are two preceding menu items to describe first Custom Name The first submenu for every Digital Input is this Custom Name menu where a user can assign any 12 character name The assigned name is then used throughout the menu system so the function of the input can be made clear The first digital input is still using the factory default style name for these inputs Digital In 1 Status This is a live display of the status for this Digital Input A digital input s status
17. significantly exceeds the Volume to Bleed setting below Vol To Bleed Volume To Bleed This menu is where the user defines what volume of water to Bleed out of the system in gallons The user can specify from 1 to 999 999 gallons 155 Limit Timer Activation Limit Timer The Limit Timer menu in the BleedOnMakUp control mode is just like every other activation time limit menu a setting to take control of the relay if the normal deactivation does not occur The factory default time limit is 90 minutes If this time limit is exceeded the OvrTimeLimit Alarm condition occurs and the relay activates or deactivates depending on its RlayReaction setting in the Alarms Actions menu When the cause of the problem is resolved the user can go to the ActiveAlarms menu explained in the Active Alarms chapter of this manual and use the Clear Alarm to restore normal operation The relay will not operate normally until the Alarm is cleared Use Mode Now This is the activator for the control mode After adjusting the settings in the previous menus the user would highlight this menu item and press Enter to start using this control mode The active box would be drawn around this menu item and the Water Meter Modes category menu item to indicate which control mode is active That s all there is to explain about the Water Meter control modes WtrMtr Modes The next category of control modes is the Other Relay control modes whe
18. the user would first press the Right arrow to move to the custom name Input Tray as shown in Figure 3 9 E Menu Screen ActiveAlarms Outputstatus lutputContrldRelay 01 InputMeasure META input Set up Relay 03 Rel us Viewing Data Relay 04 sage WaterIndexes Relay 05 Auto Control Operate Mode Relay 06 Manual Off PasswdAccess Relay 07 Manual On HomeScrnEdit Relay 08 Manual Limitp NetwrkConfia 4 20mA Out01l ReturnToAuto SysInfosUpdt 4 20mA Out02 4 20mA O0utO03 4 20mA Out 04 Figure 3 8 Output Control for Relay 02 Dutput Relay 01 Relay 02 Relay 03 Relay Relay 04 Relay Relay 05 Auto Relay 06 Manual Relay 07 Manual Relay 08 Manual 4 20mA Out01 Return 4 20mA OutO02 4 20mA 0utO03 4 20mA Outa ontrozt lt EM gt Set Nes Name Status Usage ontrol oft On Limit ToAuto Figure 3 9 Input Tray for Relay 02 custom name Then the user would press the Right arrow again to highlight the Set New Name prompt as shown in Figure 3 10 These may seem like extra steps but they help prevent accidental changes to the relay custom name 52 E i Figure 3 10 Highlight on Set New Name With Set New Name highlighted the user can press Enter to edit the custom name Figure 3 11 Input Prompt at first position of Input Tray The arrowheads will disappear and an insertion prompt a blinking underline will appear in the beginning of the custom name Input Tray as shown in Figure 3 11 The arro
19. will be pre set to Force Low The Activation Limit Timer setting will be 90 minutes by 91 default Relay 08 will be pre set to activate as the Alarm relay for the various alarm conditions possible for the Inputs and in the control modes available Inputs Available Only Conductivity sensor Inputs will be available for control with the Conductivity sensor pre set to control Relay 01 The Alarm conditions described below have a default one minute Alarm delay except the Flow Switch that by default has no delay set The Flow Switch will cause an Alarm condition if flow becomes insufficient The Conductivity sensor will have its High Alarm and Low Alarm available The Temperature sensor is available to allow for Conductivity calibration but can also be used to trigger alarms 4 20mA Out The first of the optional 4 20 milliamp outputs willbe set to follow the Conductivity sensor for outside charting monitoring or recording purposes The rest these analog outputs would not have any default setting but any existing relationships with the remaining outputs would be maintained when switching to this mode Figure 5 4 Highlight on Conductivity Controlled Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor Conductivity controlled Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor CondBld amp Feed This mode begins a series of Operation modes that are variations on a theme The theme is Bleed amp Feed which is a Bleed controlled by Conductivity a Timer or a Water Vo
20. 0 as the Cycle Set Point and they set the Cycle Dead Band to 1 0 once the relay was activated it would not deactivate until the Cycle value dropped to 2 0 instead of shutting off right at 3 0 The magnitude of the Cycle Dead Band setting required at your installation will depend on the physical locations of the conductivity sensors bleed valve make up water entry point and so forth Limit Timer Activation Limit Timer This is a setting to take control of the relay if the normal deactivation does not occur The factory default time limit is 90 minutes If this activation time limit is exceeded the OvrTimeLimit Alarm condition occurs and the relay activates or deactivates depending on its RlayReaction setting in the Alarms Actions menu When the cause of the problem is resolved the user can go to the ActiveAlarms menu explained in the Active Alarms chapter of this manual and use the Clear Alarm to restore normal operation The relay will not operate normally until the Alarm is cleared Timer Start amp Stop Control Modes Timer Modes 127 The category of control modes after the Set Point category is the Timer Start amp Stop group of control modes These control modes activate the relay at a user defined time of day and then have the relay stay activated for a user defined duration of time 1 Me OB Figure 6 14 The Timer Start amp Stop Control Mode Category Moving the highlight down to the Timer Modes me
21. 02 after a user defined volume of water has been measured for a fixed time duration It will be the only Auto Control mode available for Relay 02 Relay 08 will be designated as an Alarm Relay intended to activate an external Alarm indicator like an exterior Bell or Strobe Default Settings Relay 01 Activates Bleed Valve Set Point On Off Input is Conductivity sensor Control Effect is pre set to Force Low with the Activation Limit Timer setting set to 90 minutes by default Relay 02 Activates Inhibitor Pump using a Digital Input as the Water Meter Input for the Water Meter and Timer control mode The settings may be adjusted by the user 99 Relay 08 will be pre set to activate as the Alarm relay for the various Alarm conditions possible in this Operation Mode Inputs Available Only the Conductivity and Digital Inputs willbe available for output control The Conductivity sensor will be pre set to control the Bleed Valve relay and the Water Meter pre set to control the Inhibitor pump relay The Alarm conditions described below have a default one minute Alarm delay except the Flow Switch that by default has no delay set The Flow Switch will cause an Alarm condition if flow becomes insufficient The Conductivity sensor will have its High Alarm and Low Alarm available The Temperature sensor is available to allow for Conductivity calibration but can also be used to trigger alarms The Digital Input will have its High Volum
22. 4 20mA output would not have any default setting and could be set to reflect the status of any of the available Inputs or Outputs Conductivity Bleed Inhibitor Feed by Water Volume CndBld FeedV Similar to the previous mode again with the Inhibitor being pumped independent of the Bleed Valve Here the Inhibitor relay is activated by a user defined Volume measurement froma Water Meter expected to be measuring the Make up water Each time the user defined Volume is reached Relay 02 is activated for a user defined fixed time duration For example the user could pump Inhibitor for 5 minutes after every 300 gallons of Make up water has been added 98 The Bleed Valve is still being controlled by the Conductivity Set Point in this mode Figure 5 8 Highlight on Conductivity Bleed Feed by Water Volume Outputs Available Only Relay 01 pre named Bleed Valve Relay 02 pre named InhibitrPump and Relay 08 pre named Alarm Relay will be visible along with the 4 20 mA Outputs if installed Auto Control Modes Available Relay 01 will be designated as controlling a Bleed Valve and pre set to use the Set Point On Off control mode with the Conductivity sensor for the Input That mode and the Set Point Time Proportional control mode will be the only Auto Control modes available for Relay 01 Relay 02 will be designated as controlling a chemical pump and set to use the Water Meter and Timer control mode set to activate Relay
23. BleedOnMakUp Bleed based on Make up This is a very specific water meter control mode The BleedOnMakUp control mode bleeds a user defined volume of water from the system activated by a user defined volume of Make up water that has entered the system This control mode assumes there are two or more water meters available as inputs and is only shown in the Water Meter Modes menu when the Relay Usage is set to Bleed Valve control Figure 6 39 The Bleed based on Make up control mode One use for this control mode is to consider the amount of make up water entering the system as a measurement of evaporation loss which is raising the TDS and to use that measurement to define when a Bleed should occur to lower the TDS MakeUp Meter Make Up Meter This menu displays the currently selected Make up water meter and has a submenu where the user can select which water meter is monitoring the Make Up water by highlighting the Input name ina list and pressing the Enter key There is also a handy Go To Set up shortcut will take the user directly to the Input 154 Set up menu of the Input selected Just highlight and press Enter Measurement This menu item is a live display of the volume measurement from the Input selected as the Make Up Meter This accumulation value is reset to zero each time this control mode activates the Bleed Valve so it is not a lifetime Make Up volume The displayed value can serve as an indicatio
24. Control menu for a Relay controlling a Bleed Valve or Chemical Pump is the Lockout Menu Only Relays set to the Bleed Valve and Pump Relay Usage will be listed in the Lockout menu but not the Relay this menu is under Relays whose Usage is Alarm Relay or Not In Use are not shown in a Lockout menu Ie M Figure 6 44 The Relay 01 Lockout Menu Lockouts Why and When The idea of a Lockout is to prevent some other relay or relays from activating while this relay is active Say for example there is a biocide addition scheduled for 13 00 every day which has to remain in the water for 2 hours to be effective But at 12 55 on a particular day the TDS increases to the point where the Conductivity measurement passes the Set Point to open 161 the Bleed valve It would be a waste of money and chemical to introduce the biocide while the Bleed valve is draining water out of the system A Lockout could be set to prevent that problem The Lockout would be set in the Lockout Menu of the Bleed Valve relay by highlighting the name of the Biocide relay and pressing the Enter key The user is declaring That Biocide relay is in Lockout anytime the Bleed Valve relay is activated To continue this example say that once the biocide has been introduced it needs to stay in the system for two hours What if during that time some sensor measurement would activate the Bleed Valve relay The biocide would be drained fro
25. Email menu Via Email Under the Via Email menu are three submenus shown in Figure 9 9 The first two can immediately email a log to up to three email addresses while the third submenu is for setting up a periodic automatic data download via email The email addresses are defined in the NetwrkConfig menu in the Dwnld Emails submenu Figure 9 10 Highlight on the SystmActivty menu showing Download Now SystmActivty This first submenu allows the user to email the System Activity Log immediately to up to three email addresses assuming the controller is connected to an Ethernet connection and that all the appropriate IP settings and email addresses have 241 been configured properly in the NetwrkConfig menu Viewing Data DownloadLogs Via Email 4S ystmActivt yp To USB Drive Data By Figure 9 11 The dialog indicating the System Activity Log has been emailed There is only one submenu for the SystmActivty menu the Download Now item as shown in Figure 9 11 To email the System Activity Log the user simply highlights the Download Now menu item and presses the Enter key First a message window will appear indicating the log file is being generated and then a second dialog will appear indicating the email has been sent The user would press Enter to get back to the menus Viewing Data DownloadLogs Via Email 45 ip To USB Drive ys tmActivty PDownload Now AutoDownload Figure 9 12
26. High Alarm If the pH measurement goes above a user defined value Low Alarm Ifthe pH measurement goes below a user defined value Sensor Error If the sensor reports values out of range or the controller recognizes the sensor has failed Calibration The submenus under this item explained in detail earlier in this chapter are where the sensor s measurements can be adjusted for greater accuracy or calibrated Like many sensors three types of calibration are offered for a pH sensor Field Calibration A simple 1 point calibration that does not require probe removal 1 Point Reference Calibration A more involved calibration usually requires probe removal and cleaning and may use laboratory prepared reference samples 2 Point Reference Calibration Like doing two of the 1 Point Reference Calibrations it should be the most accurate method but only if done carefully NotForContrl And lastly the handy Not For Control option This would remove the pH Input from all the Output Control menus preventing this pH sensor from being used 205 to control an output relay It would still be listed here in the Input Set up menu so it can be used to monitor the water quality have the user set alarms and have the sensor s measurements stored in the Data Log ORP Sensor Oxygen Reduction Potential Sensor An ORP sensor is always listed after any pH or CTP Temperature inputs The ORP sensor measures the amount of oxidizer in the wat
27. Input Usage Digital Input Usage WatrMtr Reed Since Figure 8 32 shows the first Usage selection is for a Reed Switch Water Meter it makes sense to look at the Settings Menu for that usage first Figure 8 33 Volume Units Here is the list of volume units that the user can pick from to go with the Contact Volume numerical value defined in the menu below this one This item s submenu simply lists the three choices gal US Fluid Gallons ltr Metric Fluid Liters m3 Metric Cubic Meters ml Metric Cubic Milliliters designed for flow verification meters The user highlights the units they want to use and presses the Enter key to make the choice The active box is drawn around their selection The factory default is Gallons 211 ContactVolum Contact Volume This menu is where the user defines a number which willrepresent what unit volume of fluid each contact or pulse from the Reed Switch Water Meter represents However in this menu the user only defines the number What that unit volume is gallons liters or cubic meters is set in the Volume Units menu above this one In this ContactVolum menu the user is setting whether each pulse represents one 1 of those units of volume or ten 10 or a tenth 0 1 or athousand 1 000 The user can set this value from 0 1 to 9999 Figure 8 34 Highlight on Settings Menu Total amp Reset for WatrMtr Reed Usage Total amp Reset Totalization and Reset Now that the user h
28. Low Alarm returns to the normal range on its own the associated alarm will auto clear and Alarm emails and phone calls will be sent to notify that the Auto Clear as occurred Relay OvrTimeLimit alarms do not auto clear and must be manually cleared by the user Notice the first step is to fix whatever problem is causing the alarm The problem should be resolved before the alarm condition is cleared from the controller If the situation that caused the alarmis still present when the alarm is cleared the alarm will just reoccur In some situations like a malfunctioning Input sensor the alarm will reoccur immediately there may be some small delay before the controller notices but there will be other situations where the alarm will not reoccur until sometime later when an Output activation is attempted for example In any case the user should find and resolve the problem that caused the alarm before clearing the alarm condition at the controller Turn off that bell If the controller has a relay designated as an Alarm Relay that relay is normally activated by any alarm by default It is intended to control some external alarm indicator like a strobe light or alarm bell If the alarm cannot be resolved quickly and the user wants to deactivate the external alarm indicator they can simply go to the Control Menu for the Alarm Relay highlight the Relay Off menu item and press Enter This does not
29. Menu for Relay 08 as an Alarm Relay 115 The Relay Off and Relay On menu items serve a dual function Remember the main function of an Alarm Relay is the option of activating it in some other relay s Alarm Settings menu when an Alarm condition occurs to that other relay So the primary function of these items is to display the current status of the relay by having the Active Box around one of these two menu items But they also provide manual control over the relay to allow the external alarm device to be turned off Relay Off if the alarm condition cannot be resolved quickly or to help test the alarm device connected to the relay Relay On Relay Off Highlighting this menu item and pressing the Enter key will turn off the relay and the Active Box will be drawn around this menu item to show it has been selected This does not clear any alarm condition that may have turned on this Alarm Relay but it will deactivate the external alarm device connected to this relay It is safe to manually deactivate an Alarm Relay in that any subsequent alarm condition can turn the Alarm Relay back on again which would remove the Active Box from this menu item and draw the Active Box around the Relay On menu item Relay On Highlighting the Relay On menu item and pressing the Enter key will manually activate the relay and the Active Box willbe drawn around this menu item to show it has been selected This function is typically u
30. Navigate Menus with 4 way Navigator arrow pad To go along with the big beautiful display is a simple menu system that displays the control options in an easy to navigate outline form pjs This is explained in detail later in the Navigating the Menus section of the Description of Controls chapter The user sees a hierarchical list of features on the large display and can move around the menu using a four arrow keys Up Down Right Left When they have moved the highlight onto the option they want they press Enter It is very intuitive and easy to understand Front Panel Direct Access Keys As easy as the menus are to navigate why bother when direct access is available with a single key press On the front panel of the controller are Direct Access keys to go immediately to the control menus for any Relay to the Active Alarm menu to the Menu Screen where the lists of features begin or back to the Home screen for an overall look at the system Instant access Context aware Help Key See the Help key on the front panel Press that and get immediate help text about whatever the highlight is on No more searching If the user does not understand an abbreviation in the menus They simply highlight the menu item and press Help Control By Output This is the heart and brains of the Triton controller system and offers unique advantages In a Triton controller the user can control their system via the Outputs Relay
31. Spike Period Each Relay has a separate Lockout menu used to prevent other relays from activating while the relay is active There is an option in that separate Lockout menu for Additional Lockout Time AddLockTime that will extend the Lockout beyond the deactivation of the relay This AddSpikeLock menu allows the user to increase that additional lockout time during the Spike Period Whatever value in minutes the user sets in this menu will be added to the normal AddLockTime setting to define the additional lockout time during the Spike Period Spike Cycle This menu is what makes this mode special There are two versions 124 Weekly Spike and 28 Day Spike and they both have the same settings In the weekly cycle the user defines the settings for Sunday through Saturday and the settings are repeated weekly In the 28 Day cycle the user has the same settings but for Sunday 1 through Saturday 1 Sunday 2 through Saturday 2 Sunday 3 through Saturday 3 Sunday 4 through Saturday 4 and the settings are repeated every 28 days To select a day to have a Spike occur simply set the time of day the Spike Period should start at then set the Spike Period to a value other than zero and press the Enter key The familiar active box will then be drawn around the day name to show that a Spike is scheduled for that day Set the value back to zero to deactivate a day Don t forget you also have to select Use Mode Now to start this c
32. The User Modes The four User Modes or User defined Operation Modes are where the user can take full advantage of the features of the Triton controller Unlike the Ready to Use modes nothing is hidden in the User Modes The user can see and select every possible combination of Output Input and Control Mode available on a Triton controller There are four of the user defined operation modes to which the user can give a custom name and use to hold their water treatment settings for immediate use or later reference 65 Perhaps the user will want to program operation modes for Spring Summer Fall and Winter On the other hand perhaps modes for Below 32F Above 32F Above 85F and Vacation will better meet their needs In these modes it s all up to the user I AER AA Figure 3 27 The User Mode Operation Modes The user can even copy the settings from one of the RtU modes into a User Mode or from one User Mode to another For example if the user wanted to experiment with some changes they could copy the mode they are using now into an unused User Mode and experiment in that new mode without modifying their original program Output Control Control By Output is the main design concept of the Triton water treatment controller The user can simply go to the OutputContrl menu then to the menu of a particular Relay and find all the control settings in its submenus Figure 3 28 shows the OutputContrl menu highlight
33. The first item in the list usually the first Digital Input that is set to a water meter usage will be selected by default Both Reed Switch Dry Contact and Hall Effect Paddlewheel water meters are supported when connected to one of the Digital Inputs Measurement This submenu displays a live measurement of accumulated water volume as measured by the water meter selected in the first submenu for reference The value displayed is only the volume of water measured by the water meter since the last relay activation not a lifetime accumulation When the relay is activated or a water meter is first selected this Measurement value is reset to zero TriggerVolum Trigger Volume This submenu is used to set the volume of water that should cause the relay to activate The user can specify from 0 to 999 999 gallons On Duration This submenu is where user defines how long the relay should remain activated once the volume of water has exceeded the trigger volume The user can specify durations from 1 to 1440 minutes 24 hours 5 minutes is the default entry Use Mode Now This is the activator for this control mode After adjusting the 153 settings in the previous menus the user would highlight this menu item and press Enter to start this control mode The active box would be drawn around this menu item and the Water Meter Modes category menu item to indicate which control mode is active Water Meter Modes
34. These menus allow the user to perform a Field Calibration on this Input The user employs some instrument to measure a characteristic of the system water and then they can adjust the Input s measurement to this new value Figure 8 11 Remember that the accuracy of a field calibration has a lot to do with where the water is sampled and if that location is representative of the water the Input sensor is measuring For example taking a temperature reading from a location where the water is much 188 warmer than it is near the Temperature sensor being calibrated would not yield an accurate calibration Input Set up Conductivty SO 9NGNSEASEY 3 Input Status Measurement AlarmSettngs Calibration dLastCal Date NotForContrl Next Cal Due Figure 8 11 Input Set up Calibration 1Pt FieldCal menu for Conductivity sensor When the user highlights the 1Pt FieldCal menu item and presses Enter to begin the calibration the controller will display a series of interactive dialog windows the first of which is shown in Figure 8 12 Calibrate Temperature First This display is just a reminder that many Input sensors rely on an accurate temperature measurement supplied by the temperature sensor built into the Triton s combination Flow Switch Conductivity Temperature probe in order to perform a temperature compensation on their own measurements Input Set up Conductivty 189 Figure 8 12 1Pt FieldCal Reminder to consid
35. Timer submenu has the days of the week listed Sunday Monday through Saturday The user should go to the submenus described below and change the settings before they activate the mode to start using it When the On Duration value is changed from zero the day will automatically become active with the active box around it After setting the days they want to use the user would then highlight Use Mode Now at the bottom of the list and press Enter to activate the Weekly Timer control mode The active box would be drawn around the Weekly Timer menu prompt and the control mode category Timer Modes to indicate they are now in use 132 JutputContri Relay 01 Auto Control wwWYYYY Figure 6 18 The Weekly Timer Control Mode The user can also add a Pre Bleed or Pre Feed operation to the Weekly Cycle activations Remember that Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed menus are not shown in the timer control menus of a Relay controlling a Bleed Valve More details about the Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed options are in their own explanation sections below Figure 6 19 The Weekly Timer Sunday Menu Each of the days Sunday through Saturday has the same submenu items shown in Figure 6 19 to control the relay 133 00 00 This menu item shows the time of day in 24 hour format that the relay activation would start on that particular day The start time and the activity duration can be different for e
36. Tray to their right with an Edit Value control and use the special entry dialog so up to 40 characters can be input And like other activators the user would move the highlight onto the Use Auth menu item and press Enter to activate authentication The Active Box would then be drawn around the activator and the Authenticate parent menu item The Triton controller only supports the AUTH PLAIN protocol for email authentication 29 Figure 15 18 Highlight on Authenticate showing its submenus and activator Figure 15 19 Highlight on MAC Address menu with its display item MAC Address The MAC Address menu is the last of the CommSettings sub menus under the Network Configuration NetwrkConfig menu As shown in Figure 15 19 it is a display only menu that shows the controller s Media Access Control address MAC address This is a unique number that is assigned to any device that wants to communicate on networks such as Ethernet MAC address are often displayed in the format NN NN NN NN NN NN where NN is a two digit hexadecimal number but the dashes have been removed in the Triton display so the value will fit in a 12 digit format 292 Plug n Play The second sub menu under NetwrkConfig is Plug n Play as shown in Figure 15 20 A Figure 15 20 Highlight on Plug n Play menu showing its sub menus The Plug n Play menu is where the user can man
37. User defined Operation Modes further into this Reference Manual SetPnt Onoff gt SetPnt TimeP setPnt Spike SetPnt Cyci e r Figure 3 16 Set Point Control Modes The next step is to move the highlight to the right again to the Set Point On Off SetPnt OnOff menu item That will cause the display to scroll to the left again to display the submenus of the Set Point On Off mode to the right as in Figure 3 17 Figure 3 17 The Set Point On Off menu items 57 The Select Input menu is where user can select the Input to control the relay The Measurement menu displays the live measurement value the sensor is reporting The Set Point menu is where the Set Point value is entered as explained below The ContrlEffect menu allows the user to choose if the relay activation will force the input measurement lower Force Low or force the measurement higher Force High The Dead Band menu is for setting the dead band value to keep the relay from cycling on and off too often The Limit Timer menu is where the user can adjust the Activation Limit Timer for this relay to take control of the relay if it fails to deactivate normally The Use Mode Now menu item is the activator for this control mode After adjusting the control settings a user must highlight Use Mode Now and press Enter to use the control mode The active box will be drawn around Use Mode Now the SetPnt OnOff
38. When the switch is in the upper position the corresponding relay is powered Wet and when the switch is in the lower position the relay is unpowered Dry WARNING There are live electrical circuits inside the enclosure even when the front panel power switch is in the OFF position The power shall be removed from the controller before accessing the front door to the inside of the enclosure e Do not exceed 5 amps current through a single relay they are fused at 6 3 amps e Do not exceed 15 amps current as the sum of all relays they are fused at 16 amps e 14 18AWG wire is recommended for relay connections e 0 25 inches of exposed conductor is recommended for relay block connections e Recommended longest wire run is 100 ft to maintain 5 amps with 18 AWG wire e Relays are rated for continuous activation with control limit of 1440 minutes Relay Output Wiring Examples Metering Pump as N O Solenoid Valve as N O Motorized Ball Valve as N C 4 20 mA Outputs The controller can be fitted with up to three optional 4 20 mA Output boards These boards are available with two or four inputs on the board They plug into the same three board headers that can be used for the 4 20 mA Inputs 37 The wiring illustration shown uses a single four output board installed in the leftmost position as an example with the ports numbered bottom to top through 4 Subsequent boards would use the same wiring scheme with the ports n
39. ability of the other levels to make changes 259 control Read Only access and adjust the No Activity Timeout Limit A user logged in with the User Level 1 password can only use the last three menus By default User Level 1 access can control the User Level 2 access control the Read Only access and adjust the No Activity Timeout Limit An Admin Level user can deny the User Level 1 access however A user logged in with the User Level 2 passwordcan only use the last menu by default to adjust the No Activity Timeout Limit But this ability can be denied by a User Level 1 or Admin Level user or those higher level users can increase the change access of User Level 2 until it parallels that of User Level 1 Any user can normally press the Enter key to look in the menus Read Only access but passwords will be hidden and they cannot make any changes But even this Read Only access can be denied to non password users by an Admin or User Level 1 user ARE Adimin Pswrd gt NetwrkConfig ReadOnlyCntl User 2 Pswrdb wefrn tx ing A m 2 gt Figure 12 2 Highlight on PasswdAccess Admin menu showing sub menus Admin Menu Figure 12 2 shows the submenus for the Admin Menu The first submenu is for changing the Admin Level password the second is for changing the User Level 1 password the third is for changing the User Level 2 password the fourth is for adjusting the User 1 Level change access and the fifth clears all the
40. active box will appear around the item and 4 mA of current will be output Manual 20mA Works the same way but adjusting the output amperage to precisely 20 mA when selected Manual4 20mA This menu item allows the user to set the output to any amperage from 4 0 to 20 0 mA When the desired output level is set in the submenu which is set to 12 mA by default the user can highlight the Manual4 20mA menu prompt and press the Enter key to match the output amperage to the setting value The setting value can also be changed while this control is active j 7 Manual J Manual4 20mAus Figure 6 54 4 20mA Out01 Manual4 20mA menu showing setting sub menu 170 ReturnToAuto This menu item is a how the user can return to the normal tracking function for the 4 20 mA Output after using one of the manual controls Just highlight the ReturnToAuto menu item and press the Enter key and the Active Box willbe drawn around the Auto Control menu item to show that automatic control has been restored 171 7 Active Alarms Overview The Triton water treatment controller has various Alarm conditions to indicate problems with the water treatment system The Alarm conditions are set up in the Input Set up and Output Control menus For Inputs the user can control what will cause an alarm and for Inputs and Outputs the user can define what will happen if an alarm occurs Refer to the sections in this manual named
41. and Low Alarm available The Temperature sensor is available to allow for Conductivity calibration but can also be used to trigger alarms 4 20mA Out The first of the optional 4 20 milliamp outputs will be set to follow the Conductivity sensor for outside charting monitoring or recording purposes The remaining 4 20mA output would not have any default setting and could be set to reflect the status of any of the available Inputs or Outputs Conductivity Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor with 2 Biocides CB amp Feed 2Bio The same as the previous mode with the addition of a second alternating Biocide also being controller by a Timer The Bleed Valve is still controlled by a Conductivity Set Point and the Inhibitor pump relay is still activated by the Bleed Valve Outputs Available Relay 01 pre named Bleed Valve Relay 02 pre named InhibitrPump Relay 03 pre named BiocidelPump Relay 04 pre named Biocide2Pump and Relay 08 pre named Alarm Relay will be visible along with the 4 20 mA Outputs if installed Figure 5 10 Highlight on Conductivity Bleed amp Feed with two 28 Day Biocides Auto Control Modes Available Relay 01 will be designated as controlling a Bleed Valve and set to use the Set Point On Off control mode using the Conductivity sensor for the Input That mode and the Set Point Time Proportional control mode will be the 102 only Auto Control modes shown for Relay 01 Relay 02 will be desi
42. automatically if the input starts reporting values out of range or if the controller detects the input sensor has failed It does have the usual Alarm Delay menu and the Alarm Actions menus where the user can light the front panel Alarm lamp Activate or Lockout Relays and have the controller send alarm emails if a Sensor Error occurs The UseTheAlarms menu item as always is the activator for all three alarms and must be selected to have the menu settings made in the three previous menus take effect The user should make their Alarm settings in the previous menus and then highlight the UseTheAlarms menu item and press the Enter key to activate the Alarms The active box willbe drawn around the UseTheAlarms menu item to show it has been selected TESTE EN gt istCa Date NotForContrl Set Cal 4mA gt v Figure 8 54 Highlight on the Calibration menu for 4 20mA In 01 Calibration The Calibration menus for the 4 20 mA inputs are designed for factory calibration not 231 for field use A very accurate reference current amperage must be supplied to the controller at either 4 mA or 20 mA precisely and then the input measurement can be adjusted to match the reference Figure 8 54 If a user attempts to employ these menus with bad results they can use the Reset Cal menu item to restore factory default values LastCal Date The Date of Last Calibration LastCal Date submenu displays the date upon which t
43. be visible along with the 4 20 mA Outputs if installed Figure 5 11 Conductivity Bleed amp Feed w Oxidizing Biocide and pH control Auto Control Modes Available Relay 01 willbe designated as controlling a Bleed Valve and set to use the Set Point On Off control mode using the Conductivity sensor for the Input That mode and the Set Point Time Proportional control mode will be the only Auto Control modes shown for Relay 01 Relay 02 will be designated as controlling a chemical pump and only have the With and After Other Relay control modes available pre set to activate with Relay 01 They will be the only Auto Control modes shown for Relay 02 Relay 03 willalso be designated as controlling a chemical pump and set to use the Set 104 Point On Off control mode using the ORP sensor for the Input That mode the Set Point Time Proportional control mode and the Timer Start and Stops modes will be the only Auto Control modes available for Relay 03 Relay 04 will be designated as controlling a chemical pump and set to use the Set Point On Off control mode using the pH sensor for the Input That mode and the Set Point Time Proportional control mode will be the only Auto Control modes shown for Relay 04 Relay 08 will be designated as an Alarm Relay intended to activate an external Alarm indicator like an exterior Bell or Strobe Default Settings Relay 01 Activates Bleed Valve Set Point On Off Input is Conductivity sensor
44. before the Alarm Email address is active for normal alarm emails see below Use Email 1 is the activator for the first alarm email address The user must select this menu item when they want this email address to receive alarm emails The Active Box will be drawn around the activator and the parent menu item Alarm Email1 to indicate it is active The activator allows the user to turn on and off the alarm emails to a particular address without having to erase or re enter the email address The other two Alarm Email menus do the same thing and have the same sub menus as the Alarm Email1 example explained above Dwnld Emails is a menu similar to Alarm Emails There are three menus in which email addresses can be defined shown in Figure 15 14 and ifan AutoDownload has been set up in the Viewing Data DownloadLogs Via Email menu these email addresses are the ones to which the logs will be sent Each of the three email definition menus have 288 the same two sub menus also shown in Figure 15 14 Email Address is the first of the sub menus This is where the user can enter an email address to which the data logs will be sent Although the 12 character Input Tray may not display the entire address a special dialog is used when the Edit Value item is selected so email addresses up to 40 characters can be used nailSetti wild Emails AE gt MTP Addr Dwnld Email Ise Dwnld 1 PMaits Figure 15 14 Highligh
45. corners of the number pad for entering a capitalized letter or decimal point and for entering a space or changing a number value back and forth from positive to negative To enter a capitalized letter press the Shift key and then release it before pressing the key to enter the desired capital letter Only the first letter entered after pressing the Shift key will be capitalized To abandon an entry in progress just press the Back Cancel key The entry in progress will be discarded and the entry will revert to its previous value The Enter key The user uses this key to show when they want to make a change or when they are done making a change i The Navigator This array of four arrow keys can move the user through every one of the various controller screens and options From the Home screen the user simply presses the Down arrow once to access the Menu screen where they press the Right Down Left and Up arrows to navigate the menus Direct Relay Access These keys are right below the Relay Activity lights under the large display The user can go directly to a relay s control menu by simply pressing the corresponding access key What could be easier 43 The Home screen This is the screen that first appears on the Triton controller and is the top of the menu of screens that the user can access The user can go immediately to this screen from anywhere in the menu structure by pressing the Home key on the front
46. csv file compatible with most third party data acquisition systems such as LXF s Track 3 Viewing Data DownloadLogs Via Email To USB DrivedSystmActivty Figure 9 20 The message that the data log is being generated To start the download the user simply highlights the Download Now sub menu item and DA presses the Enter key A message display as shown in Figure 9 20 will indicate the data log is being generated which may take a few minutes if the data log is full A second message will appear when the file is being downloaded do not remove the USB drive until the second message shown in Figure 9 21 disappears Viewing Data DownloadLogs Via Email To USB DrivedSystmActivty es Figure 9 21 The message that the data log is being copied to the USB drive 248 10 Output Status and Input Measure Overview Here is a list of the Menu Screen items for the Triton controller and which preceding chapter of this Reference Manual has already described that menu ActiveAlarms OutputStatus OutputContrl InputMeasure Input Set up Viewing Data WaterIndexes Operate Mode PasswdAccess HomeScrnEdit NetwrkConfig SysInfo amp Updt Chapter 7 Chapter 6 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 5 Before moving on to the Water Indexes menu Password Access menu and so forth this chapter will briefly describe the Output Status and Input Measurement InputMeasure menus which are both simple reference displa
47. date the reference display in Figure 13 11 would immediately show that date and any 28 Day Cycle control modes employed afterward would be synchronized to that date Note If the user employs a control mode using a 28 Day Cycle after the Start Cycle date has been established they see areminder message about what Cycle Week the controller is currently in and that they can use this menu to adjust the Start Cycle date The HideCyclWeek item does just that when it has the active box drawn around it the display of the Cycle Week is removed from the Home Screen display The user DNA toggles this choice by simply highlighting the menu item and pressing the Enter key p e ng lat PasswdAcces s t taTor Row Edit l ia 6 Row Status Ipat Temp Scale i Dat Adjust 28 Day Cycle MEE 22 06 gt contrastCntl Figure 13 12 Highlight on Time Adjust showing the current time setting Time Adjust is the menu where the user can set or adjust the current time as shown in Figure 13 12 When the Time Adjust menu item is highlighted the current time setting 1s displayed with the Edit Value item to the right Although the time display here shows the seconds there is no direct adjustment for the seconds Instead the seconds value is reset to zero automatically whenever a time setting edit is finalized with the Enter key put St p econ strtMea utMeasu t Set 1 f ng at WateriIndex PasswdA litdTop Row Edit Figu
48. dd EI A ALE a LEE EOS 216 MA o ea a ed de ad reg 216 O da Seabee Cavs Can Ca onan cuts dion deus dad e e 216 MIA A ies cedars daca snsacads Cause secuuets se Covedacasetavasstassinendnontass E E TEA 216 TAS TRG Se EEEE as 216 Reset Totals scss te aia 216 AUTOR ui A A A aed a SA EA A A AA A a A a E 216 Fow Rate ON 217 Alarm Setool Shae RRR Da AMAR au anni 217 OA ncaueanq AE 217 Ns BR Coe ye F710 Pe nee ene aaa 217 TO WR Ate Alarma detenta de LORI LIADO ANA pede OD pA coderetendecess 217 Digital Input Usage DigthCounter ee eesssseeessseseeeesescseseeesscscseeecscseeeeecasscseecacsesesceasscseeeeeeeeasaeees 217 SN ON O 218 NN Senos 218 RAS C0 obese ee Nn a rea acens 219 RR OR RON 219 MU e 219 RO 219 OO 219 RENO O RRE TERROR RS ARNO 219 Total RES EE naa aos 219 Caled Rate AAEE ANER EENE E EA EEEE EAE A T 219 aN API SCC NN 219 Sh Al arin ee IIS E a E SE AU Se a E SU NS E 219 Hi Rat Alar Mine E EE EEEE EEEE Gaeta E EAEE E sass Taos than aan A NEEN 220 ERA S SEERE AE EA AA A AEA AAEE 220 Digital Input Usage GenrlPurpose ss eesseeeseeesseetsrssesrssterrstertsrertsrertsrertsrettsrererttestetesteteristentetsteeertete 220 Dist di td sd 220 DI Ope ns EEEIEE EEA AE N A A E A AEA A OAA AEEA 220 Closed NaMe n T Sane Rae ae O aa A A 222 Diet EOL EE EAEE 222 ey bs ae INGO IMAL foes fe sedik aa 222 Open Name A biel eich eh ee AR 222 Disttal OP nad liens eile aa pis ed dial DL 222 Open MAS ati A iaa 222 LN RRA 222 Alarm Set
49. eT ac A ADA ASNICAR E OIE 272 ZO DICE soi vie de tet A AE daa 273 Time Adqj stids id tdo tdo bit da do a da id ita de de ata id tata 275 Contrastentls ss his Ls AA A A A Bea i ii tit ta ida de a ta titan 275 14 HELP SY SEWN ia AE IAEA 277 A sucsecensecesecebeceseestoceecesbecseccoseeneuosbeceovessucstcsntednsestecsecessecsacesssesesssae 277 Help System MGI scsccsssssscsssssssesssasasesskesesedevscacevcsecscecesesscasesedsstcase ssesesesedenssasesedevosesusssscusesesenscasusesssncesasesseasetedenbcnse 279 15 NETWORK CONFIGURATION ssisicsieicciciccissrseneieucenchceadcebitewdseataawicaielandceiwdns 281 OVERVIEW nn O 281 CommSet ti ngs cccsccccsssccsccecsessccessccessssessssscsessssessscssseesessssessssessssessesecsesecsessssessssessssessesecsessscessssessssessesecsesesseres 281 LAN TP SEP A ii 281 USB IP Setup itn ee ee Eoee Ea E n E E seo isis 281 Fimail Setting cienie iran 281 MAC Ad dre ssi tise ick ts O It hd EOE dad da td dn tee dae Ne 282 CAN MB a 283 DHCP ys Static Address 283 Statie IP Adi AA AA A ARA AN AA AA AA 283 NAS A RA 284 Static Gate a is iii lado it tada even ves ti de ae tas tdo Satis dida ibid ta 284 NA A A RAR 285 UsesStaticNo Wat cda E 285 USB IP SU idea 286 DHCP ys Static Address ide risas 286 Emall Setting iii A 287 Alarm 000610 bc SRS CSE e cs le e cts que ds ota cats dos deta ida Lois qee le toa o a cc do Ma 287 Email Address sis Lo tt ii ta dt tE tt AI ab Waa EAE 287 Als a wana 287 Send TESEMS
50. first CommSettings submenus the next menu item to consider is the USB IP Setup menu Figure 15 10 Highlight on USB IP Addrs menu showing two familiar submenus USB IP Setup DHCP vs Static Addressing This setup menu shown in Figure 15 10 and 15 11 is only related to using a computer plugged into the Mini USB port on the front panel of the controller to access the controller s web interface Figure 15 11 Highlight on UseStaticAdr menu showing its submenus and activator The user should not have to adjust these settings as the UseStaticAdr definitions have 286 been preset at the factory to work with almost any computer These settings have nothing to do with plugging a USB data stick into the USB Type A port nor do they have any effect on the Ethernet connection EmailSetting The Email Setting menu is where emails addresses can be entered for the Alarm emails and the automatic data downloads As shown in Figure 5 12 there are also two submenus for setting the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP server address and port There is a fifth submenu where the user would enter their return email address and a sixth menu for controlling email authentication vvyvyyy Figure 15 12 Highlight on CommSettings EmailSetting showing its submenus Alarm Emails is a simple menu There are three places for email addresses shown in Figure 15 13 and every time an Alarm occurs these email addresses can be
51. following Status displays NN N mA Out Displays the current output value in milliamps Input Error Means the input to the 4 20 mA output is reporting an error InputMeasure This menu is like the Output Status menu but for the Inputs It is a reference display of every Input with their current measurement value displayed next to each Input This menu is just an information display no changes can be made here The first submenu of the InputMeasure menu item is a list of all the Inputs installed displaying the Custom Name for convenience To the right of each Input name is a display item that shows its current measurement value If a controller has so many Inputs installed that the list goes past the bottom of the display the user can simply 250 move the highlight into the list and scroll down using the Down Arrow until they can see the Input they wish In the example shown in Figure 10 2 not all the Inputs can be seen without scrolling as some of the optional 4 20 mA Inputs have been installed gt Lt UA sy 1 Figure 10 2 Highlight on InputMeasure menu showing the list and value displays That is all there is to the Output Status and Input Measurement menus They are just reference displays for the Outputs and Inputs so the user can get a quick overall view of what is happening in their water treatment system Now the descriptions and explanations for the rest of the menus continue below Water Indexes Pa
52. for Relay 01 Relay 02 will be designated as controlling a chemical pump and only with the Other Relay control modes available pre set to activate after Relay 01 deactivates Those will be the only Auto Control modes shown for Relay 02 Relay 08 will be designated as an Alarm Relay intended to activate an external Alarm indicator like an exterior Bell or Strobe Default Settings Relay 01 Activates the Bleed Valve using the Bleed on Make up control mode with the Activation Limit Timer set to 90 minutes by default Relay 02 Activates Inhibitor Pump after Relay 01 deactivates with a O minute Delay with an Activation Limit Timer set to 90 minutes all of which may be adjusted by the user Relay 08 will be pre set to activate as the Alarm relay for the various Alarm conditions possible in this Operation Mode Inputs Available None of the sensor Inputs will be available in the Output Control menu because none are used to control activation in this mode However all installed Inputs will be available in the Input Set up menu for monitoring or setting off alarms The Alarm conditions described below have a default one minute Alarm delay except the Flow Switch that by default has no delay set The Flow Switch will cause an Alarm condition if flow becomes insufficient The Conductivity sensor will have its High Alarm and Low Alarm available 96 The Temperature sensor is available to allow for Conductivity calibration but c
53. have been properly indentified you can connect the second member of any family and go to the Plug n Play menu under the NetwrkConfig menu and use the manual search menu item SearchForNew to indentify the second device s After you see the second device s has been found you can plug in the third member of any family you are connecting at this time If you add a Modbus device in the future it will be automatically detected during power up and you will not need to use the manual search method pH and ORP Sensors These sensors must always have their measurement surfaces kept wet If they are allowed to dry out the semi permeable membrane will occlude and the sensor will have to be replaced Always install these probes so their sensor end is pointing down and use a U trap in any manifold they are installed in to ensure they will stay wetted if the normal flow is stopped You must even keep the measurement surface wet when transporting these sensors with a tightly fitting cap full of an appropriate solution 4 pH Buffer for pH tap water for ORP Do not store any pH or ORP electrode in DI water These sensors should be installed in a location where they will be measuring a representative concentration of treatment chemicals in the process water We do not recommend injecting the treatment chemicals upstream of the sensor location in the sample loop as the local high concentration will cause the system to cycl
54. have been explained the following text examines a list of Inputs typically connected to a Triton controller to detail what options and settings are available for each type of Input Sensor Figure 8 26 Highlight on Input Set up for the Modbus Flow Switch Flow Switch Modbus Flow Switch Always the first Input listed A Triton controller will typically be equipped witha mechanical Flow Switch that connects through the Conductivity Temperature probe to the Modbus digital network Unlike the common float style flow switches the Triton Flow Switch can be mounted in several different orientations for greater flexibility Custom Name Looking at the menus under the Flow Switch the first submenu as it is for all Inputs is for setting an 12 character custom name the factory default name of Flow Switch is still in use here Figure 8 26 Status The Status menu is next also true for all Inputs where the three possible status codes for a Flow Switch are displayed An Alarm condition on the Flow Switch disables all Outputs by default effectively halting water treatment control Normal When flow sufficient for sensor measurements and chemical dispersion Flow Alarm When flow is stopped or insufficient for normal operation Sensor Error If the sensor reports values out of range or malfunctions 200 Measurement The third menu item typical for all Inputs is a Measurement display a live view of the sensor s m
55. help a lot with the Inputs that have generic names like the Digital and 4 20 mA inputs The custom Input names may use up to 12 characters Customize control settings The next menu to visit would be the Output Control menu OutputContrl where the specific control settings for the water treatment are found The user would move the highlight onto the name of whichever Output they wish to adjust and use the submenus to customize the control settings for their needs 89 5 Operation Modes Overview The Triton controller comes with several pre programmed Ready to Use operation modes that try to minimize the initial set up work for the installer and user But there are also four User Modes that allow the user to fully define how the controller operates t n Figure 5 1 The Ready to Use Operation Modes menu Ready to Use Operation Modes The Triton Controller comes with several operation modes pre programmed for the user s convenience The modes start simple with the basic Conductivity controlled Bleed mode then there are modes related to Bleed with an Inhibitor feed followed by more complex modes that add Biocide feeds and pH control More Ready to Use RtU modes may have become available since this user manual was printed visit the Hydro Systems Triton controller website to check http www hydro watertreatment com water treatment controllers triton controller html As shown in Figure 5 1
56. hour When the user is ready to employ this mode they would highlight the Use Mode Now menu item and press the Enter key The active box would be drawn around that item and the Time Percent item to show that mode is now being used That would also cause the active control mode category to be Timer Modes and the active box would be drawn around that menu item as well The user can also add a Pre Bleed or Pre Feed operation to these Time Percent activations Remember that the Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed menus are not shown in the timer control menu of a Relay controlling a Bleed Valve The explanations about the Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed options appear later in this section Time Cycle This menu is where the user defines the recurring time period the time cycle They may set times from 10 minutes to 1440 minutes 1440 minutes 24 hours The default value is 60 minutes Percentage This menu item is for setting what portion of the Time Cycle for which the relay will be activated The user can enter values from 0 to 100 although 100 would mean the relay would be activated constantly as the time cycle is recurring and 0 would mean the relay never activates The default value is 0 Timer Start amp Stop Modes Daily Timer Daily Cycle This is another simple control mode that lets the user choose a time of day the relay activates and the amount of time it stays activated up to ten times a day The user can
57. iii A Sci 288 Us SED LANA AAA AAA a ANA AAA AAA OP PE 288 Dwnld Emails rd dat Dd td Id td tdi did ct Shots 288 Email LAOS asii it it EE A EE A ALA CIA AE A AAA AA 289 MW Ses Wald dieta ela EE ll Dalla E ib E EE E 289 16 SMTP Pou att 290 Sender Emal er e A o daa 291 Authenticate are iio aia canada Ian A oaa aio Socio 291 WaT a EEEE A A A E N A A E A A 292 A OO 293 SEMANA e aiea Eeit eE E EEEa 293 Reset AMD a 295 Reset Deicide NE E RENS 296 16 SYSTEM INFORMATION amp UPDATE cccooncccococcnononcncnoncncnnnncnonanenenanenenanannos 298 DNA Ag AO 298 View System nformatom did daa 299 NIEW VETS IODS aii EA 299 The Configuration Plena it tt da Waste in ls ita da Sse un tan 300 Downloading the Config File System_Data bid 0 0 0 eesesssessssssseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeceeeceeeeeesaeaseeeeees 301 Uploading the Config File 0 eescssssesseesseseseeeessscsceecsesesesececscseseeesscseeseesscsesseeessseeeeessaseeeeesaeees 302 Copying the System Data bin file 0 eeeeeeeeseseteeeeesesesesesesesesesenesesesenesenescseseneneneeenenees 302 Uploading the Config File System Data bin ee eesesssesssesesesesesececeseceseseseeeseceeeeeeeeesenenenees 305 The Help SYM Ai 306 System Update ad dd ita da tot aaa eM da 308 Remote Updated A ESE 308 Manual Up dates sasia ai nn E ska khan kbanakankdbanadan Abansaten dun inn sion aan caidos 309 17 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING cceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
58. is always considered to indicate Flow On while the open or low condition is always interpreted as Flow Off Unlike the General Purpose Usage the user cannot adjust what the closed and open conditions indicate about the flow condition Because this usage 1s so simplified the Settings Menu consists of only a Measurement display and an Alarm Settings Menu for the one alarm condition for this usage the NoFlow Alarm associated with the No Flow status Figure 8 44 Measurement Like all Measurement display menus this shows a live displays of the current measurement from the Flow Switch And like the Modbus Flow Switch these are text measurements Flow On or Flow Off No adjustments can be made in this menu it is for display only Alarm Settings There only one alarm condition for a Flow Switch Digital Input the NoFlow Alarm explained above It has the standard submenus explained below Alarm Delay This Alarm Delay menu gives the user an optional Alarm Delay setting for this alarm used to prevent transient momentary problems from triggering ODA the Alarm condition The time entered here is how long the potential alarm condition must persist before the Alarm is actually initiated An Alarm Delay of zero 0 minutes is the factory default for a Flow Switch AlarmActions Alarm Actions This menu appears just below the Alarm Delay menu and has the usual lis
59. large daylight read able LCD on its front panel shown in Figure 13 1 oo cep E a Le El Amiay A yA y F y Rol tatay Relay Figure 13 1 Triton Front Panel showing large LCD with Home Screen displayed The default display for the controller is called the Home Screen shown in Figure 13 2 It is a system summary display which allows a quick overview of the water treatment system Several elements of the display can be changed by the user and those changes are done using the Home Screen Edit menu HomeScrnEdit Home Screen Edit The Home Screen Edit HomeScrnEdit menu has a deceptively simple name Although itis the menu where the user can modify the appearance of the Home screen some of the choices affect all the displays in the entire menu system A Home Screen display is shown in Figure 13 2 It has 20 rows of up to 40 characters The first row of text on the Home screen can hold up to 40 characters of text which is 267 auto centered on the display The user can edit the text under the Top Row Edit menu to hold any text they would like usually the site name or location is a good idea Figure 13 2 The Home Screen The second row of text is left blank and then the third row shows the current Operation mode in use and the Alarm status After a blank fourth row rows 5 through 10 are used for a Status Display The user can choose any six Inputs or Outputs to display their curren
60. on the Modbus network Menu MenultemPath Identifies the new device by displaying a list of menu items that show the path to the new device Device Removd Device Removed A record made whenever an Input or Output is removed from the Modbus network Menu MenultemPath Identifies what device was removed by displaying a list of menu items showing the path to the menu item for the device as it appeared before it was removed 4 rt vvvVYYYYYYY Figure 9 4 Highlight on the Viewing Data View DataLog menu 237 View DataLog The user can look at the contents of any data log on the front panel display of the controller by using the View Data Log menu Figure 9 5 Highlight on View DataLog Conductivty showing date entry item The first submenu of the View Data Log menu is alist of every Input and Output installed as shown in Figure 9 4 Inputs are listed first in the order they appear in the Input Set up menu then Outputs in the order they appear in the Output Control menu Figure 9 6 Highlight on Conductivty 04 Apr 2011 2 12 pm entry When the highlight is moved to a particular device as shown in Figure 9 5 the first submenu is a date entry field and then a menu item used to display the data for that date 238 The current date is the default date entry The user first selects the date they want to see the data for then highlight the View Log Now item and press Enter to see the data
61. operations like manually searching for new devices on the network and removing devices from the digital network The communication settings include the Alarm Notification email addresses the text of the Alarm Notification messages Data download email addresses and the IP settings for communication over an Ethernet network or the Internet The digital network operation controls allow the controller to manually search for a new device on the network this also occurs automatically and to remove a device Figure 3 45 The Network Configuration menu System Information and Update In the SysInfo amp Updt menu the user can find manufacturer information about their Triton controller and controls for updating its software and firmware In the View SysInfo submenu the user can find controller specific information such as the model number serial number and so forth The View Version submenu will display the installed versions of the controller s 81 firmware and software The Configuration File submenu Config File allows for the downloading and uploading of the Configuration file to a connected computer The Configuration file holds all the settings and edits that are currently in use throughout the entire controller Downloading this configuration file is a way to make a back up of the settings Another good use for this feature is to provide a painless timesaving way to bring the settings of one Triton controller t
62. press the Help key on the front panel of the controller while the highlight is on the Output Control menu item as shown in Figure 14 1 That will cause the Help Window to appear with context sensitive help text displayed within as shown in Figure 14 2 The downward pointing arrowhead at the bottom of the window indicates the text continues out of sight and a single press of the Down Arrow 277 key will move the text ahead one page per press To get out of the Help system once it has been invoked simply press Help again the Back Cancel key or any non Arrow key on the front panel to get back to the normal display Help Screen Figure 14 2 Help window showing the help text for Output Control menu One special group of help screens are the entry check help screens These will appear automatically if the user tries to enter a value somewhere that is illegal or out of range and provide help with what the problem was with the attempted entry Auto Control SetPnt Modes SetPnt Onoft lect Input asurement e t Point BE AP 0 O WS Edit Value l m Figure 14 3 Conductivity Set Point edit in progress with an illegal entry Figure 14 3 shows such a situation where the user was trying to change the Set Point for 278 a Conductivity sensor to 2700 uS cm but accidentally pressed the decimal point key twice after they entered the 7 Were they to press the Enter key to try and accept tha
63. preventing this Temperature sensor from being used to control an output relay It would still be listed here in the Input Set up menu so it can be used to monitor the water quality have the user set alarms and have the sensor s measurements stored in the Data Log Y Figure 8 29 Highlight on Input Set up for the pH sensor pH Sensor Always listed after any CTP Temperature inputs The pH sensor measures the relative 204 acid base level in the water This measurement can be important for corrosion protection and when using treatment chemicals that work best at certain pH ranges Figure 8 29 Custom Name Showing the factory default name of pH Sensor Remember if a second pH probe is installed it would be named pH Sensor 2 and listed right after the first pH sensor in the menu automatically Status A pH sensor has four possible status codes Normal When the sensor is reporting values within its normal range High Alarm If the pH measurement goes above a user defined value Low Alarm If the pH measurement goes below a user defined value Sensor Error If the sensor reports values out of range or the controller recognizes that the sensor has failed Measurement The live display of the sensor s measurement value A pH sensor can report values from 2 to 14 pH AlarmSettngs A pH sensor has three possible alarm conditions with submenus for setting the Alarm Actions and Alarm Delay for each of them
64. probe bodies have a vertical indicator line that will line up with the arrowhead A onthe T manifold when sufficiently tight When the probes s are re installed open the isolation valves and check for leaks If after cleaning you wish to calibrate the conductivity measurement go to the Input Set up menu and then to the Calibration sub menu for the probe you wish to calibrate Troubleshooting Modbus Sensors If anew Modbus sensor is connected to the controller it will automatically be assigned an address on the network when the password request dialog appears or if you go to the NetwrkConfig menu then to the Plug n Play submenu and select the SearchForNew menu item Conversely if you are going to remove a Modbus sensor from the network you should go to the NetwrkConfig menu then to the Plug n Play submenu and select the RemoveDevice menu item This will delete the address of that sensor from the network and prevent device not found errors Sensor Error when you disconnect the device from the Modbus network This RemoveDevice action will also set the address in the Modbus sensor back to the blank default value so it can be properly added to another system Therefore it is important to always use the RemoveDevice menu item before you permanently disconnect a Modbus sensor from the controller If you add a Modbus sensor to
65. re installed and the system checked for leaks Suspension of Control Since it is assumed the user will stop the water flow and remove the probe when a 2Pt Ref Cal begins the controller will remind the user that water treatment control will be suspended for the duration of the calibration This means all relay outputs are deactivated scheduled events are ignored no alarms allowed and so forth Normal operations resume as soon as the user leaves the calibration menu either because the calibration was successful was canceled or failed 186 Accuracy This is considered the most accurate calibration method since the measurements are corrected at two points in the range instead of just one But there are also two theories about 2 Point Reference Calibration Wide Spread and Narrow Range Calibrate Temperature First Although the Temperature Sensor built into the combination Conductivity and Temperature Probe may not be the first item in the list of Inputs the user should consider calibrating the Temperature sensor first or at least verifying its accuracy The Conductivity sensor needs an accurate temperature compensation to produce accurate conductivity measurements as do other types of sensors like pH For that reason the user should consider calibrating the Temperature sensor first unless they know the other Input does not use temperature compensation In addition unless a pH probe has its own temperature sensor th
66. red Alarm LED on the front panel flash e Activate any Relay usually to control an external alarm indicator e Lockout any or all Output Relays e Have the controller send alarm emails e Do nothing Of course any Alarm condition always appears in the Active Alarms menu and in the System Activity Log for later reference even if the user sets an Alarm to do nothing More information for each Input is in the Input Set up and Calibration sections of the Using the Triton Controller chapter later in this Reference Manual Active Alarms This is the menu where any active alarms are displayed and can be cleared It is also the menu the Alarm key on the front panel would take a user to in one easy step If there are any alarms listed there will be a time saving menu item to clear all active 70 alarms at once and each Input or Output listed in alarm will have a handy submenu shortcut Go To Set up to take you directly to their settings menu Figure 3 33 The Active Alarms menu showing one alarm and Alarm key Any time an Alarm condition occurs with a Triton controller the situation that created the Alarm is logged to the System Activity Log and the name of the Input or Output in alarm appears under this ActiveAlarms menu The user has control over what else happens whether the front panel Alarm LED is lit whether Relays get a Lockout or are activated whether emails are sent or phone calls made Detaile
67. reference use no editing is allowed in this 120 submenu Set Point This submenu is where the user can see and set the value that will cause the relay to activate There is a submenu to the right of the displayed value with an Edit Value prompt that can be used to alter the Set Point value The Set Point value for any input will probably require adjustment to be appropriate for a particular installation ContrlEffect Control Effect This submenu is where the user must set whether the relay activation is going to lower the input measurement Force Low or whether the relay activation is going to raise the input measurement Force High Force Low is the default Dead Band This submenu is used to prevent the relay from cycling on and off too frequently It is a value in the same units as the Set Point but represents a magnitude only not a particular value Zero is the default value for the Dead Band For example if the pH sensor was the selected Input with 8 5 as the Set Point and Force Low as the control effect the user might set the Dead Band to 2 0 which would keep the relay activated until the pH value dropped to 6 5 The magnitude of the Dead Band setting required at a particular installation will depend on the physical locations of the input sensor make up water entry point the pump making the chemical addition and so forth Limit Timer Activation Limit Timer This is a backup setting to take control of the relay if
68. remove the probe when a 1 Pt Ref Cal begins the controller will remind the user that water treatment control will be suspended for the duration of the calibration This means all relay outputs are deactivated scheduled events are ignored no alarms allowed and so forth Normal operations resume when the calibration process is over either because the calibration was successful was canceled or failed Accuracy This method is considered to be more accurate than the Field Calibration as the reference solution or device can be produced with high precision On the other hand care must be taken with the handling of the reference and proper technique must be used to realize the full accuracy potential of this type of calibration 2 Point Reference Calibration Complexity This is most complex calibration method The probe typically must be removed and cleaned before the first calibrationis performed cleaned again between the first and second reference measurement and cleaned once again after the calibrations are finished Then the user must re install the probe and check the system for leaks There are also two references to measure and maintain Probe Removal Just like the 1 Point Calibration it is assumed the user will remove the probe from its housing to calibrate it to the references The sensor may need to be cleaned physically and or chemically before the first calibration between reference measurements and finally the probe has to be
69. requirements are an ambient temperature of 0 to 49 C 32 to 120 F with storage temperatures from 29 to 80 C 20 to 176 F Do not install the controller where it will be subjected to corrosive fumes excessive moisture or humidity The enclosure is NEMA 4X rated and suitable for outdoor installation as long as the operating limits are not exceeded Electrical Requirements The controller requires an electrical supply of 110 120 VAC 10 220 240 VAC where applicable at 50 60 Hz and up to 12 amperes of current This circuit should be dedicated to the controller and protected with a 15 ampere fuse or circuit breaker which should be nearby to facilitate safe maintenance practices All field wiring should be rated to 120 Volts or better 230 Volts or better where applicable and to 75 C 167 F For Cord Connected Outdoor use please use approved receptacle suitable for its intended use and that the unit is to be installed according to CEC NEC and or local codes by qualified personnel For Permanently connected units please wire Line L1 to the Black Wire Neutral N to White Wire and Earth Ground GND to the Green Wire CAUTION There are live electrical circuits inside the enclosure even when the AN front panel power switch is in the OFF position The access door to the inside of the enclosure should never be opened until power to the controller is removed The electrical installation must only be performed by trained profe
70. shown in the timer control menus of a Relay controlling a Bleed Valve There are more details about the Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed options in their own sections later in this chapter Sg r aa odes lt 4Se WErMtr Mode ff Sety hrRlyModes Corcrilficct L Seb ee poe irmSettng Daily Timer Ae Weekly Timer Time MAADAA DADOS Figure 6 27 The Timer amp Set Point Daily Timer Control Mode The first Daily Timer submenu has the ten time slots listed Time 01 Menu Time 02 Menu through Time 10 Menu To use one of the times the user would go to the submenus set the start time and since there is no duration to change from zero in this mode the user needs to select the Use ThisTime menu item to indicate the time slot is active The Time slot would then get the active box drawn around it After setting the time slots they want to use the user must then highlight Use Mode Now at the bottom of the list of times and press Enter to activate the Daily Timer control option The active box would be drawn around the Daily Timer menu prompt and the control mode category T amp StPt Modes to indicate they are now in use siar Each of the Time 01 Menu through Time 10 Menu time slots has the same two submenu items one to set the start time and the other to activate the time slot 00 00 This submenu item shows the time of day in 24 hour format that the relay activation would start For all time of day
71. the IP network using the addresses from the Network Configuration menu The Send Email action requires the controller be connected to an internal network or the Internet or have an optional Cell Modem installed respectively The action won t do anything useful until email addresses have been entered into their appropriate menus in the Communications Settings submenu CommSettings of the Network Configuration NetwrkConfig menu What happens when an Alarm occurs Sensible default Alarm settings are pre programmed into the Triton controller but like in the Auto Control menu the default settings depend on the Relay Usage selected 165 For example the default Relay Reaction of a relay set to Bleed Valve control is to activate on an Alarm while the default Relay Reaction of a relay set to Chemical Pump control is to deactivate on an Alarm A relay assigned to the Alarm Relay Usage will be pre selected in the Turn Relay On menus for all Alarms It is very important for the user of a Triton controller to examine the Alarm Settings menus for all the Outputs they are using to see if they want to use the default settings or change them to behaviors they prefer 4 20 mA Analog General Purpose Outputs Besides the high capacity electro mechanical Relays the Triton controller has one more kind of controllable Output the analog 4 20 milliamp mA outputs on the optional 4 20mA Output Boards A Menu Screer IER
72. the Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed options are in the sections explaining them later in this chapter Each of the Time 01 Menu through Time 10 Menu time slots have the same two submenu items described below to control the time of day that the relay will activate and for how long the relay will remain activated that is to say the duration of that particular activation 00 00 This menu item shows the time of day in 24 hour format that the relay activation would start For all time of day menus in a Triton controller 00 00 begin of Day 12 00 Noon 23 59 end of Day Select the Edit Value submenu item to change the start time On Duration This is where the user sets the duration of the activation how long the relay will be activated for the particular time slot The user can enter from 0 to 1440 minutes 24 hours Remember that setting the duration to anything but zero selects that time slot but the user must also select the Use Mode Now item at the end of the list to start the Daily Timer control mode To deselect a particular time slot just set the On Duration back to zero Timer Start amp Stop Modes Weekly Timer Weekly Cycle The Weekly Cycle control mode allows the user to activate a relay once each day of a 7 day cycle The user defines what days of the week the relay activates on the time of day each activation starts and how long it stays activated on that particular day The first Weekly
73. the Conductivity value that should stop the Bleed drain This should be significantly lower than any set point established to start a Bleed The user may have to experiment to find the best value for this setting depending on their goals and the physical situation at a particular installation UseSetPtCntl Use Set Point Control is the activator for this control option After making the settings they desire the user must highlight the UseSetPtCntl item and press Enter to select this control option After activating Set Point Control the user would also have to activate Add PreBleed by selecting the Use PreBleed activator seen in Figure 6 35 Figure 6 35 The Timer amp Set Point Pre Bleed SetPntContrl Menu Timer Start with Set Point Stop Modes Add Pre Feed The Add Pre Feed menu allows the user to activate another relay before the relay they are controlling with one of the three previous Timer Start with Set Point Stop modes The pre feed relay can only be activated for a fixed amount of time This optional mode is typically used to introduce a Dispersant Penetrant or Surfactant before the addition of the chemical being controlled by the Timer Start with Set Point Stop control mode The Add Pre Feed mode only has three submenu items Feed Relay This submenu is where the user would select which one of the other relays 150 will be activated before the normal Timer activation The user can choose any relay o
74. toons Seve antrenasteccivestt scavectevsteocte aa suttecdoesteucivat eE EE EE S Ee AINES 207 Cali DRaniON ntsc dato EENE EEEE EAEE EAE AE EEE ET ONE ERAS 207 Cale d Slope ineeiieo ea aa r Servint dost aviator ha Eaa EA Ea xi a aa E ah dashes 207 Gal dO di AA ata 207 NotE CO A daa aiii 207 The Digital Inputs tai is 208 Custom Name td rt delesceisectvecteccisectossdecetuscteacbeestvestuactecctisstessbeccivedtescdecetusstea e a a a 208 Std init ii A EA dt os ee os eT RO PO 208 Reed SW acid O A as id a TA Ra 209 Hall Elec Ii Iii ot 209 A A RAN 209 General PUTOS Eutanasia tet 209 O NN 209 DistlinUsage ositos cdi datada ini esis deo date 209 WatrMtrRecda a a e a SO ER TDD 210 WatrMtrsHalL cia idad aida ia 210 12 Dist COM aabt yates 210 GentlPUTpOSE ios 210 Elo WS Winona a o S 210 SE tH NSS MEU ac 210 NotForContrl Contact Vol A a it caos 212 MA A ion lecals sala srsacies cabs vanecsuaca secavecaceesradas seats sencnoacaas Couesusccauicavr ldeas menos 212 TEASE RESET aN EAEE deausave duces vedeuueass lass aceduuevs veceuudaesdesusataeerneoens 213 Reset Total sss scissile edad 213 AUTOR SEE esis seis AA A ATA td AL AOS ect 213 Alarm Settings A AA tad 213 Digital Input Usage WatrMtr Hall ee eeessseeseseseseescseeseeesscseseeesscseeeeecssseseeescsceeueeesscseseeesseeesaeees 214 IK BACt OT A OA 215 Volume Umilisi a ca dlian Sadat ne ovata uedaunds cobs radassdesadaoe ta sadagn fauadese loader ONN 216 id 216 Md
75. unit of s per second m per minute h per hour d per day W per week Total amp Reset Totalization and Reset This menu has two functions The first is to display the current Total of whatever is being counted in our example total Sheep along with the last date upon which the total was reset to zero The second function is to reset the Total to zero either manually or by setting a time of day at which the Total will be reset automatically every day Remember this is a display of total Sheep not necessarily total signals In this example the Signal Value is set to 10 so each signal represents 10 Sheep In this example if 30 pulses have been detected this Totalization would show 300 Shp Calc d Rate Calculated Rate A live display of the rate at which Sheep Pulses x Signal Value Rate Unit are being detected If the Signal Value is set to one 1 this display also shows the rate that the raw pulses are being detected but if the Signal Value is greater than one then this is only the rate at which Sheep are being counted not the rate at which the signals are being seen Since this rate display has only three characters for the Units only the first letter of the Signal Name can be used for the Calculated Rate display For the example being used the Sheep per hour units would be shown as S h Alarm Settings There are three possible alarm conditions for a Digital Counter each with their own s
76. water treatment system will be controlled the user would move the highlight on the Menu Screen to the Output Control menu then right to the list of Outputs Then the user would move the highlight down until the output they wish to control is highlighted This explanation will assume the highlight is on the first Relay Relay 01 typically assigned to control a Bleed Valve Figure 6 1 The Output Control menu for Relay 01 showing its sub menus When a relay name is highlighted the following submenus will show to the right Custom Name Relay Status Relay Usage 108 Auto Control Manual Off Manual On Manual Limit ReturnToAuto Custom Name This menu does not have a prompt that says Custom Name but instead displays the current custom name for the relay which for Relay 01 is typically Bleed Valve from the factory The user may enter a new custom name using a submenu Set New Name to the right A custom name takes the place of the Relay 01 name everywhere except the first submenu of OutputContrl Figure 6 1 which always lists the relays in their numerical order with their numerical names for easy reference Relay Status This menu item displays the current status for the output All relays use the following status displays On NNNN min Displays the total minutes of the relay s current activation Relay is Off Indicates the relay is deactivated normally LkOut NN min Shows the relay is cu
77. will have the active box drawn around it and if someone presses the Enter key only at the password request they will see a message that the Read Only feature has been disabled and the front panel display will remain at the Home Screen 265 NoActTimeOut No Activity Timeout Limit This is another simple menu shown in Figure 12 10 where a user can adjust the No Activity Timeout Limit The default time limit is 10 minutes with an allowable range of 1 to 1440 minutes There is the usual Edit Value menu to the right for adjusting the setting Figure 12 10 Highlight on PasswdAccess NoActTimeOut showing 10 minute default The No Activity Timeout Limit NATL is a back up security feature that will automatically log out a user if no keys are pressed for the time set This same limit applies over the Ethernet connection The controller will abort any changes in progress reverting the value to its previous setting move the front panel display back to the Home Screen and log off the user so a password will again be requested to move away from the Home screen This limit may need to be increased if a process involving the controller is going to take longer than ten minutes without any keys being pressed on the controller A long calibration of an Input sensor could be such a process where the user might want to increase this limit 266 13 Home Screen Edit Overview The Triton water treatment controller has a
78. 1 Easy to Read and Navigate Menus with 4 way Navigator arrow pad ccecessesesceseeseceeseseeseseeeeseeseneees 21 Front Panel Direct Access Keys crescere rer a i e iE er a iio E E RR 22 Context aware Help Keynes 22 Control ByOutput teste A E ined aid ed E La 22 Poll Alphantimenic Keypadias tices soci ccadess lostda easiest tdt rta 22 Relay Gomtroh A NARRAN 22 High Capacity Mechanical Relays ssssssssssssssecsseeeseecscscsceeescscseseeesscsesseecscssecseeasseseeeassesesaeeeeeeesaeees 23 4 20 MA OU PUts sssvsescvescsrcccassvvessevceaiesencevonenscoenssuacavosensusondeodusunsosddeossadnosnanedbcenssesaceseassdconnsendusvosensuscadeosassasoosssossasssoas 23 Output Status DisplayS esesesesesessosososesesesssosososososesesesesessocosososososeseseseseseseosososososesesesesesessosososososesesesesesesssosesesesesese 24 Sensor INPUUtS ssssssssscisisorsasecscasssedevssssndedednoesesovesssnsecessoessuscacevenenecesdssuscassssdenssecesenseaseseacuscecevessseceseasuscacsssuenesesssssscassssas 24 SR RR RAN 25 Input Status Di spl ays ccca iccecsssccsescocnsseccseasesoscsascsoensededevssasesenauesscenstocasonssestcossssasengisonseseasossseasseseasndsadesendenseasaodocasosoas 25 TIMERS ccccscsvsvsvscsvsvevevevevevevevevevevevevevevesesesesseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseceseceseseceseseceseceesseseeeees 27 Expansion Modulles cccssccssscccscescssscessccssscssscessscesssscsesessessscessssessssess
79. 2 Calibrating to match a fixed reference sample solution The first method is often calleda Field Calibration while the second method is often referred to as a Reference Calibration And there are usually two variations of the Reference Calibration method available 2a Using only one reference for calibration called a 1 Point Reference Calibration 2b Using two references for calibration known as a 2 Point Reference Calibration Field Calibration Complexity This is the simplest calibration method A separate device is used to measure a characteristic of the system water and the user compares that value to the measurement from the controller The field value can be used as the new calibrated measurement Probe Removal The probe does not have to be removed for a field calibration although this might be a good opportunity to clean and rinse the probe But look at Suspension of Control below for issues related to probe removal Suspension of Control The user will be asked when they start a 1Pt FieldCal if they will be removing the probe or reducing flow If they answer No normal controller operations are not affected during the field calibration in other words there is no general suspension of control If they answer Yes however it is assumed that the flow is going to be stopped which means that water treatment control will be suspended for the duration of the calibration all relay outputs are deactivated sche
80. 40 Via Emale annainn inan AAA EA Ai Aa AA dt 241 SAAE nVa TO EI VEY ss 35 6255 A foie EEEE EE EEA 241 Data By TIME A A vise AAA ica dela A die anise dea asbestos dee eats 242 AUito Download a is 243 Select LoS thalia tna 243 SC tt ta 244 TO USB Dive sais A AAA AA AA 245 14 SYStMMACELVEY ANENE TASASE iia 246 Data By Tim AA das 247 10 OUTPUT STATUS AND INPUT MEASURE ccceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 249 DNA A q AO 249 CUE PUTSt atu cei cscssvscdusssssatsccussoduiesvecsnsescustssasntoosietutetsiesetensusstbessuscasessucesGusesoncuhcnsessuscasuscddusensusesssasetessuscsdessncuscesedssses 249 INPUtME AS UE i seiisssissssosssnssssessosasessaesisbesnosdedscoeasedsasvased ocseadeseaduscesendsecscvnsdesscasssentuvoscessusedsedsasescosssenduesecensescacesSdensceds 250 11 WATER CONDITION INDEXES wviiescccesccectenis deccstececcentcesiccssddacieenseetessecdaceees 252 OVE VIEW A q AO 252 LangeherSaturati on Index criolla tb 252 Ryznar Stability Index RSI Id Dioni ii aie 252 Cycles of Concentration Value Cycles of C o ocooocicicicnocacacicononannnonioonnnononnononnnncoononnnnconnonnnn rn ononnnn rn rnonannn 252 ESER SE Cal lA 253 CAU 253 LEMA ice 253 RN 254 CaCO3 Hat dies viciado tia a iia RTEA 254 TOA AMES A AAA A A LA A AAA LAI 254 EST Tide Kise AAA A A AA A 254 RSD MAER AR RR 254 Eycles Coi Az 255 Weet A NN 256 Total A ta tt did teats 257 CaCOS Hades tii AAA A A AAA AA A 257 PhnlAlkaline iaa dos hindi and
81. 5 with the usual Input Tray and Edit Value submenu for changing the value Alarm Delay The second submenu Alarm Delay shown in Figure 8 6 is for defining the amount of time an error condition must persist before an Alarm condition occurs Very useful to prevent transient events momentary false signals or brief spikes in the water condition from setting off this Alarm Figure 8 6 Highlight on the Alarm Delay menu for Conductivity High Alarm There are the usual Input Tray and Edit Value submenus for adjusting the Alarm Delay time setting the factory default Alarm Delay is one 1 minute but it can set from 0 to 1440 minutes 1440 minutes 24 hours AlarmActions The third menu Alarm Actions shown in Figure 8 7 is just like the Alarm Actions menu in the Output Control menus where the user can control what happens if an Alarm occurs 181 Figure 8 7 Highlight on the Alarm Actions menu for Conductivity High Alarm Since Inputs don t have a reaction to Alarms like Relays there is only the menu of alarm actions with the same settings as the Alarm Actions menu explained in the Output Control chapter NoAlarmActn No Alarm Action Take no action do nothing Of course all Alarms are logged in the System Activity Log even if the user chooses to take no action Alarm Lamp On Flashing by default this menu gives control over the bright red Alarm lamp on the front panel of the controller TurnRelay
82. BIN File 3 8 2011 9 43 4M e XML Document 2 16 2011 4 56 Pm Type BIN File Date Modified 3 8 2011 9 43 AM Size 144 KB Y My Computer A XML Document 3 3 2011 7 45 AM Type BIN File Date Modified 3 8 2011 9 43 AM Size 144 KB 1144 KB 4 My Computer The user should now remove the USB flash drive or data stick from the computer and bring it to the Triton controller onto which they want to load the configuration Uploading the Config File System _Data bin To upload the configuration data insert the USB flash drive with the System Data bin file at the top level into the large USB Type A port on the front panel of the controller Log in using a high access level password usually the admin or user1 level and navigate to the last main menu the SysInfo amp Updt menu then to the Config File sub menu as shown in Figure 16 5 Then move the highlight to the right and down onto the UploadConfig menu item as shown in Figure 16 6 and press Enter A dialog box will appear asking the user to confirm the upload and warning that the controller will restart as soon as the upload is complete 305 Figure 16 6 Highlight on the UploadConfig menu item ready to press Enter When the upload is complete a message window will announce that the controller is going to restart and the user may remove the USB device When the controller finishes rebooting the new configurat
83. E A A A A 1 td 174 8 INPUT SET UP AND CALIBRATION cccccssceeeeeeeeeeseneseneeeeseneseeeeeeeenees 175 10 AAA 175 Lypical Inputs st Oat ah RARE eas Gani oe el unt ee eam bee eee wasted teases 176 PIOW S O en aes ae eee a O NON 177 Conduct a o pia cod alar As 177 LEMPIRAS 177 RA O OOO 177 ORP Ens A td E EE 177 Digitall AX AAA AA A AA AL bs aaa beat 177 AD OMA T XX RA 177 A AR 179 Alamos rele aiarad desain ias eiaa arais iarsoin tiara ae EE a sss 179 His Alarm RR 181 BOO E EE E TE A EEE EE E EEEE A 181 Aldrin D1 Ee AAEE AENEA AAEE EE EEE E E E 181 Al A a EREE 181 NOAA Mia AAA E AAA A AE it ED 182 AAA ae ist s 182 LURO A ei 182 AllarMmlLOCKOuticiccecescessutencicanccsdececvcsedasdeeduvesteccesesieceuvecescaudeddsouces desea douddvecese suacdcdesdectusestecduvecees tunes 182 Send E iii a ae ti 182 Clearing Al tii TE IEEE ire 183 Calibration Menu sssssssssesssesessrscssssesssesssssssssssesesesesesssesssesesesssesesesesesesesssesesesesesssesesesesesesesesesesesesosssssssesesososs 184 Feld Calibrations ii AA Ai tr Ata 185 Complex asistir abonan iia pidan dnd 185 Probe Removal a Gaamanes 185 Suspension of Conlara e os 185 AN 185 I Point Reference Cali es 185 Complexity c3 nas uanitisu sues deen iinee inane lene les andre aa ease ohendnes see 185 Probe Removal e cncncaiaiaiwn sided ada dead dani denna hal Ravan Gand D a E NES 186 Suspension Of Controlan ss O O O Sa ah ae os 186 ACCUTANE 186
84. E EAEE ea 108 Gus tom CAN NN 109 Relay StatSas tase een SO IS A da 109 Relay Usa a AANE EREA 109 Bleed Val User a devs dust Gets ieee St Sl ek Gi i ik dd led Role edo 109 Blowdown Usen aio 109 P mpRelayUsE iaa di ici 109 AlarmkRlay USE iii iria 109 Not MUS a a aa A A A Lt bb ib id 109 Auto Control O tte dee tt shat dd dd DP ide ot tds Do 109 Relay Usage a A A abe Sete ation bene etna 110 Bleed Val Us sas 110 BIO WOW added colas 110 PiumpRelayUs ui il 111 AlarmR ay Us tasas 111 Not MW Us cui A E E OO A a Ad id idas 111 AUTOS A casadanssalosacadeuseusuceontaes tansdavavevecevadeaadasn suse davessadvadsandavnseeusareseeavavedsistees 111 SetP int MOS EE E EE EE N dead 112 Timer MOde sccsssccsssscosccsssncccsnccovsecossecsesecescecvsccovsecossevsevevsncecvscceonevossavsnevoneesvaesovsevesersovevsnccovaecovsers 112 TE SP EMoOdE ds a a e pied ed de od E e A 112 WtrMtr Modest a Secs be ale Cordials basa cals sede eel 112 OthrRlyModES cia diendo dances Case AE ET 112 Different Relay Usages have Different Auto Control Menus ou esesssseeeseseeceeeseseeeeeessseseseeesseseseeeeeeee 112 Mainitial Controlicssis o 5 foe a sda satducaedusdeesnloosdien dasusuce Cavvduva douudacs facsdacaduassvvabmaeiees 113 A ne eer ee eae eal ote eve Ea E E NE SPE TN 113 Mama tities A O eg ed eg ie bd epee a ded EA 114 Mama a I 114 Retiro AU aa 115 Alarm Relay Usar caidas dba fabstels aeaaaee taoa a Eea bad cado alada laos pco 115 Rs 116 Relay Once 116
85. G4 20mA Outo l Figure 6 49 Highlight on Output Control 4 20mA Out01 These outputs are typically used to indicate the status of one of the inputs by varying its electrical current output from 4 to 20 milliamps to reflect the status of the input Although manual controls are available for testing and calibration the default use is to have this output track the status of an input like the conductivity sensor where by 166 default the lowest conductivity value would be represented by the 4mA current level and the highest conductivity value would be represented by the 20mA current The user can change these default mappings as explained below Figure 6 49 shows the highlight on the first 4 20 mA output listed in the Output Control menu with its submenus to the right custom name status display automatic and manual controls Custom Name 4 20 Status 4 20mA Output Status Auto Control Manual 4 mA Manual 20 mA Manual4 20mA ReturnToAuto Custom Name This menu displays the custom name for the 4 20mA output and has a submenu Set New Name to the right Any custom name takes the place of the 4 20mA Out01 name everywhere except the first submenu of the OutputContrl menu which always lists the outputs in their numerical order with their numerical names 144 20mA Out02 20mA t 4 11 5 Pa eS elect In 1 UMA 1 lanua mA 4 mA Ja lue As se i Figure 6 50 Highlight on the 4 20mA Out
86. General Purpose device like a Drum Level switch and a special Flow Switch usage for simple On Off flow switches like the float style switch that is often employed Note that the Reed Switch Water Meter and Digital Counter usages have a special settings menu Filter Time that allows the user to set the debounce time for that input A 100 msec debounce time should work fine for any Reed Switch but depending on the quality of the switch connected to the Digital Counter the user may have to use debounce times as long as 400 to 500 msec Of course long debounce times will limit how quickly the Digital Counter can count so if a very fast Digital Counter is required and high quality switch may have to be employed Accessories and Replacement Parts Enclosure Parts e Relay Pigtails 120 230 VAC cables 10 inch includes fittings for enclosure One set of relay Pigtails 8 with Cordgrip fittings 3 Part 10094652 e Single Relay Pigtail 120 230 VAC cable 10 inches long female plug One relay Pigtail 1 Part 10094688 e Clear Front Cover One clear front cover 1 Part 10094689 e 120 230 VAC Power Cord 12 feet 1 4 female spade main board connectors attached One AC power cord 1 Part 10094691 Modbus Devices and Cables Accessory Probes and REBs do not include a Modbus cable Order cables separately as necessary 315 e Single Modbus communication cables Female Female to conn
87. Highlight on the Data By Time menu showing Download Now Data By Time The second Via Email submenu item Figure 9 12 allows the user to SDA manually email the By Time formatted Data Log assuming the controller is connected to an Ethernet connection and that all the appropriate IP settings and email addresses have been configured properly in the NetwrkConfig menu This By Time data log is in a common format a flat database comma separated variable csv file compatible with most third party data acquisition systems such as LXF s Track 3 There is only one submenu Download Now To email the By Time formatted Data Log the user simply highlights the Download Now menu item and presses the Enter key The user would see a message that the data log is being generated and then a dialog that indicates the email was sent AutoDownload Instead of the immediate manual operations described above the last of the Via Email submenus is the AutoDownload menu shown in Figure 9 13 This menu is for setting up an automatic periodic download of either or both of the log files sent to up to three email addresses For this feature to work however the Triton controller must be connected to an Ethernet network and all the appropriate settings and email addresses must be properly defined since the logs are sent as an attachment to an email The IP settings and email addresses are entered by the user in the Network Configur
88. Meter c Adjust settings Custom name Control details Relay 02 Configure the rest of the Relays e Configure the Inputs Flow Switch a Select an Input Usage if necessary c Adjust settings Custom name Alarm details Calibrate Conductivity Configure the rest of the Inputs e Customize Change the Home Screen to display the appropriate site and summary info 85 Set the data logging interval to control how often data is logged Set up email accounts and text messages to send on an Alarm After the Triton controller enclosure has been mounted the Input sensors installed and the relays have been connected to the devices they will control it is time to actually use the controller s menus to implement a cooling tower water treatment plan Change the default Passwords When a Triton controller is first installed the administrator should immediately change the default passwords keeping track of the new ones ina secure location vrd Admin Menu 18 E 1 gt ay 2 Ree gt l y ReadOr ntl User swrde k 4 tit y gt p Figure 4 1 The Password and Access Control menu Admin sub menu Details on how to change the passwords are in the Password and Access Control section of this chapter Choose an Operation Mode One consideration is whether a simplified Ready to Use Operation mode RtU will suffice for the water treatment needs of the particular installation or whether a User Mode will be employed
89. Not HUSA een AA nes eee ed tet IL LD A EI EEES 116 Bleed Valve Usase iaa ao Se adaldheiekan aaalaucl dhabauel aA N sheila 118 Auto Control Modes Category and Individual o ooonicncncncniciciconononnnononncnnnononnonnnononnonnnononoonnn corn onnnn ra cnonanos 118 A A RAE 118 MEM rara 118 TSE SPA dE triada A SS A AOS LS Ob oe hai oa 118 MM ModE S oca SROESR RE RGAE SSSR ee Shans aaa 118 id A TAN 118 When do the control mode settings take effect ooococicidoconcnononoonnnnnoninnnnnnonocnnnnnnnonoonononoronnonnnn rn oronnnn rn cnonanon 118 The Set Point Control Modes ccsccccsscsssecosscccossevssscvesecovsccsssecesvevsseesonecossecsssevsecessecsosecssrevssscovsersssevserevenseors 119 Serra asas 119 DEEP Ite Time dt E NE EERE RE EEEE E O O i nica 119 SetPNES pike uan ES UI SR Sil Sas 119 EY A AN 120 Set Point Control Modes SetPnt OnOf 0 cece cee ccecessscessecsssecsssccsescessscessecsessessssessscessscssssessssessssecsesees 120 Select Mio 120 ME ASUPEMENE td O EI ado Ed E at tai 120 A OE 121 Contr Bite caian RON NRa ee een hone aba ads 121 Poe ad Banc O R 121 Tea O RR TERR 121 Set Point Control Modes SetPnt TimeP ooooonccinnccconccconanonnononnccnnnconnnnonnnnonaccnnnconnnconnnronncrnnnconnn conca ronnornnnnonns 121 A NN 122 SS A 122 A EN 122 Con ido 122 Sample Me A nuckt soy toe byennvslbera dea ten suet EEEE 122 AdjustmtBand dilo 123 Eat ME a ash ae ee a eset se a a ee ee ecko 123 Set Point Control Modes SetP
90. On Turn On Relay Here the user can control what other relay to activate if there is an alarm By default the Alarm Relay is selected AlarmLockout Alarm Lockout This menu allows the user to lockout one of more outputs while the Alarm condition exists The Lockout is removed when the Alarm is cleared Send Email Send Alarm Emails This will send an email with a user defined text message and data summary to up to three user defined Internet email addresses This requires an IP connection to the controller or an optional Cellular Modem The Send Email alarm action requires the controller be connected to either an Ethernet network the Internet or have a Cellular Modem installed The action won t do anything useful until email address have been entered into their appropriate menus which are in the Communications Settings menu CommSettings under the Network Configuration NetwrkConfig menu 182 Looking at Figure 8 7 the active box drawn around the menu items indicates that the default Alarm Actions for a High Alarm on a Conductivity sensor are Alarm Lamp On Flashing Turn RelayOn The default Alarm Relay Relay 08 is pre set to activate Send Email This is on by default but needs addresses to be entered by the user No Lockouts are set for this particular alarm also notice that the only Relay activated by default is the Alarm Relay The user should consider also activating the Relay controlling the Bleed Valve usually Re
91. Outputstatus OutputContri nputMeasure nput set up iewing Data ateriIndexes perate Mode PasswdAccess HomeSernEdit NetwrkConfiglCommsSettings SysInfosUpdt Plug n Play PAN lDev I I y W z Dm rt Bo Oo a o ye O H D A R R Figure 15 21 Highlight on SearchForNew menu item before Enter key is pressed But if the device is connected when the controller is already active the user can use the SearchForNew menu item shown in Figure 15 21 to add the device to the menu system A Figure 15 22 The window seen when SearchForNew is scanning for new devices The Modbus digital network devices are logically arranged in families The five 294 families of digital network devices currently available are Cooling Tower Probes CTP Boiler Control Probes BCP pH Probes ORP probes and Relay Expansion Boxes REB As an example the first CTP probe found by the controller is given the address CTP1 the second one added to the system is assigned CTP2 and so forth IMPORTANT Although unlikely if two devices of the same family that both still have the default address have never been assigned an address are connected to the controller at the same time the search process will assign them both the same address and the controller will think you have only added one new device To fix this use the Reset Device menu and pick the new item that was add
92. Paddlewheel flow meter o GND 24 f VDC As shown in the wiring guide to the right the digital oa ajos Digital Inputs inputs start with 1 at the bottom of the connectors and go upward to 8 That corresponds with the menu items Digital In 1 through Digital In 8 For the simpler digital inputs like a Reed Switch water meter and the two state devices you would connect them to the middle Input and upper 12 VDC connectors For Hall Effect water meters you may also need to connect to the lower ground GND connector On the lower right four 24 VDC power supply connections are provided if needed for the device you are using WARNING There are live electrical circuits inside the enclosure even when the front panel power switch is in the OFF position The power shall be removed from the controller before accessing the front door to the inside of the enclosure e Do not exceed 0 5 A of current as the sum of all contacts on the 12 VDC supply e Do not exceed 0 5 A of current as the sum of all contacts on the 24 VDC supply e 20 26 AWG wire is recommended for Digital Input connections e Wire runs should not exceed 300 feet 100 meters Twisted pair is optional e Route signal wires in separate conduit at least 6 inches from any AC voltage After you have connected your digital devices to these digital inputs you need to go to the software menu for each of them and indicate their Dig
93. Point but for the first time the Inhibitor is pumped independent of the Bleed valve In this mode the user defines a time cycle like 60 minutes and a percentage of that cycle time for which they want the Inhibitor pumped For example the user could set the Inhibitor to feed for 50 of every 60 minutes Conductivity controlled Bleed Timed Inhibitor by Water Volume CndBld FeedV Quite similar to the previous mode with the Inhibitor pumped independently of the Bleed valve but in this mode the Inhibitor relay is activated by a user defined water volume measurement from a Water Meter expected to be measuring the Make up water Each time the user defined Make up Volume is reached the Inhibitor is pumped for a user defined fixed amount of time For example the user could pump Inhibitor for 5 minutes after every 300 gallons of Make up water has been measured The Bleed valve is still controlled by a Conductivity Set Point as before Conductivity controlled Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor with one Biocide CB amp Feed 1Bio The previous three modes dealt with various Inhibitor feed methods now with this operation mode the scheme goes back to the simple Conductivity controlled Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor method and adds a Biocide feed controlled by a Timer The Bleed valve is controlled by a Conductivity sensor Set Point the Inhibitor relay is activated by the Bleed Valve deactivation and one Biocide is fed using a Timer mode Time Percent Dai
94. RelayUse Chemical Pump General Purpose Usage Selecting the Chemical Pump General Purpose Relay Usage indicates the Relay will be controlling a Chemical Pump or is being used as a General Purpose Relay This choice changes the control modes offered to the user and makes changes in how the Relay reacts to Alarms compared to one controlling a Bleed Valve For example the Alarm Reaction of a Relay controlling a chemical pump is usually to deactivate while the Alarm Reaction of a Relay controlling a Bleed Valve is to keep the Bleed Valve activated open AlarmRlayUse Alarm Relay Usage Selecting the Alarm Relay Usage indicates that this Relay will be controlling an external Alarm indicator such as an exterior Alarm Bell or Strobe Light This choice removes the control modes offered for normal relays and makes dramatic changes in how the Relay reacts to Alarms compared to a relay controlling a Bleed Valve or a Chemical Pump Not In Use Not In Use Selecting the Not In Use menu item indicates this Relay is not going to be used in the water treatment system and all the usual control methods are removed from its Output Control menu When this usage is selected the relay will not appear in the other control and alarm menus in the system to keep the menus as simple as possible and prevent accidental selection of relays that are not in use This choice would also immediately deactivate the Relay when selected Auto Control Once
95. Sensor Error should occur 229 dFlow Swit t gt onductivet rTemperat re pH Sensor RP I igital n Digital ET A igital n Digital In 4 igital In 5 igit In Digital In gita iri m E L AR A y arm or J r Figure 8 52 Highlight on the Alarm Settings menu for 4 20mA In 01 When setting Alarms for a 4 20 mA Input like the High Alarm shown in Figure 8 53 it is important to understand that the Interpreted Measurement values are what are used for these definitions not the raw mA measurements Figure 8 53 Highlight on the High Alarm menu for 4 20mA In 01 The user defined units are displayed inside the input tray for the alarm setting value as a reminder that an Interpreted Measurement value is being used for this definition The optional Alarm Delay and the Alarm Actions menus are the standard Alarm control 230 menus that have been explained before The Alarm Delay menu lets the user set an optional time that a condition must persist before an Alarm occurs to prevent momentary measurement spikes or signal transients from setting off false alarms The Alarm Actions menu is where the user decides what should happen if the Alarm occurs light the front panel Alarm lamp Activate or Lockout Relays and have the controller send alarm emails The Low Alarm menu has the same submenus and functions as the High Alarm menu The Sensor Error menu has no value settings as this alarm happens
96. To restart the controller in 308 order for the new system software to take over the user can use the web interface by clicking the Restart button on the System Info page Manual Update To perform a system update using a USB flash drive the user would first download the zip archive version of the update from the Triton website at Hydro Systems When the zip file is expanded it will create two folders named Triton_Controller_Update and Triton_Web_Update These folders must be placed at the top level of the USB drive Then that USB drive can be brought to the Triton controller to perform the system update The user would log in to the controller using a password that has change access to the SysInfo amp Updt menu and navigate to the UploadUpdate menu as shown in Figure 16 10 e duploadUpdate Figure 16 10 Highlight on UploadUpdate menu ready to perform a system update Insert the USB flash drive into the larger USB Type A port on the front panel of the controller After the message USB Flash Drive Inserted appears the user can press Enter to start the system update First a large dialog window will appear warning the user that the controller will automatically restart after the update is completed which may cause timer mode pumps to turn on and other configured actions This warning dialog is shown in Figure 16 11 If the user moves the highlight down to the Yes response and p
97. Top Row Edit allows the use to change the text displayed on the first row of the Home Screen This text is normally used to identify the controller or its installation site 6 Row Status is where the user can choose which six Inputs or Outputs will have their current measurement value or status displayed on the Home Screen Temp Scale allows the user to choose either the Fahrenheit F or Centigrade C scale for all the Controller s temperature displays not just the Home Screen vvvVYYVYY Figure 3 44 The Home Screen Edit menu Date Adjust is where the user can set or adjust the current date and its display format 28 Day Cycle is a menu that allows the user to set the date when the first cycle week begins and synchronizes any control modes using a 28 Day Cycle together There is also a submenu item to remove the display of the cycle week from the Home Screen Time Adjust is where the user can set or adjust the current time ContrastCntl Contrast Control has a submenu where the user can adjust the LCD contrast using an Adj Darker or Adj Lighter menu item The user can also adjust the display contrast when the Home Screen itself is showing on the display by pressing the Left Arrow key to decrease contrast and the Right Arrow key to increase contrast 80 Network Configuration The Network Configuration NetwrkConfig menu items shown in Figure 3 45 are for defining the communications settings and some digital network
98. Triton Cooling Tower Water Treatment Controller Rydro Systems Cooling Tower Mode Codotytilend No Alatne iteh pu Sansor ORE Sansor Means Valve On O4 Apr 2032 0 Cyciemenk d 11 42 05 a a gt a m oe Proprietary Material Statement All the descriptions and illustrations used in this documentation are the exclusive property of Hydro Systems Co They may not be distributed disseminated or reproduced by any means without the prior written consent of Hydro Systems Co 3798 Round Bottom Road Cincinnati OH 45244 Copyright Copyright 2011 Hydro System Co 3798 Round Bottom Road Cincinnati OH 45244 513 271 8800 All rights reserved Table of Contents THEORY OP OPERATION vara nuesiiiidiaemieniiadbates 19 OVE VIEW A yq O 19 4 20 mA Input Output Options sssini e niei i ies 19 ACCESS da 19 Triton Controller Special Features e esesesessosososesesesesesessosososososesesesesesoscosososososeseseseseseseosososososesesosesessssssososossseses 20 One Step Data Download with USB Data StiCk ooocicccnnoncncnonoonnnnnonoonnnnnononnonnnoronnonanononno ro connononananacnnnos 20 Open Expandable Architecture with Digital Network ce eesessssesssesesseeeseseeeeeeseseseeeeessesesaeeeseeesaeees 20 Digital NetWork tds 21 Pre programmed Operation Modes iieii iesean EE E a E EE e N aani 21 Large Daylight Readable Graphic Display s seeessesesssesssestssestssrstssestssrstersstesssterssteresttesrerenesresrsresesterese 2
99. a controller and it is added to the menus with a incorrect sequence number it will operate correctly but you may use the RemoveDevice function and SearchForNew menu item so that it is added to the menus with the proper sequence number 1f you so desire For example if you had one CTP probe already CTP1 and attached a second CTP probe and it was already assigned the network address of CTP3 it would be added to the network as CTP3 and the default names for the sensors would appear as Flow Switch3 Conductivty3 and Temperature3 312 This would not cause any functional problems but if you used the RemoveDevice function and selected the CTP3 address then did the SearchForNew the new CTP probe would be assigned the proper sequence number as CTP 2 This is one reason it is important to use the RemoveDevice function before permanently disconnecting a Modbus sensor from the network which will reset that sensor s address to the blank default value and allow it to be properly added to another system If you add a Modbus sensor to a controller and the automatic search at power up or the SearchForNew menu item does not find the new sensor it probably indicates the new sensor you added has the same network address as a Modbus sensor that is already installed For example if you had one CTP probe already CTP1 and attached a second CTP probe that was already assigned the CTP 1 address t
100. about the Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed options in their own sections below SetPo CerrcEeLEE Lime f 1 cet orc q ally 71 Figure 6 30 The Timer amp Set Point Weekly Timer Sunday Menu The first Weekly Timer submenu has the seven days of the week listed Sunday Monday through Saturday To use one of the days the user would go to the submenus set the start time and since there is no duration to change from zero in this 144 mode the user needs to select the Use This Day menu item to indicate the day is active The day prompt would then get the active box drawn around it After setting the days they want to use the user must then highlight Use Mode Now at the bottom of the list of days and press Enter to activate the Weekly Timer control option The active box would be drawn around the Weekly Timer menu prompt and the control mode category T amp StPt Modes to indicate they are now in use Each day Sunday through Saturday has the same two submenu items one to set the start time and the other to activate the day 00 00 This submenu item shows the time of day in 24 hour format that the relay activation would start For all time of day menus in a Triton controller 00 00 begin of Day 12 00 Noon 23 59 end of Day Select the Edit Value submenu item to change the start time Use This Day This is the activator for the particular day Since there is no dura
101. ach day For all time of day menus in a Triton controller 00 00 begin of Day 12 00 Noon 23 59 end of Day Select the Edit Value submenu item to change the start time On Duration This is where the user sets the duration of the activation how long the relay will be activated for that particular day The user can enter from 0 to 1440 minutes 24 hours Remember that setting the duration to anything but zero selects that day but the user must also select the Use Mode Now item at the end of the list to start the Weekly Timer control mode To deselect a particular day just set the On Duration back to zero minutes Timer Start amp Stop Modes 28 Day Timer 28 Day Cycle The 28 Day Cycle control mode is essentially the same as the Weekly Cycle mode The difference is that the user can schedule 28 days of activation instead of just one week This would only be useful if the user needs different timer settings to be used on different weeks instead of the same timer settings being used every week AR AB DA BB PA PR ARAB Figure 6 20 The 28 Day Timer Control Mode The first 28 Day Timer submenu lists the 28 days in four cycle weeks Sunday 1 through Saturday 1 then Sunday 2 through Saturday 2 and so forth The user should go to the submenus described below and change the settings before they activate this 134 mode When the On Duration value is changed from zero the day will automat
102. actions that can reduce the accuracy of their measurement Cleaning the Conductivity Sensor pH Sensor or ORP Sensor The Conductivity probe has stainless steel conductivity sensor tips that can be cleaned The pH and ORP sensors have a glass sensor window at their base that may also need periodic cleaning To clean any of them close the isolation valves in your sample loop closing the inflow valve first to relieve the pressure in the loop Then unscrew the probe body from its T manifold and pull it straight out Be careful not to damage or misplace the O ring at the top of the T manifold To remove loose debris simply wipe the end of the sensor with a clean cloth To remove scale deposits dip the end of the sensor into vinegar or a dilute 2 5 solution of hydrochloric acid and then rinse thoroughly To remove oily deposits even fingerprints wash the end of the sensor with a detergent solution or isopropyl alcohol and then rinse thoroughly Do NOT use any abrasive materials such as a toothbrush wire brush steel wool or plastic abrasive pad The thermally conductive material on the bottom of the Conductivity Temperature probe or the glass window of the pH and ORP sensors will be damaged by abrasive materials 311 When reassembling the CTP probe into its T manifold only screw it in until the arrowhead V on the probe body lines up with the arrowhead A onthe T manifold The pH and ORP
103. age their Modbus digital network They can manually search for devices that have been added to the network an automatic search also occurs when the controller is powered up or they can remove a single device from the network or remove all connected devices The menus to remove a device from the digital network say Reset because as well as removing them from the controller s menus they also reset the address of the device to a default value which makes them easy to use in the future either when reconnected to the same controller or used with another one Please remember to use one of these Reset menus before physically disconnecting a digital network device that is being removed from the system SearchForNew When a new digital network device is connected to the controller s network it will be automatically added to the menu system either by the search that occurs when the controller is powered up or when the user selects the SearchForNew menu item Typically the controller will be powered down when a new digital network device is being installed for example because the water flow is going to be stopped as a new 293 sensor is being plumbed into the sample loop Then when the controller is turned back on the new device will be found automatically by the search that occurs at power up and added to the appropriate menus with an appropriate name and proper range values ActiveAlarms
104. alled Passwords and Access Control wrlA e Wan Figure 3 4 The Menu Screen and Menu key The Menu Screen The user can go immediately to the Menu screen from anywhere in the menu structure by pressing the Menu key on the front panel They can also get to the Menu screen from the Home screen with one press of the Down arrow on the Navigator The Menu screen will display in a hierarchical list all the features of the Triton controller The user can navigate the list with the arrow keys to see all the choices and settings and press the Enter key to make changes The reversed color or highlight of the ActiveAlarms menu item as seen in Figure 3 4 46 indicates this is the menu item in use The user presses the arrow keys of the Navigator to move the highlight Notice there is asubmenu for ActiveAlarms displayed to the right If there were any Inputs or Outputs in alarm they would be listed there in place of the No Alarms message seen in Figure 3 4 Navigating the Menus The menus are arranged in an outline form The user can simply press the Down arrow to move down the menu and the Up arrow to move up If there are options for a menu item they will automatically appear in a submenu to the right and the user can press the Right arrow to move into the submenu Then they can use the Up and Down arrows again to move in that submenu The Interface Elements Looking at the example menu displays below and in th
105. amp Time mode WatrMtr amp Time uses a Timer setting to control how long the relay stays activated and is available for relays controlling Bleed Valves or Chemical Pumps The Bleed On Make up mode BleedOnMakUp is only available when the Relay Usage designates Bleed Valve control and there must be two Water Meters connected to the Digital Inputs This mode activates the Bleed Valve when a user defined volume of Make up water has flowed past the Make up water meter Input then deactivates when a user defined volume of Bleed water has flowed past the Bleed water meter Input ies Figure 6 37 The Water Meter Control Mode Category Water Meter Modes WatrMtr amp Time Water Meter amp Timer This mode activates the relay when the amount of water passing some water meter exceeds a volume setting defined by the user How long the relay stays activated is controlled by a user defined Timer setting The Measurement menu item for this mode displays the current accumulated water volume for reference This is only the volume of water that has passed the meter since the last Bleed activation not a lifetime accumulation Each time the relay being 152 controlled is activated the Measurement is reset to zero Figure 6 38 The Water Meter amp Timer Control Mode Select Meter This submenu displays the currently selected water meter and has a submenu list of connected water meters from which the user can choose
106. an also be used to trigger alarms The Water Meter Digital Input will have its High Volume Alarm available 4 20mA Out The first of the optional 4 20 milliamp outputs will be set to follow the Conductivity sensor for outside charting monitoring or recording purposes The remaining 4 20mA output would not have any default setting and could be set to reflect the status of any of the available Inputs or Outputs Conductivity Bleed Inhibitor Feed by Time Cycle CndBld Feed Similar to the previous mode except for the first time the Inhibitor is pumped independent of the Bleed Valve In this mode the Inhibitor Relay is activated for a user defined percentage of a user defined Time Cycle like 10 of every 60 minutes The Bleed Valve is still activated by Relay 01 using the Conductivity Set Point Outputs Available Only Relay 01 pre named Bleed Valve Relay 02 pre named InhibitrPump and Relay 08 pre named Alarm Relay will be visible along with the 4 20 mA Outputs if installed Figure 5 7 Highlight on Conductivity Bleed Feed as of Time Cycle Auto Control Modes Available Relay 01 will be designated as controlling a Bleed Valve and set to use the Set Point On Off control mode using the Conductivity sensor for the Input That mode and the Set Point Time Proportional control mode will be the 97 only Auto Control modes shown for Relay 01 Relay 02 willbe designated as controlling a chemical pump and set t
107. aracter custom name the user would prefer Some Inputs may have default custom names assigned to them like Conductivty seen in Figure 8 3 but the name can be changed with the Set New Name submenu item indicated by the rightward pointing arrowhead Input Status The second submenu item displays the current status for this Input for the user s reference Different types of Inputs have different status displays Most Input sensors that provide continuous measurement values use the following status displays Normal The sensor measurement is within range between the Alarm values High Alarm The sensor measurement is above the user defined High Alarm value Low Alarm The sensor measurement is below the user defined Low Alarm value Sensor Error The sensor is reporting values out of range or is disabled The Flow Sensor however only displays either Normal Displayed when the water flow is sufficient for normal operation Flow Alarm Displayed when water flow stops or is insufficient 178 The Digital Inputs display varying status codes depending on the Digital Input Usage selected by the user A Reed Switch or Dry Contact Water Meter installed would display either of Normal When total volume measurement has not exceeded the alarm limit High Alarm If the total volume measured exceeds the preset limit A Hall Effect or Paddlewheel Water Meter would display one of the following Normal When volume and flow values ha
108. as acia 257 TOA ME a tinca 257 Bry dt Alkaline it AA A Aa atest 257 Chloride CG cassis feed A A A dt bed bal cd See bag ai ben wa a id ee 257 Phosphate POR sis A neti ted ode tte okt litt 257 Suiltite SOB ei tots Soca id Gee Seven ben ar IES beng beat bod Seas Sect toed Sages ech ALA Ar at ode oe 257 Wet Test pliant cn eee eens ae Sh eon A ei maaan naan kien ae maton netics 257 Wet Test Ci a eiii 257 12 PASSWORD AND ACCESS CONTROL coooocccoconcnononcncnnnnnnonnnenonanenenanenenanannns 258 DNA A yq AO 258 Administrator Level nia BG oR Ab RGR BS AGRE RAE a GRABER ea 258 MS Or Ve VED Decrees td 258 MS Dy ace eects Sele RR ERRATA 258 Read Only Acs iii daba 258 Pas WIACCESS 0 AAA AA de A AA did 258 Admin Menu sieve ite RA O IO 260 Admin PSwrd ssc cne8 e no ahadhenkouasdeaGakaddnan duadanaadhadduasdnkinawss 260 Us ib 261 Us DES WI A ias 262 User ACCES tt tatiana 263 Clear Alo cocina RO id a 263 TA UW Sen 2 ACC dd noo seid ne doe 264 ReadOnlyCntl hi faith aha dios 265 NOACt ime O h i ando 266 13 HOME SCREEN EDIT ida 267 LO T AU TOA ALETTE AO 267 Home Sereen A O 267 Home Screen Edit Mens a da dodo rias 269 Top ROW Edit os ois sete ide si 269 OURO WES tats ss eh et hk als bales ti RE Sener cantina Masten tvis Merete eats Mamet tt ide dcir 270 Temp Calend dt beanie ee ee Aiea eer ec aoe 271 Date AUS biota Ran dalt nan dada cabana ka dnahandhaukhauksauakanahhabbonkis 272 THEMES Format aiii ols ce sabes ENS oa ELIAS NS
109. as defined the volume units and how many of them each pulse represents the controller can start to produce a Totalization value a measurement of the Volume of water that has flowed past this water meter Figure 8 34 The first Total amp Reset submenu shows the current water volume Totalization value since the last reset Up to 999 999 units of volume can be displayed Right below the volume Totalization is a display of the weight of that volume of water This is calculated on the fly from the volume Totalization value using a nominal conversion factor of 8 329 lbs gal the Specific Weight at 70 F If the user selected gal as the volume unit the weight will be displayed in Ibs If the user selected either Itr or m3 as the volume unit the weight will be displayed in kg 212 Last Reset The Date of Last Reset menu item displays the date upon which a Reset was last performed on the Totalization value either manually using the Reset Total item just below or automatically using the daily reset feature called Auto Reset Reset Total The Reset Totalization menu item is a manual method of resetting the Totalization value The user highlights the menu item and presses the Enter key to reset the volume Totalization value to zero This will also reset the weight display Figure 8 35 Highlight on Digital In 1 Control Menu Total amp Reset Auto Reset menu Auto Reset The Automatic Totalizatio
110. as seen above which will always display the Relays in their numerical order and with their default numerical names The next goal of this explanation is to change the Set Point for the Conductivity sensor used to control the Bleed Valve activated by Relay 01 a m y Agg v Y Figure 3 14 Output Control for Relay 01 2 Edit the Conductivity Set Point One press of the Left arrow will move the highlight back to the list of Outputs then one press of the Up arrow will move the highlight up to the Output Control menu for Relay 01 and its submenu items would appear a shown in Figure 3 14 Relay 01 typically has the custom name Bleed Valve assigned at the factory From the Relay 01 menu item one press of the Right arrow would move the highlight into the custom name submenu for Relay 01 and then three Down arrow presses would highlight the Auto Control menu item where the choices and settings for automatically controlling this Relay are found The submenu items displayed to the right of the Auto Control menu shown in Figure 3 15 are the categories of control modes along with the Lockout and Alarm Settings submenus 155 The Set Point Modes SetPnt Modes are the control modes that use a measurement value from an input sensor to decide when to activate a relay The Timer Modes are the control modes that activate a relay at a certain time of day and keep it activated for a user defined duration The Timer amp Se
111. as they see fit customizing help instructions for their installation adding contact phone numbers perhaps even include a translation to another language Then the modified Help file could be uploaded to the same controller or brought to and uploaded to other Triton controllers System Update The System Update menu has one function to upload a new version of the controller software if an update becomes available A user can contact Hydro Systems to determine if a newer version is available or check at the Hydro Systems Water Treatment website http www hydro watertreatment com water treatment controllers triton controller html A Triton software update will be made available in two forms an executable updater if the user has remote access to the controller and a zip archive that can be expanded onto a USB flash drive for a manual update using the front panel USB port with the UploadUpdate menu item shown in Figure 16 9 h Menu Scre Figure 16 9 Highlight on SystemUpdate showing its UploadUpdate sub menu Remote Update If a user has remote access to the Triton controller a URL that they use to access the controller s web interface they can download the executable system updater from the Triton website at Hydro Systems and run that program to perform a system update In the updater all they have to do is enter the same URL that they use to access the web interface and the updater will upload the system update
112. ation Since Relay 01 is being used in this explanation with the Bleed Valve control relay usage the Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed control modes described below would not be listed in its timer control menus For the Chemical Pump control usage however these add on modes would appear after the 28 Day Timer mode Add PreBleed This is an optional mode that adds a pre bleed feature to the first three T amp StPt modes described above It is designed to turn on the Bleed valve for a period before one of the above T amp StPt activations Add Pre Feed This is another optional mode that adds a pre feed feature to the first three T amp StPt Modes above It allows the user to have a different relay activate and run for a pre set amount of time before the normal relay activation 141 Timer Start with Set Point Stop Modes Daily Timer Daily Cycle This control mode lets the user choose up to ten times of day to activate the relay and uses an Input measurement Set Point to control the deactivation The user can have the relay activate up to ten different times a day Since the deactivation settings are made in the previous menus all the user defines here is which of the ten time slots are in use and the time of day the activation starts for each time slot being used The user can also add a Pre Bleed or Pre Feed operation to the Daily Cycle activations Remember that the Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed menus are not
113. ation menus described later in this Reference Manual ig Data Via Email lt tutoDown l MEP Select gt Figure 9 13 Highlight on DownloadLogs Via Email AutoDownload menu Select Logs The first AutoDownload submenu allows to user to select which of the logs they want included in the automatic download the System Activity Log the By Time Data Log or both The user can simply highlight the menu item for the log they 243 want downloaded and press Enter When a log has been selected the active box is drawn around the menu item and the AutoDownload menu item will also become selected to show this feature is now active as shown in Figure 9 14 Figure 9 14 Highlight on Select Logs after one log selected with AutoDownload active NR Bs Figure 9 15 Highlight on Scheduler with its three sub menus Monthly is active by default Scheduler This AutoDownload submenu is where the user defines what period with which they want the logs downloaded As shown in Figure 9 15 the default setting is to have the logs sent once a month but they can also choose to have the logs automatically emailed once a week or once a day Remember that the user would also 244 have to select at least one of the logs to be downloaded as described above for the settings made in the Scheduler menu to have any effect er Da Monthly Day Of Month Figure 9 16 Highlight on the Month
114. atus The Conductivity sensor has four possible status codes Normal When the sensor is reporting values within its normal range High Alarm If the conductivity measurement goes above a user defined value Low Alarm Ifthe conductivity measurement goes below a user defined value Sensor Error If the sensor reports values out of range or the controller recognizes that the sensor has failed Measurement The live display of the sensor s measurement value The Conductivity sensor can report values from 10 to 15 000 uS cm AlarmSettngs The Conductivity sensor has three possible alarm conditions with sub menus for setting the Alarm Actions and Alarm Delay for each of them High Alarm If the conductivity measurement goes above a user defined value Low Alarm If the conductivity measurement goes below a user defined value Sensor Error If the sensor reports values out of range or the controller recognizes the sensor has failed Calibration The submenus under this item explained in detail earlier in this chapter are where the sensor s measurements can be adjusted for greater accuracy or calibrated Like many sensors three types of calibration are offered for the Conductivity sensor Field Calibration A simple 1 point calibration that does not require probe removal 1 Point Reference Calibration A more involved calibration usually requires probe removal and cleaning and may use laboratory prepared reference samples 2 Point Refer
115. awn around it By the way ifa 313 Ready to Use mode has had its settings configured the user can take advantage of the Copy Mode feature of a User Mode to copy all those settings into the User Mode Activating a Control Mode Under the Auto Control menu are various categories of automatic control modes Under each category are the individual control modes If an automatic control mode is active it will have the Active Box drawn around its name and there will also be an Active Box drawn around the category name and the Auto Control menu item The most common way an automatic control mode is activated is by selecting the Use Mode Now menu item which will be the last menu item under the individual control mode The user would move the highlight onto the Use Mode Now menu item and press Enter to select it So if a user has adjusted the settings of an automatic control mode but there is no Active Box around its name nor around the Auto Control menu item the user probably has not selected the Use Mode Now menu item for that control mode Also after setting up and activating an automatic control mode the user can always select the Manual On or Manual Off menu items to manually control the relay To return to the previously active automatic control mode the user can either allow the Manual Limit time to expire or simply select the ReturnToAuto menu item Activati
116. ay with an Activation Limit Timer set to 90 minutes all of which may be adjusted by the user Relay 08 will be pre set to activate as the Alarm relay for the various alarm conditions possible in this Operation Mode Inputs Available Only the Conductivity sensor Input will be available for control with the Conductivity sensor pre selected to control Relay 01 The Alarm conditions described below have a default one minute Alarm delay except the Flow Switch that by default has no delay set The Flow Switch will cause an Alarm condition if flow becomes insufficient The Conductivity sensor will have its High Alarm and Low Alarm available The Temperature sensor is available for Conductivity calibration and for alarms 93 4 20mA Out The first of the optional 4 20 milliamp outputs will be set to follow the Conductivity sensor for outside charting monitoring or recording purposes The rest these analog outputs would not have any default setting and could be set to reflect the status of any of the available Inputs or Outputs Timer controlled Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor TimrBld amp Feed Much like the previous Operation mode except that the opening of the Bleed valve is controlled by a Timer setting instead of the Conductivity Set Point The Inhibitor pump relay is still activated by the Bleed Valve deactivation Outputs Available Only Relay 01 pre named Bleed Valve Relay 02 pre named InhibitrPump and Relay 08 pre name
117. bed below have a default one minute Alarm delay except the Flow Switch that by default has no delay set The Flow Switch will cause an Alarm condition if flow becomes insufficient The Conductivity sensor will have its High Alarm and Low Alarm available The Temperature sensor is available to allow for Conductivity calibration but can also be used to trigger alarms 4 20mA Out The first of the optional 4 20 milliamp outputs will be set to follow the Conductivity sensor for outside charting monitoring or recording purposes The rest of these analog outputs would not have any default setting A Figure 5 6 Highlight on Make up Volume controlled Bleed amp Feed 95 Make up Volume Controlled Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor MkUpBld amp Feed Much like the previous Operation modes except that the opening of the Bleed valve is now controlled by a Volume measurement of Make up water The Inhibitor pump relay is still activated by the Bleed Valve deactivation Outputs Available Only Relay 01 pre named Bleed Valve Relay 02 pre named InhibitrPump and Relay 08 pre named Alarm Relay will be visible along with the 4 20 mA Outputs if installed Auto Control Modes Available Relay 01 will be designated as controlling a Bleed Valve and set to use the Bleed on Make up control mode using a Digital Input sensor set to the Reed Switch Meter Usage for the Water Meter Input That will be the only Auto Control mode available
118. bration 192 Input Set up Conductivty Condustinty input Status Measurement AlarmSettngs Calibration 4LastCal Date NotForContrl Next Cal Due 1Pt ieldcal 2Pt Ref Cal Figure 8 16 Input Set up Calibration 1Pt Ref Cal menu for Conductivity sensor Calibrate Temperature First This display is a reminder that many Input sensors rely on an accurate temperature measurement supplied by the temperature sensor built into the Triton s combination Flow Switch Conductivity Temperature probe in order to perform a temperature compensation on their own measurements Figure 8 17 Figure 8 17 1Pt Ref Cal Reminder to consider calibrating Temperature first For this reason it is often best to calibrate the Temperature sensor first or at least check its accuracy before any other calibrations On the other hand if the user knows the Input they are calibrating does not use the temperature measurement or that the temperature 193 sensor is measuring accurately they can move forward with confidence Notice the dialog allows three choices to simply Continue by pressing Enter to Go to the Temperature Calibrationmenu immediately or to Cancel this Calibration Remember No Activity Timeout The second interactive dialog window is a reminder that the Triton controller has a No Activity Timeout Limit NATL that will log out the user and return the controller s display to the Home Screen after a certain amount o
119. controlling the Bleed Valve relay with the Conductivity sensor using this control mode They have the Sample Time set for one hour the Set Point at 3000 uS cm and the Adjustment Band set for 200 uS cm Suppose when the hour comes up the first time the conductivity measurement is 3300 uS cm Then the difference between the measurement and the Set Point is 300 uS cm which is greater than the 200 uS cm Adjustment Band so the relay will be activated for the entire hour of the Sample Time setting At the end of that first one hour cycle suppose the conductivity measurement is now down to 3100 uS cm Then for the second cycle the difference between the measurement and the Set Point is 100 uS cm That is only 1 2 of the 200 uS cm Adjustment band so the relay would only be activated for the first 30 minutes of the one hour Sample Time At the end of the second one hour cycle suppose the conductivity measurement is now down to 2975 uS cm Now the measurement is below the Set Point and therefore the relay will not activate at all during the third one hour Sample Time And so forth Limit Timer Activation Limit Timer This is a setting to take control of the relay if the normal deactivation does not occur If this time limit is exceeded the OvrTimeLimit Alarm condition occurs and the relay activates or deactivates depending on its RlayReaction setting in the Alarms Actions menu When the cause of the problem is resolved the user can go to the Act
120. csessessssessssesssssssessssessssessssessesessessssessssessesessessscesseserseseeses 69 ACtiVe TE ii N A A AN A A N EE A E E A 70 VIEWING A A S E EEEE 71 Water Indexes and Wet Test Data 0cscscscsrsrsrsesessseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseres 73 ESTand RSI Indexes ii ns Saad dnd ind 73 Eycles 0f Concentrado ala nabo USL AeA Bue AR ane ici 75 Wet Test Entry sicscscsiicicccetacksvevsvcbcvestevsuetscevssvesenesevsianessersavessesbunsuseruevsvesescusvanevenevorsusecvioesenssesvbanesevedeensueveaseds 75 LEEN AAA 77 Home Screen Edit 0cccscsrsrsrsrsrseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseres 79 Home Screen Edit Men s arree e o e de ae a e aa aaa aea Deves e aa eaa e aiii iia 80 TOP ROME o er aA 80 GROW Status iii ia aia ca ida ia td ic dise 80 Temp Sal iia 80 Bate AU nit 80 28 Day Cl sai cite i i eel E E E N een aan Bain 80 Time Adjust ai A eels E aa eae A A 80 Contrast ntl scsvceteescelsetbelaehviens a e s 80 Network Configuration cccccscsssscssssscsssscssscessssessssecsessssessssessscessssessessscessssessssecsessssessscessssessesecsesssserscesesecseres 81 System Information and Update s ssesesosesesesoscososossoseseseososososososesesesesesessosososososesesoseseseseososososososesesesessssssososossseses 81 4 USING THE TRITON CONTROLLER oooccoooccccococcnonnononnncncnannnnnnnnnnnnn
121. d Alarm Relay will be visible along with the 4 20 mA Outputs if installed I de dy L Figure 5 5 Highlight on Timer Controlled Bleed Feed Inhibitor Auto Control Modes Available Relay 01 will be designated as controlling a Bleed valve and set to use the Timer Start amp Stop control mode with Daily Weekly and 28 Day cycles available Those will be the only Auto Control modes available for Relay 01 Relay 02 will be designated as controlling a chemical pump but with only the Other Relay control modes available pre set to activate after Relay 01 deactivates Those will be the only Auto Control modes shown for Relay 02 Relay 08 will be designated as an Alarm Relay intended to activate an external 94 Alarm indicator like an exterior Bell or Strobe Default settings Relay 01 Activates Bleed Valve Timer Start amp Stop Daily Cycle Relay 02 Activates Inhibitor Pump after Relay 01 deactivates with a 0 minute Delay with an Activation Limit Timer set to 90 minutes all of which may be adjusted by the user Relay 08 will be pre set to activate as the Alarm relay for the various Alarm conditions possible in this Operation Mode Inputs Available None of the sensor Inputs willbe available in the Output Control menu because none are used to control activation in this mode However all installed Inputs will be available in the Input Set up menu for monitoring or setting off alarms The Alarm conditions descri
122. d or the display will show as Expired Here are some typical interpretations for the LSI Index 2 0 Scale forming but non corrosive 0 5 Slight scale forming amp corrosive 0 02 Balanced but possible pitting 0 5 Slightly corrosive but no scale 2 0 Serious corrosion RSI Index This submenu displays the calculated RSI Index value All the parameters must have values entered and be less than two weeks old or the display will show as Expired Some typical interpretations for the RSI Index are 4 0 5 0 Heavy scale 5 0 6 0 Light scale 6 0 7 0 Little scale or corrosion 7 0 7 5 Corrosion significant 7 5 9 0 Heavy corrosion gt 9 0 Corrosion intolerable 254 Cycles of C Cycles of Concentration The second submenu in the Water Indexes menu is for the Cycles of Concentration value This menu item will only be useful if the controller has more than one Conductivity sensor installed on the Triton network and one is measuring the System water and another is measuring the Make up water Figure 11 3 Figure 11 3 Highlight on the Water Indexes Cycles of Concentration menu The Cycles of Concentration is a very simple traditional water index that provides a measurement of solids concentration in the system water usually the result of evaporation It is calculated as the total amount of dissolved solids TDS in the System water divided by the TDS of the Make up water It is the only one of the three indexe
123. d Help file could be uploaded to the same controller or brought to and uploaded to another Triton controller Figure 3 48 The SystemUpdate menu 83 The System Update menu SystemUpdate shown in Figure 3 48 allows the user to upload a system update from a USB data stick plugged into the front panel of the controller Check for system updates at http www hydro watertreatment com water treatment controllers triton controller html 84 4 Using the Triton Controller Overview Installation and Initial Set Up The following chapters describe how to use the Triton controller most effectively In this chapter are instructions for the initial installation and set up of a Triton controller most importantly e Change the Default Passwords e Choose an Operation Mode e Name and configure the Outputs e Name the Inputs and configure their Alarms How to install and use the Triton water treatment controller e Physically install the Triton controller enclosure e Connect the Sensors to the controller and the Relays to the devices they will control e Supply power to the Triton controller e CHANGE THE DEFAULT PASSWORDS e Choose an Operation Mode Unless the controller was factory pre programmed Choose a pre programmed Ready to Use or a user defined User Mode e Configure the Relays Relay 01 a Selecta Relay Usage Bleed Valve Chemical Pump Alarm Relay b Pick a Control Mode Manual Set Point Timer Water
124. d explanations of the Alarm settings and Alarm Actions are in the Output Control and Input Set up and Calibration sections of the Using the Triton Controller chapter later in this manual Each Input and Output has Alarm submenus where the user can control when an Alarm should occur and what happens when it does Viewing Data Although the Triton controller offers complete data downloads right from the front panel or over a network connection the user can also view the data on the front panel display or with the web interface The Viewing Data submenus allow the user to view the System Activity Log or the Data Logs of the Input and Output values or status The user can view the data right on ea Ea the controller s front panel display download the logs to a USB drive or email the logs over an Ethernet network or the Internet toutst IT put Viewing Dat a deso Waterindexe Yyyy Figure 3 34 The Viewing Data menu Any changes made to the controller settings are recorded into the System Activity Log The log will show the date and time of the change most recent entries first and the setting before and after the change The Viewing Data menu allows the user to view the System Activity Log on the front panel display over a LAN via the Internet or choose to download the log to a USB drive A System Activity Log entry is made automatically when there is any system activity a user log on setting change alarm and so fo
125. d sequentially and listed after the original Relays s972 The beauty of the digital expansion network is that when the user attaches either a Relay Expansion Module or a Modbus Sensor the controller will automatically know what they have added and the new addition will automatically be given an appropriate name numbered appropriately and placed in the appropriate menu with the other Inputs or Outputs of the same kind Moreover because the device is connected over a sophisticated digital network with robust redundancy and signal error detection the Modbus sensors can be a thousand feet away from the main controller without the worries of signal strength and electro magnetic interference that make using analog sensors so problematic especially over long distances All Modbus devices will have two digital communication ports to allow the continuous connection or daisy chaining of multiple devices Therefore you will not have to run another sensor cable all the way back to the controller and inside the enclosure 28 2 Installation Unpacking and Mounting Unpack the Controller Carefully open the shipping carton and inspect its contents Notify the carrier immediately if there are any signs of damage to the controller or other parts If any parts are missing contact Hydro Systems The typical configuration would include the controller enclosure a Conductivity Temperature probe and a Flow Switch each installed in the
126. display will differ depending on the Digital Input Usage selected 208 Reed Switch A Reed Switch Dry Contact Water Meters installed would display Normal as long as the total volume has not exceeded the preset limit High Alarm if the total volume measured exceeds the preset limit Hall Effect A Hall Effect or Paddlewheel Water Meter would display Normal when the volume or flow values do not exceed their preset limits High Alarm if the volume measured exceeds the preset volume limit Hi FlowAlarm if the flow rate exceeds the preset high flow rate limit LowFlowAlarm if the flow rate falls below a preset low flow rate limit Counter The Digital Counter usage for a Digital Input would display Normal as long as total count and rate values do not exceed preset limits High Alarm if the interpreted Total Count exceeds the preset limit Hi RateAlarm if the interpreted Count Rate exceeds the preset limit LowRateAlarm if the interpreted Count Rate falls below the preset limit General Purpose The General Purpose Drum Level usage has only two states The user defines which one is Normal and which is the Alarm state They display either Normal if the state the Input is in was defined as Normal by the user DigitalAlarm if the state the Input is in was defined as Alarm by the user Flow Switch The Flow Switch usage has only two states like General Purpose usage but has special alarm defaults appropriate f
127. ditional modes cannot be used together only one can be used at a time and always have to be used with one of the three previous Timer activation modes Timer Start with Set Point Stop Modes Add PreBleed The Add PreBleed mode allows the user to bleed water from the system before the normally programmed Timer activation they have set up in one of the previous three Timer Start with Set Point Stop Modes They can bleed for a preset amount of time by using the TimerControl menu or have a Conductivity Set Point control when the bleed should stop by using the SetPtControl menu Figure 6 33 The Timer amp Set Point Add PreBleed Menu The Add PreBleed control menu is not seen when the Relay Usage is Bleed Valve control like Relay 01 being used in these explanations so Figures 6 33 to 6 35 show an example Control Menu for Relay 02 designated as a Pump Relay Bleed Relay This submenu is where the user would choose which relay should be activated in order to bleed the system before the normal Timer cycle activation The user can choose any relay other than one they are controlling with the Timer activation mode 148 but typically Relay 01 is assigned to control the Bleed Valve Figure 6 34 The Timer amp Set Point Pre Bleed TimerControl Menu TimerControl The Timer Control menu is for setting a pre bleed for a fixed amount of time The user would use the PreBleedTime Pre Bleed Time submenu to set how long t
128. ductivity Input This submenu allows the user to select which of the conductivity sensors is measuring the make up water If a second conductivity sensor is installed on the digital network it will be selected by default If the second sensor is connected to the 4 20 mA Inputs it must be selected manually 126 Cycles Value This submenu item displays the current Cycles value to the right of the prompt based on the two conductivity measurements defined above It is simply the system conductivity divided by the make up conductivity Cycle SetPnt Cycle Set Point This is the Cycle value that the user defines should activate the relay when exceeded The Control Effect is pre set to Force Low for this control mode in which case the user is defining the Cycles value that must be exceeded by the current measurement to activate the relay ContrlEffect Control Effect This submenu is where the user must set whether the relay activation is going to lower the Cycle value Force Low or whether the relay activation is going to raise the Cycle Value Force High Force Low is the default CycleDeadBand Cycle Dead Band The user s setting in this submenu works just like other Dead Band settings The user enters a Cycle value intended to keep the relay from turning on and off too quickly It delays the deactivation of the relay during the correction period by the Cycle magnitude value the user enters For example if the user had defined 3
129. duled events are ignored no alarms are allowed and so forth Normal operations resume as soon as the calibration process is over either because the calibration was successful was canceled or failed Accuracy This method is prone to error if the characteristics of the water at the sample point are not similar to the condition of the water surrounding the sensor being calibrated Temperature pressure or velocity differences as wellas other factors could affect the measurement value reducing the accuracy of this type of calibration Field Calibration accuracy is also dependant on the accuracy of the external device used to make the field measurement 1 Point Reference Calibration Complexity More complex than the Field Calibration as the probe typically must be removed and cleaned before the calibration so the flow must be stopped through the probe manifold then after calibration the probe must be re installed and the system 185 checked for leaks On the less complex side a fixed reference is used for this calibration instead of a possibly inaccurate external measurement device Probe Removal You usually have to remove the probe from its housing to calibrate it to the reference The sensor may need to be cleaned physically and or chemically before it is calibrated and finally the probe has to be re installed and the system checked for leaks Suspension of Control Since it is assumed the user will stop the water flow and
130. e the injection on and off too frequently and may damage the sensors 33 4 20 mA Inputs The controller can be fitted with up to three optional 4 20 mA Input boards These boards are available with two or four inputs on the board The wiring illustration shown uses a single four input board installed in the leftmost position as an example with the ports numbered bottom to top 1 through 4 Subsequent boards would use the same wiring scheme with the ports numbered 5 through 8 and 9 through 12 respectively WARNING There are live electrical circuits inside the enclosure even when the front panel power switch is in the OFF position The power shall be removed from the controller before accessing the front door to the inside of the enclosure e Do not exceed 20 mA of current per input channel e 20 26 AWG wire is recommended for 4 20 mA connections e For extended runs up to 325 feet 100 meters use shielded twisted pairs e Route signal wires in separate conduit at least 6 inches from any AC voltage 4 20 mA Input Wiring Examples Powered 4 20 mA Source Unpowered 2 Wire Unpowered 3 Wire 34 ae Digital Inputs Every Triton controller comes with eight fully 8 er 12 7 0 5A configurable digital inputs They can be used for VDC 5 Max simple two state devices like a float style flow a switch or drum level sensor or for sophisticated dd 7 pulse generating devices like a Hall Effect or p
131. e The default value is zero minutes Normally the relay activation postponed by a Lockout will begin as soon as the relay that set the Lockout deactivates If the user needs to delay the locked out activation beyond that point they should set their desired additional delay time in this menu Output Alarms AlarmSettngs The last item in the Auto Control menu for both the Bleed Valve and Pump Relay Usage is the Alarm Settings menu The settings in this menu and its submenus define what happens if an Output Alarm occurs Most alarms are associated with the Input sensors a High Alarm Low Alarm and so forth The Input Alarm settings are described and explained in the Input Set up and Calibration menu explained later in this manual Figure 6 46 The Relay 01 Alarm Settings Menu There are two possible Output Alarms with corresponding Status Displays but they both use the same Alarm Settings If a relay stays activated longer than its Activation Limit Timer Limit Timer then the relays goes into an alarm condition and the status changes to OvrTimeLimit If the relay is being controller by an Input device and that Input develops a Sensor Error the relay goes into an alarm condition and the status changes to Input Error Both of these alarms use the same Alarm Settings 163 The Alarm Settings menu AlarmSettngs for Outputs has two sections RlayReaction The Relay Reaction menu is where the u
132. e Alarm available 4 20mA Out The first of the optional 4 20 milliamp outputs will be set to follow the Conductivity sensor for outside charting monitoring or recording purposes The remaining 4 20mA output would not have any default setting and could be set to reflect the status of any of the available Inputs or Outputs Figure 5 9 Highlight on Conductivity Bleed amp Feed with one timed Biocide Conductivity Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor with 1 Biocide CB amp Feed 1Bio Now that we have dealt with those Inhibitor Feed variations we go back to the Conductivity controlled Bleed amp Feed operation mode and simply add a Biocide being 100 controller by a Timer The Bleed Valve activation is controlled by a Conductivity Set Point and the Inhibitor pump is activated by the Bleed Valve Outputs Available Only Relay 01 pre named Bleed Valve Relay 02 pre named InhibitrPump Relay 03 pre named Biocide1Pump and Relay 08 pre named Alarm Relay will be visible along with the 4 20 mA Outputs if installed Auto Control Modes Available Relay 01 will be designated as controlling a Bleed Valve and set to use the Set Point On Off control mode using the Conductivity sensor for the Input That mode and the Set Point Time Proportional control mode will be the only Auto Control modes shown for Relay 01 Relay 02 will be designated as controlling a chemical pump and only have the With and After Other Relay control modes ava
133. e Digital pH probe that Hydro Systems sells for use with the Triton does not the user should install the pH probe relatively close to the controller s Conductivty probe so the Conductivity probe s temperature measurement is accurate and appropriate for the pH sensor Now that the merits of the various calibration methods have been discussed we will examine the typical Calibration menus using the Conductivity sensor as an example Figure 8 9 Input Set up Calibration LastCal Date menu for Conductivity sensor 187 LastCal Date Last Calibration Date This menu item just displays the last date the Input was successfully calibrated for the user s reference Figure 8 9 This date is updated automatically every time a successful calibration is performed on this Input The date is displayed in the same format that is chosen for the Front Panel date display which is selected in the Home Screen Edit menu i t j 2 f Next Cal Due aoea A O gt LE Ref 2Pt Figure 8 10 Input Set up Calibration Next Cal Due menu for Conductivity sensor Next Cal Due Next Calibration Due Date This menu allows the user to set a date for when the next calibration is due for this input This just displays the date the user enters as a reminder for when the next calibration should be done Nothing happens if the Next Cal Due date passes without a calibration this is not an Alarm condition 1Pt FieldCal 1 Point Field Calibration
134. e Now This is the activator for the FeedWithSame control mode After selecting the other relay the user would highlight this menu item and press Enter to start using this mode Other Relay Modes FeedAfter T Feed After Other Relay Timed In this mode the relay being controlled will run after another relay deactivates Then it stays activated for a user defined time There are four submenus for this control mode After Relay In this submenu the user selects which relay is the other relay The default selection will be the relay with the lowest identifier number that is not the relay being controlled diia E vv Figure 6 42 The Feed After Other Relay Timed Control Mode Addtnl Delay Additional Delay This submenu allows the user to specify an additional amount of time that will delay the activation of this relay beyond the deactivation of the other relay The range is 0 to 1440 minutes with a default of zero FeedDuration Feed Duration Here the user simply sets the amount of time this relay should stay activated The range is 0 to 1440 minutes with zero as the default Use Mode Now This is the activator for the FeedWithSame control mode After 159 selecting the other relay the user would highlight this menu item and press Enter to start using this mode Other Relay Modes FeedAfter Feed After Other Relay Percentage This is very similar to the previous mode th
135. e Output they wish to program and then going to submenus under that output to find the usages auto control modes and settings High Capacity Mechanical Relays Bleed Valve Relay 02 Every Triton controller is equipped with eight high capacity electro mechanical Relays that can supply AC power to a device or be used unpowered as dry contacts These Relays are typically used to activate a solenoid bleed valve or a chemical pump but the user can choose to have other devices activated by any of the Relays like a motorized ball valve or an external Alarm indicator such as a bell or strobe The factory default names for the Relays are of the form Relay 02 Relay 03 and so forth Some of the Relays may have custom names assigned to them depending on the Operation Mode that is currently selected 4 20 mA Outputs The Triton controller can be optionally equipped with up to three analog output boards that can have two or four 4 20 milliamp mA outputs on each board These 4 20 mA outputs are normally used to report or mirror the status of some input to an external recorder or a building maintenance system 123 Output Status Displays The output relays display their status in various menus The possible output relay status displays are On NNNN min Displays the total minutes of the relay s current activation Relay is Off Indicates the relay is deactivated normally LkOut NN min Shows when arelay is locked out by som
136. e cycle is employed Off SetPoint This menu is where the Set Point can be defined which will be used to 140 deactivate this relay Remember this is a Set Point for deactivation so it should be significantly lower or higher depending on the Input than a Set Point for activation This setting is used for every deactivation in whatever time cycle is selected ContrlEffect Control Effect This submenu is where the user must set whether the relay activation is going to lower the input measurement Force Low or whether the relay activation is going to raise the input measurement Force High Limit Timer Activation Limit Timer Any mode that uses an Input for control has this activation time limit menu to take control of the relay after the time value defined in case there is a problem with the Input The default time limit is 90 minutes Daily Timer Daily Cycle This mode can be programmed to activate the relay up to 10 different times a day The Input Set Point defined earlier controls the deactivation Weekly Timer Weekly Cycle This mode can be programmed to activate the relay once a day for each day of the week The user defines what days they want to use and at what time of day the relay activates and the defined Set Point controls the deactivation 28 Day Timer 28 Day Cycle This mode is just like the weekly cycle except the user can activate a relay once a day on a 28 day schedule with Set Point deactiv
137. e other relay AlarmLockOut This indicates a relay is locked out by an Alarm Setting OvrTimeLimit The Limit Timer setting has been exceeded Input Error Means the input that is controlling the relay is reporting an error Not In Use A usage setting to hide the relay from most menus Details later Like the relay outputs the 4 20 mA outputs display their status in various menus The possible 4 20mA Output status displays are NN N mA Out Displays the current output value in milliamps Input Error Means the input to the 4 20 mA output is reporting an error Sensor Inputs Sensor Inputs are the signals from various devices that monitor the water s condition The user can just view these measurements to monitor the water s condition or the user can employ the measurement values to control the outputs and or set off alarms The sensor inputs considered essential for any cooling tower controller are Conductivity Temperature and a Flow Switch These sensor come standard with the Triton controller a digital Conductivity and Temperature probe as well as a reliable mechanical Flow Switch Other Input sensors may be installed besides the Conductivity Temperature probe and Flow Switch such as e A pH sensor e An Oxygen Reduction Potential ORP sensor e A Boiler rated Conductivity Temperature probe e Water Meters Drum Level sensors e Any probe that has the option of 4 20mA output DAs Some systems may have mor
138. e relay being controlled willrun after another relay deactivates except here the controlled relay is activated for a percentage of the time the other relay was activated for There are four submenu items for this control mode After Relay In this submenu the user selects which relay is the other relay The default selection will be the relay with the lowest identifier number that is not the relay being controlled WY Figure 6 43 The Feed After Other Relay Percentage Control Mode Addtnl Delay Additional Delay This submenu allows the user to specify an additional amount of time which will delay the activation of this relay beyond the deactivation of the other relay The range is 0 to 1440 minutes with a default of zero Feed Time Percent of Other Relay s On Time to Feed This menu is where the user sets the percentage of the first relay s activation time for which the relay being controlled will be activated The range is from 0 to 100 with a default value of 0 Use Mode Now This is the activator for the FeedWithSame control mode After 160 selecting the other relay the user would highlight this menu item and press Enter to start using this mode That was the last explanation of the individual control modes The next menu item in the Auto Control menu for Bleed Valve or Chemical Pump Output is the Lockout menu Lockout Menu After the Auto Control menu the next item in the Output
139. e than one of a particular type of sensor installed such as two Conductivity probes or two pH sensors and so forth This is especially easy with a Triton controller because it uses a Plug n Play expandable digital network for these additional inputs and the new sensors are automatically named and added appropriately to the Input menus even if they are plugged in long after the system has been installed and configured The measurements that these sensors are constantly providing can be compared by the controller logic to pre set values to activate relay outputs or generate alarms Alarms can be programmed to flash the red Alarm lamp on the front panel activate or Lockout relays and send alarm emails to appropriate personnel Other Inputs Every Triton controller comes equipped with eight general purpose digital inputs whose function can be changed at any time These are intended for volume measuring Water Meters either Reed Switch Dry Contact or Hall Effect Paddlewheel Digital Counters Flow Switches or general purpose two state digital inputs like Drum Level sensors The Triton controller can also be equipped with optional 4 20mA Input Boards that have two or four general purpose 4 20 mA analog inputs These support two or three wire devices with internal 24V DC power available have a 25 Ohm input resistance with an 800 Ohm maximum load capacity In their Input Set up menus the user can have the current changes of these inpu
140. e this one same interval it is not possible to use different intervals with different sensors Besides the sensor style Inputs and the 4 20 mA Outputs there are also two state devices like the Flow Switch some of the Digital Input Usages and the Relay Outputs These devices do not provide continuous measurements that change constantly but rather have only two states that they can be in like Flow On and Flow Off Therefore entries to the Data Log for these two state types of devices are event driven rather than periodic Instead of using the Log Interval a log entry is made for these devices whenever they change state For the Relay Outputs for example a log entry is made each time they activate and each time they deactivate DownloadLogs This menu shown in Figure 9 8 is used to either 1 email logs using the Ethernet connection or 2 download logs to a USB drive plugged into the controller The user would move the highlight to one of first two submenus Via Email or To USB Drive depending on whether they want the logs sent out as an attachment to an email or if they want to download the logs to a USB drive plugged into the front panel of the controller Iindexe ew sta MM Via Emai gt Figure 9 8 Highlight on the Viewing Data DownloadLogs menu 240 DownloadLogs E PSystmActivty gt To ve Data By Time PA NE gt Figure 9 9 Highlight on the Viewing Data DownloadLogs Via
141. e upcoming section on Inputting Values the following interface elements are used in the menus The text below will explain what they mean to help the user understand the displays and navigate the menu system The reversed color highlight This reversed color field is showing the user where the focus is it is like a cursor that the user can move using the arrow keys of the Navigator It tells the user You are here Selections are made in a list by moving the highlight onto the item the user wants to select and pressing the Enter key Then the Active Box is drawn around the item to show it is active or selected A Y 4 gt The arrowheads and the colon The arrowheads show the user where the highlight will move when they press the corresponding arrow key on the Navigator They are also used to indicate where there are hidden menu items that can be accessed using the arrow keys The colon is used when a value is displayed that cannot be edited a live display of a measurement value or status code The Active Box This solid line drawn around a menu item indicates that the item has been selected or is active In the 47 example here it shows that of the two choices in this menu the Ready to Use item has been selected and is active Some menus allow more than one item to be selected other menus only allow one item to be selected at a time Bleed Valve i The input tray This dotted line around the bot
142. easurement value For a Flow Switch there are only two measurements Flow On Indicates sufficient flow for accurate sensor measurements and chemical dispersion This corresponds with the Normal status Flow Off When flow is stopped or insufficient for normal operation This measurement corresponds with the Flow Alarm status display AlarmSettngs The fourth menu as it will be for any Input Sensor is the Alarm Settings menu For a Flow Switch there only one type of alarm the Flow Alarm with the usual settings for Alarm Actions and an Alarm Delay A Flow Switch does not have a Calibration menu nor does it have the usual Not For Control menu item as it is already not listed in the menus under Output Control from which the NotForContrl menu item would hide an Input viene Onductivty gt Waterindexe lempe ire npu Status Figure 8 27 Highlight on Input Set up for the Conductivity sensor Conductivity CTP Conductivity Sensor Always listed after any Modbus Flow Switch inputs A Triton controller will typically be equipped with a combination Flow Switch Conductivity Temperature probe we call the Cooling Tower Probe CTP Most Conductivity sensors need a temperature compensation to produce an accurate measurement so itis common to have these two 201 sensors combined in a single probe Figure 8 27 Custom Name Showing again the factory default name Conductivity for this Input St
143. ect two probes One 1 Modbus cable One foot in length 1 Part Number 10094693 One 1 Modbus cable Four feet in length 4 Part Number 10094694 One 1 Modbus cable Ten feet in length 10 Part Number 10094695 One 1 Modbus cable Twenty five feet in length 25 Part Number 10096235 One 1 Modbus cable Fifty feet in length 50 Part Number 10096236 One 1 Modbus cable One hundred feet in length 100 Part Number 10096237 One 1 Modbus cable One hundred fifty feet in length 150 Part Number 10096238 e Conductivity Probe Assembly w PVC T Manifold both ends female 1 NPT Modbus Conductivity Probe Assembly Part Number 10094641 e pH Probe Assembly w PVC T Manifold both ends female 1 NPT Modbus pH Probe Assembly Part Number 10094642 e ORP Probe Assembly w PVC T Manifold both ends female 1 NPT Modbus ORP Probe Assembly Part Number 10094643 e Relay Expansion Box REB Adds 4 Relays and 4 Digital Inputs One Relay Expansion Box w Pigtail Cord Connections Part Number 10094628 One Relay Expansion Box for Conduit Connection Part Number 10094619 4 20 mA Input and Output Boards Boards are available with either 2 or 4 channels so the maximum total of 4 20 mA Inputs and Outputs combined is 12 e 4 20 mA Input Boards 4 Channel 4 20 mA Input Board Part 10094654 2 Channel 4 20 mA Input Board Part 10094655 4 Channel 4 20 mA Output Board Part 10094656 2 Channel 4 20
144. ection of another controller s menus are under the Output Control menu of the Triton controller where they make more sense But for the Input Sensors there are still important calibration and alarm settings under this Input Set up and Calibration menu as described in the following explanations Typical Inputs A Triton controller is usually equipped with a Cooling Tower Probe CTP that combines a sophisticated Conductivity and Temperature sensor and a reliable mechanical Flow Switch At any time when initially ordered or later in the field the user can add our digital pH sensors ORP sensors additional CTP probes or Relay Expansion Boxes and these devices will be automatically identified and added to the menus Every Triton comes with eight Digital Inputs which usage settings for Reed Switch or Hall Effect water meters Digital Counters Drum Level sensors or Flow Switches Up to three optional 4 20 mA boards may be installed with two or four 4 20 176 mA Inputs each to interpret any analog sensor Figure 8 2 shows the order in which the different types of Inputs are listed in a Triton controller The order is always the same but which Inputs are listed depends on the Inputs connected to the controller The Input listing order is Flow Switch Flow Switches on the digital network are always displayed first Conductivty CTP Conductivity sensor s are listed next in installation order Temperature CTP Temperature sensor s are s
145. ed with all the Outputs listed to the right The user can move the highlight to any Output like Relay 01 shown in Figure 3 29 and find all the settings to control it There are submenus for setting a custom name displaying the current status choosing the Relay Usage and the Auto Control menu 66 vyvvvYYYYYYY to4e Figure 3 29 Output Control for Relay 01 One of the first choices is to assign how this output will be used in the Relay Usage menu There are five relay usage assignments from which the user can select BleedValvUse Bleed Valve Usage To control a Bleed Valve Figure 3 30 Blowdown Use Blowdown Valve Usage To control a Boiler Blowdown Valve PumpRelayUse Chemical Pump Usage To control a Chemical Pump AlarmRlayUse Alarm Relay Usage To control an external Alarm indicator Not In Use Relay Not In Use To remove the relay from most menus 67 Output Control Relay 01 ieesd Valve 01 Relay 02 Relay Status Relay 03 Re BleedValvUse Relay 04 PumpRelayUse Relay 05 Manual Off AlarmRlayUse Relay 06 Manual On Not In Use Relay 07 Manual Limit Relay 09 ReturnToAuto 2 20mA Outil 2 20mA 0ut02 4 20mA OutO3 4 20mA Outod4 Figure 3 30 The Relay Usage menu When the user chooses the Relay Usage the Auto Control menu is automatically adjusted to match that Usage Figure 3 31 shows the Auto Control menu for Relay 01 controlling a Bleed Valve as an example Output Co
146. ed incorrectly then disconnect one of the devices search and when the first device is assigned an address connect the second device and it will be correctly assigned the next address Figure 15 23 shows an example of this process where the second CTP probe was left disconnected until the first CTP probe was seen to be assigned the CTP1 address and then the second probe was connected to the network and was assigned the CTP2 address The search will continue until the user presses the Enter key to indicate all new devices have been found A Menu Screen Figure 15 23 The SearchForNew window showing the network devices found Reset AllDev The second Plug n Play sub menu is Reset AllDev which will reset all the connected digital network devices to their default address and remove them from the controller s menu system To invoke this function the user would highlight the Reset AllDev menu item and press Enter Figure 15 24 shows the message indicating the removal reset is 295 complete This feature allows multiple devices to be removed from the system at once but probably won t be used in normal circumstances but can be helpful if an addressing issue Occurs A Menu Screen I HHOO Y W 0 P H N Figure 15 24 The Reset AllDev message that all network devices have been removed Reset Device This Reset menu works on a single digital network device and will reset just the dev
147. eeeaeeesseeeceaeeeaees 152 Select Meter Miss A aetna act naan A A tt DA 153 Measurement NOUS ON 153 TPL Vol Aaa nia AO cai 153 RR NRO 153 Us Mode No da sa 153 Water Meter Modes BleedOnMakUp es sssssssssseeessessesesescseeeeecseseseeesscscseeesesesceeasscuceeesacseeeeecueeasaeees 154 Mak Up Meter emerin O 154 Measurement ONO 155 AS NN Seas 155 BM 155 Mesias 155 Vol Lo Bleed iia A EEE A aiii 155 limit o NN 156 Use Mode No Wii o tad eng ono daa AE 156 Other Relay Control Mode Category OthrRlyModes ce eeeessssssessesseseessssesseesscseeceecscseeceessseseeeesaeseseeaees 157 CA Ac 157 GOO W tt Te secs cesecere cca tevececscedducendessevs sdedeuvaudscoses ca AEE Eees 157 ESA Di AA AAA are 157 A ANN 157 Other Relay Modes Feed WithSame u cesesssscssssssceesseseseeecsssesseesscscseeesssseseeecscscseseeasseseeeeesseeasseeeaeeeeees 157 Elis 157 UM Na 158 Other Relay Modes Peed With TM aia lia 158 A NN 158 Addl Delia Rosi SNA SESSIONS UNES Su nndaa al 158 E ds 158 UISEIMOCESNO We ita tt cadeen Whmocw seks Lids 159 Other Relay Modes FeedAfter is ci ta dao da uetetebenen 159 After Relais da 159 Addinl A es 159 Esc Iii A ada 159 Use ModesNo wis st A AA AA ree aR AAA RAAS 159 Other Relay Modes Fee dAfte 0 A A td adi 160 After Relais At A it 160 Addtnl Delay a as iaa a a 160 To Feed NN 160 Use Mode NO Werer e E EE ERR E EEE EA E e e a 160 Lockout MENU A ATO A SoU SOE E OE EI 161 Lockou ts Why add Whe
148. eeees 311 OVE VIEW A q AO 311 Modbus Sensor Maintenant esinaine erea aliado sado BRAN AN GUAO cardo RUSE AMANSRALEA na 311 Eleanor aaa dano apa tela 311 Troubleshooting Modbus Sensors sssssssssssssesssesssseecsescececescseseeesscscscecescsesesecasseseueeasseseeeeceeseeeesseeeeees 312 Software or Menu System Troubleshooting 0 0 cecssessssecesssssseceseseseseesssceeseeesseseeeecscseeeesseseeeessseeeeeesaees 313 Ready to Use vs User Mod ada 313 Activating a Control Mod tie eh eter seceess 314 Activating the Alarms uni nual aaa ANSU SUSU a A E A 314 Relay Usas conan E A u apio ehh 314 Digital Input Us a 314 Accessories and Replacement Parts 0 ccesssssssssscesssessesessscseseeecscseseeesscseseeecscsesceessscseseeasscseeeeesseeasaeees 315 Epclos rte Parts iodo iio islas 315 Modbus Devicesiand Cable bic 315 4 20 mA Input and Output Boards oe eeeseeesesseeeeeeseseceeescscseeeecseseeeesscscseeeeasscseeeesscseeeeesseeaees 316 Man Board Pus 317 USB Connectivity Kit pes 317 Contact Informatio di EREE OE e EDE AES NENE A E OSIE EER e 317 SIFA This page intentionally left blank oy ae 1 Theory of Operation Overview There is only one model of a Triton Cooling Tower controller equipped with 8 high capacity electro mechanical relays a sophisticated digital Conductivity and Temperature sensor and 8 fully configurable Digital Inputs Every Triton controller also comes with an Ethernet port and two front panel USB p
149. el if the counts are increasing too slowly or in other words if the rate that Sheep are being counted has decreased below the user defined value or has stopped Remember these alarms are being set on the rate at which Sheep are being counted not the rate at which the signals are being detected although they may be closely related The submenus for this Alarm setting have all the usual alarm options lighting the front panel lamp turning on Relays the Alarm Relay is turned on by default using Lockout on Outputs sending emails making phone calls and clearing the Alarm The range of settings is from 0 to 999 999 Counts Rate Unit Digital Input Usage GenrlPurpose Figure 8 41 is showing the fourth Digital Input Digital In 4 with the General Purpose GenrlPurpose Usage selected This is the appropriate Usage choice for any binary or two state Digital Input use such as a typical Drum Level sensor or any two state digital device Digtl Closed Digital Open The General Purpose Usage is an extremely simple Digital Input Usage The sensor will only have two states or conditions One state is considered closed and the factory 220 default name for this state is Digtl Closed The other possible state is considered open and the factory default name for that state is Digital Open Input Set up 4 Calibration Hs He j ma M r r i EK gt ys Y Figure 8 41 Highlight on Digital Input Usage for Digita
150. el users as determined by what password they enter can control the access of lower level users 258 including disabling Read Only access Only the Admin password gives the ability to assign passwords and control the User Level 1 access Both the Admin and User Level 1 passwords allow control over the User Level 2 access and the Read Only Access by default The User Level 2 password by default only gives change access to two top level menus Active Alarms Water Indexes and to the NoActTimeOut submenu in the Password Access menu Higher level users however can increase the User Level 2 access until it parallels that of User Level 1 All three passwords give change access by default to the menu for adjusting the No Activity Timeout Limit NoActTimeOut The No Activity Timeout Limit NATL is a time setting in minutes If there are no key presses on the front panel or no clicks over the Ethernet connection for the number of minutes defined the display will return to the Home Screen automatically and a password will be requested again to move away from that screen vvyvyY Figure 12 1 Highlight on PasswdAccess menu showing sub menus Let us examine the submenus for the Password and Access PasswdAccess control menu shown in Figure 12 1 and what level of access can use each menu A user logged in with the Admin Level password can use always all four of the submenus to change passwords adjust the
151. elay 02 Alarm Relay for Relay 08 and so forth The user can decide whether to keep those names or change them The Relay names may use up to 12 characters Name the Inputs Custom Input names that match the function of the Input will also make using the menus more enjoyable For example a custom name like Acid Level will make more sense and be easier to remember than Digital In 2 for a Drum Level sensor monitoring the acid supply level tput gt input Set tipl w Switcl vVVYVYYYVYYYYYYY Figure 4 3 The Input Set up and Calibration menu To set custom Input names go to the Input Set up menu item as shown in Figure 4 3 and then press the Right arrow to move to the list of Inputs As the highlight is moved onto a particular Input in the list the first submenu item for each Input is the custom name field Use the Right arrow of the Navigator to move across the current name to the Set New Name prompt and press the Enter key to type in a new custom name 88 Menu Screen Y Input Set up gt Flow Switch gt Flow Switch custom name gt Set New Name press Enter here lt v Conductivty Conductivty custom name gt Set New Name press Enter here lt v and so forth This won t be as necessary for the Inputs connected to the Triton digital network such as Flow Switch Conductivty and so forth the user can decide whether to keep those names or change them However custom names will
152. emember that even 1f User level 2 has no change access to any menus they can always read any of the menus in the system with sensitive information like passwords 264 hidden of course This is a feature of the Triton controller which allows a high level user to deny the normal Enter key only method of Read Only access and restrict all User Level 2 access control thus creating a User Level 2 that has Read Only access under password control L Figure 12 9 Highlight on PasswdAccess ReadOnlyCntl showing two sub menu items ReadOnlyCntl Read Only Access Control The third submenu in the PasswdAccess menu is the simple ReadOnlyCntl menu shown in Figure 12 9 which has only two items One is to allow the Enter key only method of obtaining Read Only access and the second item to turn off or deny that way of getting Read Only access Recall that when someone standing in front of a Triton controller presses any key that would move the display away from the Home Screen they are asked to enter a password By default they can press just the Enter key to be given Read Only access to the entire menu system with sensitive data hidden Figure 12 9 shows the default setting that allows this access with the active box around AllowROAcces Allow Read Only Access But an Admin Level or User Level 1 can turn off that feature in this menu by moving the highlight to the No RO Access item and pressing Enter Then No RO Access
153. ence Calibration Like doing two of the 1 Point Reference Calibrations it should be the most accurate method but only if done carefully NotForContrl And lastly the handy Not For Control option This would remove the Conductivity Input from all the Output Control menus preventing this Conductivity sensor from being used to control an output relay It would still be listed here in the Input Set up menu so it can be used to monitor the water quality have the user set alarms and have the sensor s measurements stored in the Data Log 202 Temperature CTP Temperature Sensor The Temperature sensor is always listed after any Flow Switch and Conductivity inputs A Triton controller will typically be equipped with a combination Conductivity Temperature probe we call the Cooling Tower Probe CTP Most Conductivity sensors need a temperature compensation to produce an accurate conductivity measurement so itis common to have these two sensors combined in a single probe Figure 8 28 Custom Name Showing the factory default name of Temperature Remember if a second CTP probe is installed to measure Make up conductivity or before and after temperatures for Energy Management the new inputs are named and listed after any existing sensors automatically The second temperature sensor would be named Temperature2 and listed right after the Temperature menu item A Yy Figure 8 28 Highlight on Input Set up for the Tempera
154. enenanennnnanes 85 OVELVIEW AAEE A E EEEN EEEE EEE 85 Installation and Initial Set Up issih hehe n 85 Chanse the default PasswWotdS ci io ie 86 Choos an Operation Mode doors 86 Name th Outputs iatea aee ee aeaee ae ae aae eee eee Eee aa EEE EESE 87 Name the IMPUS niinniin ib a AA EEE iain AAA AAA 88 Customize contro SeN S iii detec Atti ones Ate dni na teed aoe da ad Pat ones 89 S OPERATION MODES ivinda danae aoaie eaae dla 90 Over ACW csceveveverersvevsveoevevevevevevesenesenevesenenesesesessesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesssssesesesesesesesesesesecsseseseseceseceesseees 90 Ready to Use Operation Modesviidn dido ER aea e 90 Conductivity Controlled Bleed ie lar de 91 Outputs Available ts AS 91 Auto Control Modes Available s e R A E E AAE EENE 91 Default Settings aa ala auratus 91 Inputs A vail ables eee i weno 92 EEE 7 A D EEEE EEE O E N 92 Conductivity controlled Bleed Feed Inhibitor eeeeseseseeeeseseeeeesscseeeesssseseeecasseseseeesseseeeeeseeeeeees 92 Outputs Available a opel ts RSs ee E E E aga e 93 Auto Control Modes Available seee E A EE EA a EEE EES EEES ES 93 Default SCS E nail lee AEEA AEE AEE E A a a i 93 Inputs Available canes Seah A E E a e a 93 420m A QUE At a 94 Timer controlled Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor iseanan e e EE E E A E EE E a 94 Outputs Avallable aid as Ge aL eA et ee ee EAE 94 Auto Control Modes Available 3 i ccccc cccscusncelesececasenesscadeteceenseensedaues
155. ensor will have its High value Alarm and Low Alarm available 105 The pH sensor input will have its High value Alarm and Low Alarm available Any of these inputs will also cause a Sensor Error Alarm if they report values outside of their established measurement range 4 20mA Out The first of the optional 4 20 milliamp outputs will be set to follow the Conductivity sensor the second will be set to follow the ORP measurements and the third 4 20mA output will be set to track the pH sensor values The 4 20mA Outputs are usually used for outside charting monitoring or recording purposes The remaining 4 20mA output would not have any default setting and could be set to reflect the status of any of the available Inputs User Modes User defined Operation Modes The user can take full advantage of all the powerful programming options available with the Triton controller when they employ one of the User defined Operation Modes or User Modes vvvy Figure 5 12 Highlight on the User Modes menu To take advantage of a user defined operation mode move the highlight on the Menu Screen to the Operate Mode item then over and down to highlight the User Mode submenu item A list of four User Modes will be displayed to the right Figure 5 12 The four User Modes are empty placeholders for customized water treatment The 106 control methods and settings are not defined or set up from the factory the user must go throu
156. enter the value or cancel the calibration 191 Input Set up Conductivty Figure 8 15 Input Set up 1 Pt Field Cal Measurement Entry for Conductivity sensor Calibration can fail Due to the way input sensors interpret their electrical signals into the measurement values they report they cannot be calibrated if the error is too large Each type of sensor has a different allowable error but if the difference between the new value and the sensor measurement is too large the calibration will fail and the Input measurement will revert to its old value Failure may indicate that the sensor is dirty and needs to be cleaned that the sensor is malfunctioning worn out and needs to be replaced or that the controller itself is malfunctioning 1Pt Ref Cal 1 Point Reference Calibration The Reference Calibration method Figure 8 16 differs from the Field Calibration in several ways but perhaps the most important is that the probe is expected to be removed from the system and used to measure the external Reference which means water treatment control must be suspended for the length of the calibration to prevent false alarms and unexpected relay activations Similar to the field calibration process when the user highlights the 1Pt Ref Cal menu item and presses Enter to begin the calibration the controller will display a few interactive dialog windows to remind the user of some critical aspects of performing a Reference Cali
157. eparated by commas comma delimited Subsequent lines contain the numerical data for each time interval for each respective item also separated by commas This is the format most third party database programs will expect Water Indexes and Wet Test Data The Triton controller can display three popular water indexes Langelier Saturation Index LSI Ryznar Stability Index RSD Cycles of Concentration LSI and RSI Indexes These water indexes are popular indicators of the system water s condition Be careful with the LSI and RSI Indexes however These indexes require manual wet test data e s on the system s water and the data has to be entered regularly into the controller for the Indexes to be properly calculated Figure 3 36 Water Indexes menu highlight on the LSI RSI Calc sub menu As the water condition changes over time the Index will no longer accurately reflect the water s quality Therefore the LSI and RSI displays will change to show Expired two weeks after the required test data is entered The controller also displays the date of the last wet test data entry right below the index values to help the user judge how useful the indexes are Figure 3 37 LSI RSI Index data entry menu for Conductivity Bey oe For each of the five parameters needed to calculate an LSI and RSI Index there is a menu for the user to enter the parameter value Where possible the controller will display its sensor meas
158. er usually a chlorine or bromine product This measurement is acommon method of monitoring the effective level of oxidizing biocide in the system s water Figure 8 30 y Figure 8 30 Highlight on Input Set up for the ORP sensor Custom Name Showing the factory default name of ORP Sensor Any 12 character name can be assigned by the user Status An ORP sensor has four possible status codes Normal When the sensor is reporting values within its normal range High Alarm If the pH measurement goes above a user defined value Low Alarm If the pH measurement goes below a user defined value Sensor Error If the sensor reports values out of range or the controller recognizes that the sensor has failed Measurement The live display of the sensor s measurement value An ORP sensor can report values from 1400 to 1400 millivolts mV 206 AlarmSettngs An ORP sensor has three possible alarm conditions with submenus for setting the Alarm Actions and Alarm Delay for each of them High Alarm If the ORP measurement goes above a user defined value Low Alarm If the ORP measurement goes below a user defined value Sensor Error If the sensor reports values out of range or the controller recognizes the sensor has failed Calibration The submenus under this item explained in detail earlier in this chapter are where the sensor s measurements can be adjusted for greater accuracy or calibrated Unlike most sensors only
159. er calibrating Temperature first For this reason it is often best to calibrate the Temperature sensor first or at least check its accuracy before any other calibrations On the other hand if the user knows the Input they are calibrating does not use the temperature measurement or that the temperature sensor is measuring accurately they can move forward with confidence Notice the dialog allows three choices to Continue by simply pressing Enter to Go to the Temperature sensor Calibration menu immediately or to Cancel this Calibration Input Set up Conductivty Figure 8 13 1Pt FieldCal Reminder about the No Activity Timeout Limit Remember No Activity Timeout The second interactive dialog window is a reminder that the Triton controller has a No Activity Timeout Limit NATL that will log out the user and return the controller s display to the Home Screen after a certain amount of time has passed with no keys being pressed on the front panel Figure 8 13 As part of its display the submenu shows the current setting for the NATL the factory default is ten 10 minutes Notice that one of the responses available is to go immediately to the NATL menu where the user can adjust the time limit as necessary Will Flow stop Probe be removed Usually when a Field Calibration is performed the probe does not have to be removed so the water flow through the probe manifold is not affected and the controller can continue wit
160. ero in this mode the user must highlight the Use This Day menu item and press Enter to indicate the day is in use The active box will be drawn around the day to show it has been selected but the user must also select the Use Mode Now item at the bottom of the list of days to active the 28 Day Timer control mode Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed The next two control modes in the Timer Start with Set Point Stop category Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed are not independent control modes These two additional or optional control modes add their features to any of the three previous Timer Start with Set Point Stop modes The user must be using one of the previous T amp StPt Modes for these modes to have any effect In this description Relay 02 is used as an example of the Pump Relay usage which has these add on modes available The Bleed Valve usage does not offer these modes The Add PreBleed mode allows the user to bleed water from the system before the normally programmed Timer activation they have set up in one of the previous four modes This mode can bleed for a preset amount of time or have a Conductivity Set Point control when the bleed should stop 147 The Add Pre Feed mode allows the user to have another Relay activate before the normally programmed Timer activation they have set up in one of the previous Timer Start amp Stop Modes This mode can only pre feed for a preset amount of time These two ad
161. esesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesececeseseseseseceeeseees 41 Th Home ROO ERRONEO 42 Th Alarm RRE 42 TEME a 42 The Help key ds 42 The Back Cancel key iia id 42 Thenu mber ti 43 The NA i 43 Direct Relay Acc iii di A AE alee alae 43 The Home SCIreen cccscsrsrsrsrsrsrseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseves 44 Entering a PAasSwOrd s cscesscsccsssscsescsesssscessoassscesssonssnsonenssscesesonesscesesosscasesodesssosesssssasesonssssesesonedscosesssssasesosenscesessssenssdbas 45 The Menu Scree0 cscscsrsrsrsrsrerseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseres 46 Navi gating the Menus esesesesescssosososesessescosososososesesesesesoocosososososeseseseseseososososososesesesesesessosososososesesesesesesososesesesesese 47 The Interface Elm iii identidades Intesa 47 Navisatinethe Menus siii illo id 48 Inputting Values and Text cccccsssscssscssssscessssessssscsessssessssessssessessssessssessssessssessessssessssessssessesecsesessessssessesseres 50 Ready to Use and User defined Operation Modes ssssscsssscssssssscssssessssessscessssecsesscsessssersssersesecsesesseres 62 Ready to Use Modest A 62 Conductivity controlled Bleed ee meeen a ee e nE eee EEE EE A EE e EE AE AE EEEE AE aR 63 Conductivity controlled Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor
162. et up Conductivty Figure 8 20 Input Set up Calibration 1Pt Ref Cal Reference Value Entry When the user has indicated the calibration should continue in all three dialogs the 195 actual 1 Point Reference Calibration will begin and they can enter the value for the reference sample they will be measuring Figure 8 20 The reference sample is a laboratory prepared liquid sample that the probe is placed into so the sensor s measurement can be compared with the known characteristics of the reference sample The samples are made to a specific value so the user knows what the measurement should be The user should consult the label or paperwork of the reference sample and determine what the reference value for that particular sample is and enter that value in the Input Tray Figure 8 21 shows an example where the user has entered 8 000 uS cm as the Reference Value and is about to press Enter to store that value Input Set up Conductivty Figure 8 21 1Pt Ref Cal about to store 8 000 uS cm as the Reference Value When the user presses the Enter key to store their Reference Value entry the controller will display a reminder dialog telling them to clean and rinse the probe then use it to measure the Reference Sample Measure Reference Now that the probe has been cleaned and rinsed it is time to use the sensor being calibrated to measure the reference Usually the reference sample is a small container of fluid tha
163. ext Inputting Values and Text For some features the user will need to enter a numerical value or text not just select an 50 item from a menu The Triton controller makes this very easy as demonstrated in the examples below This example will explain how to use the custom name menu item and how to change a Set Point Specifically it will demonstrate 1 How to give Relay 02 a custom name to show it is controlling an Inhibitor pump 2 How to edit the Conductivity Set Point for the Bleed valve Relay to 1500 uS cm 1 Give Relay 02 a Custom Name First the highlight would have to be moved to the OutputContrl menu as in Figure 3 13 This is where all of the output control decisions are made and displayed what the Relays are being used for what control mode is in use and what settings are being used for that control mode The first submenu for OutputContrl is visible in Figure 3 7 In this hypothetical example where Relay 02 is controlling an Inhibitor pump the user would need to move the highlight into the Relay 02 control menu to make the name change as explained below VVVYVYYVYYYYYY Figure 3 7 The Output Control Menu Pressing the Right arrow once and the Down arrow once on the Navigator keypad would move the highlight to the Relay 02 menu item as seen in Figure 3 8 The menu arrowheads show the user where the Navigator keys will move the highlight Six To enter a custom name for Relay 02
164. f time has passed with no keys being pressed on the front panel Figure 8 18 As part of its display it shows the current setting for the NATL which from the factory is set to ten 10 minutes Notice that one of the three responses available is to go immediately to the NATL menu where the user can adjust the time limit as necessary Input Set up Conductivty Figure 8 18 1Pt Ref Cal Reminder about the No Activity Timeout Limit Water Treatment Control will be Suspended An important reminder that water treatment control will be suspended for the duration of this calibration Figure 8 19 Since the probe normally has to be removed from the system so it can measure the external reference the water flow also has to be reduced or stopped Therefore normal water treatment control must be halted while the calibration is in progress Otherwise false alarms and unexpected relay activations could occur which might be dangerous 194 Input Set up Conductivty Figure 8 19 1Pt Ref Cal Reminder about Suspension of Control When control is suspended the front panel Alarm lamp will turn on but constant not flashing as a warning that water treatment has been suspended The lamp will turn off as soon as the calibration is completed to show when control has been re established The two choices in this dialog are to agree that control must be suspended and to continue or to Cancel this Calibration Input S
165. f selected this option will prevent the Input from appearing in any of the Output Control menus It is meant to allow an Input to be used to monitor the water quality for the user to be able set alarms for the Input s measurements and have its measurement stored in the Data Log but not allow the Input to be used for control of an Output Hence the name NotForContrl Yy Figure 8 25 Active Box around NotForContrl for Temperature sensor The user may select this option by highlighting the NotForContrl menu item for a particular Input and pressing the Enter key The active box would be drawn around the NotForContrl item to show they have made that selection and the Input would be removed from all the Output Control menus Figure 8 25 Remember this only hides the Input within the Output Control menus The Input is still listed in the Input Set up menu and its measurements are available for monitoring the water quality setting Alarms and are stored in the Data Log for viewing and graphing on the front panel display or downloading onto a USB data stick or computer After the detailed explanations of all the Input Set up options above it s easy to forget this useful option which simplifies the Output Control menus and prevents an Input from being selected that a user does want used for output control 199 Input options and settings Now that the basic menu structure and control choices for the Inputs
166. for StaticIP Adr menu to allow up to 40 digit entry 283 Static Mask is the menu where the user enters the static mask address assigned by their network administrator The default address shown in Figure 15 6 is appropriate for the Wireless Ethernet communication option for the Triton controller as are all the defaults in the UseStaticAdr menus Figure 15 6 Highlight on the Static Mask menu showing default assignment Static Gate is where the user can enter the gateway address assigned by the network administrator for this controller The default address is shown in Figure 15 7 Figure 15 7 Highlight on the Static Mask menu showing default assignment 284 Browser Port is the menu for defining the browser port to be used with the controller for IP communication The default address is 80 shown in Figure 15 8 Figure 15 8 Highlight on the Static Mask menu showing default assignment UseStaticNow is the activator for using Static IP Addressing After adjusting the settings in the menus above it the last thing to do is highlight the UseStaticNow menu item and press Enter to select it The Active Box will drawn around that menu item and the parent UseStaticAdr menu item to indicate that communication method has been selected Figure 15 9 Figure 15 9 Highlight on the UseStaticNow showing Active Boxes when selected 285 Going back a couple of levels to the
167. for a more customized treatment plan There is much more detail about the Operation modes and what they offer in the chapter after this one The RtU modes are simplified operation modes that disable many of the options a user would normally have over the controller s settings but allow faster start up with less expertise required 86 Name the Outputs We recommend the user give custom names to the Relays controlling any Outputs so the name matches the function of the Output Go to the OutputContrl menu item on the main Menu screen and then press the Right arrow of the Navigator to move to the list of Relays As the highlight is moved toa particular Relay in the list the first submenu item for each Relay is the custom name input tray The custom name menu for Relay 02 is shown in Figure 4 2 as an example Press the Right arrow of the Navigator to move across any Relay s current custom name to the Set New Name prompt and press the Enter key to type in a new custom name 30 PY pa pp a Figure 4 2 The custom name menu for Relay 02 Menu Screen Y OutputContrl Relay 01 Bleed Valve custom name gt Set New Name press Enter here lt v Relay 02 Relay 02 custom name 87 Set New Name press Enter here lt y and so forth If one of the RtU modes was chosen as the Operation Mode some of the Relays may already have custom names such as Bleed Valve for Relay 01 InhibitrPump for R
168. ge The user may also want to assign custom names to the Inputs especially the more generic inputs A Drum Level sensor with a custom name like Acid Level will make more sense if an Alarm occurs than Digital In 2 for example The names shown in 69 Figure 3 32 are factory default names for some typical Inputs 2 All the inputs that provide measurements can be checked or calibrated against known values in their respective menus Sensors are often calibrated after the initial installation and then periodically to maintain and verify their accuracy Most of the sensor calibration menus offer one point and two point calibration options for greater accuracy and can be calibrated against reference solutions of a fixed value or against a field measurement of the system water 3 The Alarm settings for each Input are also found in their individual submenus Each Input has its own set of Alarms related to the kind of device it is and how and what it measures A typical Input sensor will have a High value alarm and a Low value alarm where you set the value or measurement that would cause the Alarm and a Sensor error alarm Later it is explained how the user also can control what happens if an Alarm occurs using the Alarm Actions menu There are factory default settings for every Alarm to activate the Alarm Relay for example but the user can change any of these settings The Alarm Actions submenus include choices to e Have the
169. gh 07 Bleed Valve Pump Relay Alarm Relay Not In Use b Pick a Control Mode Manual Set Point Timer Water Meter c Adjust settings 1 Custom relay name 11 Control details Set Point or Timer settings Alarm Settings and so forth d Activate the Control Mode highlight Use Mode Now and press Enter Configure the rest of the Relays Alarm Relays need no configuration e Customize a Change the Home Screen to display the site info and summary info you want to see b Set the data logging interval decide if you want the logs auto downloaded c Set email addresses IP addresses and text messages that you want sent on Alarm d Check the Triton website for any firmware menu system or help file updates http www hydro watertreatment com water treatment controllers triton controller html 40 3 Description of Controls Overview Every feature of the Triton Cooling Tower Water Treatment Controller can be easily accessed by using the 4 arrow key Navigator on the front panel of the controller Hydro Syatems Cooling Tower Mode CodctytSlead No Alarni Figure 3 1 A Triton Controller with the front panel visible The LCD seen on the left side of the front panel in Figure 3 1 is showing the Home screen an overall system status display The user can press the Down arrow or the Menu key to access the Menu Screen Once at the Menu Screen the user can select a menu item by moving a reversed color hig
170. gh and define all the control settings or copy an existing operation mode an RtU mode or a previously defined User Mode into the User Mode and modify it To select a User Mode highlight its menu item and press the Enter key The active box box will be drawn around the User Mode menu item to indicate that is now the operation mode in effect Any changes made to the controller s settings will now be stored with this operation mode Figure 5 13 The User Mode 1 menu showing its sub menu items The user can change the name of the User Mode using the usual Input Tray with the Set New Name submenu Another great User Mode feature is the CopyOthrMode submenu to copy an existing operation mode an RtU mode or another User Mode Figure 5 13 The CopyOthrMode feature is especially handy if the user wants to experiment with changes to an RtU or User Mode they had previously defined just copy it into an undefined User Mode and make the changes to the copy The next menu to visit to implement a customized water treatment plan is the Output Control menu OutputContrl Start with the first Output select a Usage go to its Auto Control menu pick a control mode and adjust the settings 107 6 Output Control Overview This Output Control section is broken into three parts presented in this order Relay Control Output Alarm Settings 4 20mA Output Control Relay Control OutputContrl To define how the Outputs in the
171. ghlights the Manual Off menu item and presses Enter or the Manual Limit setting is reached The Active Box will be removed from the Auto Control or Manual Off menu item and drawn around the Manual On menu item to indicate it has been selected If the user highlights the ReturnToAuto menu item and presses the Enter key control will return to whatever Auto Control mode was in use before the manual controls were selected and the relay will deactivate or stay active based on the settings of that Auto Control mode Manual Limit This item controls the maximum time for which the Relay will stay activated when under manual control By default this limit is set to 5 minutes but the range of allowable values is from 1 to 1440 minutes 1440 minutes 24 hours The user can use this setting as a just in case emergency time limit a backup setting to turn off the relay if they forget to turn it off manually or they can use it as a precise control value so when they select Manual On they are using the Manual Limit to control the activation time The Manual Limit value is preserved even if control is returned to an Auto Control mode Therefore the next time the Manual On menu item is selected the previous Manual Limit setting will still be in effect Figure 6 6 The Relay 01 Output Control menu with Manual On active 114 ReturnToAuto This item is used to return control to whatever Auto Control mode was in use before the manua
172. gnated as controlling a chemical pump and only have the With and After Other Relay control modes available pre set to activate after Relay 01 deactivates They willbe the only Auto Control modes shown for Relay 02 Relays 03 and 04 will also be designated as controlling a chemical pump and set to use the Timer Start amp Stop control modes The Timer Start and Stop category will be the only Auto Control modes shown for Relays 03 and 04 Relay 08 will be designated as an Alarm Relay intended to activate an external Alarm indicator like an exterior Bell or Strobe Default Settings Relay 01 Activates Bleed Valve Set Point On Off Input is Conductivity sensor Control Effect is Force Low with the Activation Limit Timer set to 90 minutes by default Relay 02 Activates Inhibitor Pump after Relay 01 deactivates with a O minute Delay and the Activation Limit Timer set to 90 minutes all of which may be adjusted by the user Relay 03 Activates Biocidel Pump using a Timer Which Timer and its settings can be adjusted as needed Pre Bleed and Pre Feed controls will also be available Relay 04 Activates Biocide2 Pump using a Timer Which Timer and its settings can be adjusted as needed Pre Bleed and Pre Feed controls will also be available Relay 08 will be pre set to activate as the Alarm relay for the various Alarm conditions possible in this Operational Mode Inputs Available Only the Conductivity sensor Input will be visible for con
173. gs The Clear All Logs menu item can be used by an Admin Level user to erase all the entries in the System Activity Log and the Data Logs This is not expected to be a commonly used function but does allow all the normally 263 stored data to be erased if necessary User 2 Acces Figure 12 8 shows the submenus for the User 2 Acces menu This menu allows an Admin or User Level 1 password user the ability to increase or restrict the menus in which the User Level 2 password user can make changes A Menu Figure 12 8 Highlight on PasswdAccess User 2 Acces showing the menu list Figure 12 8 shows by the active box drawn around only three menu names that by default User Level 2 is given very little change access to the menus that contain settings The Admin Level or User Level 1 can easily increase or further restrict the User Level 2 control access to any of these menus by moving the highlight to one of the menu names listed and pressing the Enter key to place or remove the active box from around the menu name Be careful when increasing or further restricting access control to User Level 2 and think about what tasks they will be asked to perform The User Level 2 was intended for personnel that should not need control access to most of the menus in order to perform their duties By default the only change access a User Level 2 has is to the Active Alarms Water Indexes and No Activity Timeout menus And r
174. guration they want to use with all their controllers and by uploading that to each new controller as a starting point they could save the installer a lot of set up time 300 The Triton controller always downloads QUUSRRResTreyrry ici x A A Elo E Mew Favorkes Jods Hep r the configuration files into a folder at ON O 4H an A the top level of the USB device The agies me 3502 UE cc E 3 Triton Logis 146123431 4 14 2001 1 24 PM O Triton _Corfigt 11612394321 Fie Foker 2114 2011 1 51 PM folder will be created if it does not exist The name of the folder will include the serial number of the particular controller the files were 2 obeexts Dbytes dm Correr downloaded from so you can download from multiple controllers without overwriting the configuration from one controller with that of another In the example shown the folder name is Triton Configl1161234321 There are several flies that are downloaded into the configuration folder as shown on the right The file that we call the Config File is actually the binary file with the name ZJoata_Lomibi 213010 biffe System Data bin HMBYBE BIN Fie 295 Triton_Help_Temelste ord 296 KB XML Do 2 16 2011 5 36 PM System_Data bin d The other two Triton Menu Template ani 146 KB XML cm 6 3 10 2011 2 13 PM binary files are the unformatted system S objets 270N8 y My Compre activity and data logs and the two XML files are the
175. gure 13 6 with an active box drawn around the current selection To change what device is shown on that row the user would simply navigate the list and press Enter when the highlight is on the device they want displayed that Home Screen status row 270 Figure 13 6 Highlight on Row 1 Device showing the device list and current selection Temp Scale is the menu that allows the user to choose whether the Fahrenheit F or Centigrade C scale will be used for Temperature displays This choice affects all the Triton controller s temperature displays not just the Home Screen Figure 13 7 Highlight on Temp Scale showing the sub menus and current selection As shown in Figure 13 7 when the Temp Scale menu is highlighted two submenus are displayed to the right one for displaying temperatures using the Fahrenheit scale F and the other for displaying temperatures using the Centigrade scale C The active box shows which scale is currently in use and the user can change which scale is used 271 by moving the highlight onto the desired scale and pressing the Enter key 3 Menu Scr Figure 13 8 Highlight on Date Adjust showing the date edit and format menus Date Adjust is the menu where the user can set or adjust the current date When the Date Adjust menu item is highlighted the two submenus are displayed to the right as shown in Figure 13 8 The first submenu is just a display of the curre
176. h Set Point Stop Modes Daily TiMer e ssseeseseeseseesrssesrsrsrssestssrsessrstesesresrsterereerrererrsrerese 142 OO 00 ssn ahaha A ad 143 Use TS ME Sd A A AA Ad AA A E 143 Timer Start w Set Point Stop Modes Weekly Timer ooooococnnnncnonocacancncoononononocnonnnonoononnnononnonnn no noonnnnracnonanon 143 A NN 145 Use Mis Dai ii Anas 145 Timer Start w Set Point Stop Modes 28 Day TlMeT oooococnnnnonononnnoncnnonncnnnoniononnnononnonnnnnannonnnnnnnnonanenacnonenes 146 OO 00 ul dc 146 Use This Dina taendatennia A 147 Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed ic cocccionisooiaonsnaotnondinonan Gutetavesnss tan dainde le landase dandnss lacadzondavedeunarecdevdugernuatabsineel 147 Timer Start with Set Point Stop Modes Add PreBleed ee eesessssessseeseseeseeeeeseseeeeesscseesesseeaees 148 Bleed Relays e dl dd 148 Timer da A AAA EEE A A A At 149 AA O NN 149 Endetvtiputausaaaaa iaa unan an alain Ras 149 NO 150 Timer Start with Set Point Stop Modes Add Pre Keed coooconcncicnnonnnncncnononncononnononononocnonononoononnnarannons 150 Feed Relay a ed edo e 150 Pre Feed UME a AA EE AA AA A ead pests 151 The detal aii ake be hn imei dado adan Caden data Van castes acne dando 151 Use Pre RN 151 Water Meter Control Modes WtrMtr Modes ccccccccscsssessesssssecesessssscesesseesessessesssesessseceseseseeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 152 Water Meter Modes WatrMtr amp cTime cececcscesessesesseseeseseceseeeseeeeseescscesesceaesceseeeeseeseseeae
177. h its normal control program 190 Input Set up Conductivty Figure 8 14 1Pt FieldCal Question about Suspension of Control However if the probe is going to be removed for cleaning inspection or whatever or if the water flow through the probe manifold is going to be reduced or stopped then water treatment control must be suspended during the calibration to prevent the lack of flow or unusual sensor measurements from causing false alarms and unexpected relay activations Figure 8 14 There are three choices offered to move forward allowing control to continue to suspend water treatment while doing the calibration or to Cancel this Calibration If the user chooses to suspend control for the duration of the calibration the front panel Alarm lamp willilluminate but with constant illumination not flashing This is just a helpful signal that the water treatment program has been suspended and the lamp will be extinguished as soon as the calibrationis completed or canceled to show when control has been re established When the user is finished with those confirmation windows the actual Field Calibration will begin Figure 8 15 The first dialog displays the current measurement value from the controller s Input sensor and the second an Input Tray where the user can enter the value from the external instrument Once the value has been entered the highlight moves to the choices to either calibrate to the entered value re
178. hange its control or alarm settings Just highlight and press Enter Clear Alarm A menu item that allows the user to clear this individual alarm condition without affecting other Alarms There is also a Clear All item in the preceding menu if the user wanted to clear all the active alarms at once Every occurrence of any Alarm condition is logged in the System Activity Log and can be viewed on the front panel display It may be easier to interpret the System Activity Log when it is downloaded either to a USB Data Stick and transferred to a computer or directly to a computer Each Input and Output also has their own Data Log wherein the status or measurement value is recorded periodically These informational records can be a great help in producing reports and diagnosing problems and provide a valuable record of the system s activities and performance 173 Clearing Alarms When an Alarm condition occurs the Input or Output associated with the Alarm is typically affected in some way Relays may be forced to activate or deactivate Input Alarms will affect any output that is using the Input sensor measurements for control Normal operation of the controller cannot resume until the problem causing the alarm is taken care of and the Alarm is cleared either auto cleared by the controller or by the user using an individual Clear Alarm menu item or the Clear All item in the Active Alarms menu If the value causing a High or
179. hat selecting one of the Ready to Use RtU operation modes may temporarily hide some of the Outputs Inputs and Auto Control modes from the menus 19 as appropriate for the RtU mode chosen Select one of the four User Modes to have every Output Input and Auto Control mode available This Reference Manual explains all the possible components and features that are available with a Triton water treatment controller so depending on a particular controller s configuration there may be a component or feature explained in this manual that is not available on that controller Triton Controller Special Features A Triton controller has special features not found on most other controllers designed to offer a simpler more flexible way to do water treatment Some of the most useful special features are e Full Configuration File or Data Download using any standard USB Data Stick e Open Expandable Architecture with Plug n Play Sensor or Relay Expansion e Digital network gives reliable measurements up to 1000 feet from the controller e Pre programmed Ready to Use Operation Modes for simplified set up and use e Large Daylight Readable Backlit Graphic Display e Easy to read and navigate Menu System using 4 way Navigator arrow keys e Direct Access Relay and Alarm keys display their control menus in one step e Context aware Help key gives immediate useful help for any highlighted item Control By Output We think the
180. have the relay activate as many as ten different times a day with different durations but every day willbe the same They can set the time of day for each individual activation and how long the relay should stay activated each time The first Daily Timer submenu has the ten time slots listed Time 01 Menu Time 02 Menu through the Time 10 Menu The user should go to those submenus described 130 below and change the settings before they start to use or activate this control mode Figure 6 16 The Daily Timer Control Mode When the On Duration value is changed from zero the time slot will automatically become active with the active box around it After setting the time slots they want to use the user would then highlight Use Mode Now at the bottom of the list and press Enter to activate the Daily Timer control mode The active box would be drawn around the Daily Timer menu prompt and the control mode category Timer Modes to indicate they are now in use Relay U1 uto Contr Timer Modes d4T im Percent Da Timer Me y Time Menu yv Timer Time 03 Menu Time 04 Menu iT 5 Me 1 Time 6 Menu ime 7 Men in Men Time Jj Menu Men Figure 6 17 The Time 01 Menu 131 The user can also add a Pre Bleed or Pre Feed operation to the Daily Cycle activations Remember that Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed menus are not shown in the Control menu of a Relay controlling a Bleed Valve More details about
181. he key at the bottom into the receptacle connector and turn the locking collar until you feel it secure the connection Make sure any unused receptacle device connection has its cover tightly secured to avoid corrosion and debris from damaging the connector Each additional device is available with a 1 4 or 10 foot plug to plug harness Longer cables are available separately Plug in a new device using installation procedure below This can utilize the unused connector on an existing probe and allow for an open receptacle with water resistant cover on the new probe Installing Multiple Modbus Devices Currently there are four families of Modbus digital devices 1 Conductivity Probes 2 pH Probes 3 ORP Probes 4 Relay Expansion Boxes Oe ae The controller automatically searches for any new devices when it powers up and there is also an item in the NetwrkConfig menu that lets you search manually for new devices SearchForNew If you have only one device from each family connected to the controller just power up the controller and they will automatically be found during the automatic search and put in the proper menus ready for you to use If you are going to install more than one device in any of the families leave the second one or second and third and so forth un connected during the initial power up and password entry After you have checked that the first group of Modbus devices
182. he hardware like the serial number and build date The View Version menu displays information about the software versions and template files in the controller The Configuration File menu Config File allows the user to download and upload a configuration file that holds all the settings made on the controller This is like doing a backup of all the settings and they can also be transferred to another controller The Help System menu allows the user to download or upload a copy of the Help text which is used by the context sensitive Help system The System Update menu allows the user to update the firmware of the controller either from a USB flash drive or over the Internet vvyvyyY Figure 16 1 Highlight on the SysInfo amp Updt menu showing the five sub menus 298 View System Information a Menu Screen ice Type Number SerialNumber Manufactured Figure 16 2 Highlight on the View SysInfo menu showing its sub menus The View SysInfo menu is a display only menu that shows information about the controller hardware like the overall type of controller it is the more specific model number and unique serial number of the controller and when it was manufactured View Versions A Menu Screen ActiveAlarms utputstat JutputCont InputMeasure input Set up Viewin q pata Version Runtime Vers MenuTemplate HelpTemplate Menulanguage Figure 16 3 Highlight on the View Versio
183. he controller would not be able to distinguish it from the CTP 1 that was already installed To resolve this problem you would use the RemoveDevice function on the CTP 1 address while both probes are still attached to the network Then disconnect the new sensor from the network and use the SearchForNew to find the original CTP 1 then attach the new sensor and let the search properly indentify the new sensor as CTP2 This is another reason it is important to use the RemoveDevice function before permanently disconnecting a Modbus sensor from the network which will reset that sensor s address to the blank default value and allow it to be properly added to another system Software or Menu System Troubleshooting Ready to Use vs User Mode From the factory a Triton controller is set to the User Mode 1 which allows the user to employ every relay and every possible auto control mode Any of the four User Modes allow the user full control with no restrictions If however one of the Ready to Use modes is selected various restrictions are enforced relays disappear auto control modes disappear only certain control modes can used with certain relays and the Relay Usage settings are locked So if a user finds relays and or control modes missing the most likely reason is that a Ready to Use operation mode has been selected Check under the Operate Mode menu and see which mode has the Active Box dr
184. he first row of the Home Screen This text is normally used to identify the controller or its installation site To edit the top row text the user would move the highlight across the Tow Row Edit menu to the submenu on the right named EnterToEdit and press the Enter key Figure 13 4 The Home Screen Top Row Text editing dialog 269 That will display a special entry dialog where the user can enter the new text using the keypad on the front panel See Figure 13 4 The keypad works like the keys on a cell phone using multiple key presses to enter the letters associated with each numeral and a Shift key on the lower left for capitalization There are detailed keypad instructions in the Inputting Values and Text section of Chapter 3 When the desired text has been entered the user would press the Enter key to accept the new text The user can use the Back Cancel key to cancel the entire entry process a Menu Screer L vvvyvyyY Figure 13 5 Highlight on HomeScrnEdit 6 Row Status showing the row sub menus 6 Row Status is the menu where the user can choose which six Inputs or Outputs will have their current measurement value or status displayed on the Home Screen When the 6 Row Status menu is highlighted six submenus are displayed to the right one for each of the status rows as shown in Figure 13 5 When an individual row menu is highlighted a submenu will list all the devices in use to the right as shown in Fi
185. he last successful calibration was performed NotForContrl Not For Control The last menu item for a 4 20 mA Input is the handy Not For Control option Figure 8 56 Selecting this menu item would remove the Digital Input from all the Output Control menus preventing the Digital Input from being used to control an output relay It would still be listed here in the Input Set up menu so it can be used to monitor the water quality have the user set alarms and have the input s measurements stored in the Data Log Figure 8 56 Highlight on NotForContrl for 4 20mA In 01 232 9 Viewing Data Overview The concept of data history the recording of a water treatment controller s measurements and performance is becoming more and more important every year Having detailed records of sensor measurements and controller actions can be invaluable in keeping old customers winning new customers and can provide information about whether a problem was caused by an action or inaction of the water treatment controller USB Data Stick vs Ethernet connection If the user is at the site where the controller is installed the simplest way to download the data history is to insert a USB Data Stick or Thumb Drive into the larger of the two front panel USB ports the Type A USB port That will automatically bring up the password dialog and once authorized automatically download the System Activity Log and the Data Logs to the USB dri
186. he user can choose from 0 to 1440 minutes 24 hours for 139 this feed duration The default value for Pre FeedTime is zero minutes Use Pre Feed This is the activator for this add on mode The user must highlight this menu item and press Enter to activate the Add Pre Feed feature That s all there is to explain about the Timer Start amp Stop Modes The next category of control modes is the Timer Start with Set Point Stop control modes T amp StPt Modes Cones yiegSetPnt Modes nual ieee Select Input Manua mit WtrMt Mode Off Setli Le Figure 6 26 The Timer Start with Set Point Stop Control Mode Category Timer Start with Set Point Stop Control Modes T amp StPt Modes The first three Timer Start with Set Point Stop control modes are very similar to the Daily Timer Weekly Timer and 28 Day Timer modes explained above These new modes as the category name implies differ in what deactivates the relay They start at a time of day setting but instead of deactivating after a timed duration these modes use an Input measurement Set Point to control when the relay deactivates And just like the previous Timer Modes category the T amp StPt Modes category has the same two additional modes Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed with identical purposes and settings Select Input This is where the user selects the Input whose measurement value will be used to deactivate this relay This selection used for whatever tim
187. he user has given Relay 01 through Relay 08 Entering a Password When the user presses any key on the panel that moves the display away from the Home screen they will see the Password request Figure 3 3 asking them to enter a password Figure 3 3 The Password Screen There are four levels of access Administrator User Level 1 User Level 2 and Read Only The first three levels require the user to enter the appropriate password and press the Enter key to continue If a user presses the Enter key only they can navigate the menus in a read only mode although this can be disabled by the Administrator When the controller is first installed the factory password for the Administrator access is admin and for the User Levels they are user1 and user2 One of the first things the Administrator for the system should do after installation is change these passwords keeping track of the new ones in a secure location 45 The examples in this manual will assume that the Administrator password was entered so all changes are allowed To manually log out and reset the need to enter a password return the controller display to the Home screen pressing the Home key is an easy way and allow one minute to pass This will also happen automatically if there is no keypad activity for a pre set amount of time There is more detail about passwords access control and the No Activity Timeout Limit in a later section of this chapter c
188. he user is ready Digital Input Usage WatrMtr Hall This is the Digital Input Usage designed to be used with a Hall Effect Water Meter also called a paddlewheel water meter Figure 8 37 These water meters provide a more continuous measurement than the Reed Switch style and can provide flow rate measurements and alarms as well as volume Figure 8 37 shows the Usage selection for WatrtMtrHall while 8 38 shows the Settings Menu for Digital Input 2 designated as being a Hall Effect Water Meter Notice there are several more submenu items under the Settings Menu than there were for a Reed Switch Water Meter 214 Sensor RP Sensor Digital In 1 Digital In 24pigital In 2 Digital In 3 Input itus Digital In 4 WatrMtr Reed Digital In 5 SettingsMenu MWatrMtr Hall Digital In 6 NotForContrl DigtlCounter tartal in Y GenrlPurpose Digital In 8 Flow Switch 4 20mA In 01 4 2 In 02 4 A U gt 4 hu H HHHH D 4 ty 4 Figure 8 38 Highlight on Settings Menu for WatrMtr Hall Digital Input Usage K Factor Pulses per Unit Volume Here the user must define the number of pulses the meter will transmit for each unit of volume This setting is the opposite of what the user sets for a Reed Switch water meter Again this setting value is just a number the Volume Unit gal ltr m3 or ml unit was set in the previous menu The number the user enters here is how many pulses the meter is going to
189. hey want the Bleed to drain and then highlight the UseTimerCntl menu item press the Enter key to select this deactivation method After activating TimerControl the user would also have to activate Add PreBleed by selecting the Use PreBleed activator seen in Figure 6 34 The user may have to experiment and try several Bleed times to determine what time is best to use for this setting at a particular installation SetPtControl The Conductivity Set Point Control menu is for using a conductivity measurement to determine when the Pre Bleed should stop Use its submenu items to set up the Pre Bleed control then highlight the UseSetPtCntl menu item and press the Enter key to activate this feature A pre bleed that is being controlled by a Conductivity Set point is different from the Timer Control method in that the Pre Bleed starts at the time defined for the primary feed since there is no way to know how long the Set Point controlled bleed will last The pre bleed will run until the user defined Conductivity value is reached then the primary feed will begin The three submenu items for the Set Point Control method are CndctvtInput Conductivity Input is the menu where the user can choose which Input is measuring the system water s conductivity By default it is set to the first Input listed 149 which is usually the conductivity sensor named Conductivty at the factory PreBld SetPt Pre Bleed Set Point is where the user would enter
190. hich relay is the other relay The default selection will be the relay with the lowest identifier number that is not the 157 relay being controlled Use Mode Now This is the activator for the FeedWithSame control mode After selecting the other relay the user would highlight this menu item and press Enter to start using this mode Other Relay Modes Feed WithTime Feed With Other Relay Timed In this mode the relay being controlled can activate at the same time as the other relay or after a user defined delay Then it stays activated for a user defined time duration There are four submenus for this control mode Select Relay In this submenu the user selects which relay is the other relay The default selection will be the relay with the lowest identifier number that is not the relay being controlled s 4FeeadwithSams MIA Select Rela FeedAf T vv E t edDurati ion Figure 6 42 The Feed With Other Relay Timed Control Mode Addtnl Delay Additional Delay This submenu allows the user to specify an amount of time that will delay the activation of this relay beyond the activation of the other relay The range is O to 1440 minutes with the default at zero minutes FeedDuration Feed Duration Here the user simply sets the amount of time this relay should stay activated The range is O to 1440 minutes 1440 minutes 24 hours with zero as the default 158 Use Mod
191. hlight over the menu item and pressing the Enter key 41 To enter a value or change a name the user must move past the menu item to an Edit Value or Set New Name prompt press the Enter key then enter the new value or name directly using the front panel keypad As the various menus are displayed the user can simply press the Down arrow to move down the menu and the Up arrow to move up If a highlighted menu item has options they will automatically appear on the right and the user can press the Right arrow to move to that submenu A more detailed explanation of these operations is in the section called Navigating the Menus Another key feature designed to make the controller easy to use are the dedicated Direct Access front panel keys The Home key Pressing this key will bring the user to the top level display shown in Figure 3 1 from anywhere The Home screen display is customizable too so the user can change which six items are displayed the name of the installation and how they want the date and time to be displayed More details are provided in the section devoted to Home Screen Edit later in this manual The Alarm key Pressing this key will take the user directly to the Active Alarms display for instant access The Alarm light toward the top of the front panel is pre programmed to light up when there is an Alarm and then with one press of the Alarm key next to the light the user can find out what s wrong
192. hown after Conductivity sensor s pH Sensor Any pH sensors are listed next after the Temperature sensor s ORP Sensor These biocide sensors are always listed next after pH if present Digital In XX Every Triton has eight fully configurable Digital Inputs 4 20mA In XX The optional 4 20 mA Inputs are always the last Inputs listed Yy Figure 8 2 Highlight on Input Set up for the Flow Switch The user can plug in as many Modbus network Inputs as they need up to 32 and the new Inputs will automatically appear in the menus right after any existing sensor of the same type Plug in a second Conductivity sensor and it appears in the menus already named Conductivty2 right below the original Conductivty menu item ready to use The following text will explain the Input Set up submenus and their functions for the various Inputs The very simplified submenus for a Flow Switch Input are shown in Figure 8 2 There is a submenu for giving it a custom name a status display a live 177 display of its measurement value a menu of Alarm settings But a Flow Switch does not have a Calibration menu typical Alarm Settings or the Not For Control option so a better example for explaining the Input Set up and Calibration submenus is the Conductivity sensor Conductivty shown in Figure 8 3 Yy Figure 8 3 Highlight on Input Set up for the Conductivity sensor Custom Name The first submenu is for giving the Input any 12 ch
193. ically become active with the active box around it After setting the days they want to use the user must then highlight Use Mode Now way down at the bottom of the list and press Enter to activate the 28 Day Timer control mode The active box would be drawn around the 28 Day Timer menu prompt and the control mode category Timer Modes to indicate they are now in use The user can also add a Pre Bleed or Pre Feed operation to the 28 Day Cycle activations Remember that Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed menus are not shown in the timer control menus of a Relay controlling a Bleed Valve More details about the Pre Bleed and Pre Feed options are in their own explanation sections below Each of the days Sunday 1 through Saturday 4 has the same two submenu items pictured in Figure 6 21 to control the relay 00 00 This menu item shows the time of day in 24 hour format that the relay activation would start For all time of day menus in a Triton controller 00 00 begin of Day 12 00 Noon 23 59 end of Day Select the Edit Value submenu item to change the start time elay APENAS ui O red gt Monday 1 1 in lI jay das in la Y aay y Figure 6 21 The 28 Day Timer Sunday 1 Menu 135 On Duration This is where the user sets the duration of the activation how long the relay will be activated for that particular day The user can enter from 0 to 1440 minutes 24 hours Remember that sett
194. ice selected to its default address and remove it from the controller s menu system Network Configuration dCommsSettings Plug n Play ASearchForNew Reset AllDey Reset Devi co crei CTP2 PH 1 ORP1 Figure 15 25 Highlight in Reset Device showing the list of network devices Figure 15 25 shows the highlight on the Reset Device menu with an example list of 296 devices displayed two Cooling Tower Probes CTP1 and CTP2 a pH probe PH 1 and an ORP probe ORP1 To reset and remove a device from the network and menus the user would move the highlight onto the device they wish to reset as shown in Figure 15 26 and press the Enter key The same message as shown in Figure 15 24 would appear to indicate the device has been successfully removed Figure 15 26 Highlight on CTP2 network device about to be reset and removed It is highly recommended that before a network device is disconnected from a Triton controller that it first be reset and removed using this Reset Device menu Doing so will not only remove the device from the controller menus and prevent errors when the device cannot be found it also allows the device to be properly found by the network search if it is ever connected to a controller again 297 16 System Information amp Update Overview The System Information and Update menu has five submenus The View System Information ViewSysInfo menu displays information about t
195. iewing Data View Sys Log menu View Sys Log View System Activity Log The first submenu under View Sys Log is a 234 date and then a menu item used to display the data for that date The current date is the default date entry The user first selects the date they want to see the data for then they highlight the View Log Now item and press Enter to see the data for that date Figure 9 3 Highlight in the View Sys Log sub menu showing Date Time entry style If there is more than one event for a particular date they are listed by the time of day as shown in Figure 9 3 Remember that the Triton controller uses a 24 hour clock for these time displays where 00 00 00 is the beginning of the day 12 00 00 is the middle of the day and 23 59 59 is the end of the day To view a particular activity the user can move the highlight to one of the times listed and the submenus for that event will appear Figure 9 3 The Triton controller has nine categories of system activity and the submenus differ slightly from one type to another ActivityType The first submenu of every entry is always the Activity Type display item that identifies the category of system activity for that entry There are several different Activity Type categories for recording the System Activity of the controller And the menu items below the Activity Type change depending on the activity The example shown in Figure 9 3 has the Setting Edit Activity Type w
196. ilSetting sub menu The default port assignment 25 is appropriate for the cellular modem available from Hydro Systems but should also work for most Ethernet networks Check with the IT specialistresponsible for the installation site to make sure Figure 15 16 shows the Input Tray sub menu with the default value Figure 15 16 Highlight on SMTP Port showing the default port assignment 290 Sender Email is the fifth EmailSetting sub menu shown in Figure 15 17 The Input Tray is initially empty and usually has to be filled in with a valid Internet email address as specified by the Internet service provider Figure 15 17 Highlight on Sender Email showing the empty Input Tray For example with the cellular modem system from Hydro Systems the address looks like hydrosystemsNNNN mmillie com NNNN is part of the modem identification code There is the usual Edit Value menu item to the right of the Input Tray that brings up the special 40 character input dialog for editing the address Authenticate is the last EmailSetting sub menu with sub menu for a User Name Password and an activator shown in Figure 15 18 If the email server associated with the controller requires authentication the user name and password assigned by the Internet provider must be entered in their menus and the Use Auth activator must be selected to activate email authentication The User Name and Password menus have the typical Input
197. ilable pre set to activate after Relay 01 deactivates They willbe the only Auto Control modes shown for Relay 02 Relay 03 will also be designated as controlling a chemical pump but set to use the Timer Start amp Stop control modes They willbe the only Auto Control modes shown for Relay 03 Relay 08 will be designated as an Alarm Relay intended to activate an external Alarm indicator like an exterior Bell or Strobe Default Settings Relay 01 Activates Bleed Valve Set Point On Off Input is Conductivity sensor Control Effect is Force Low with the Activation Limit Timer set to 90 minutes by default Relay 02 Activates Inhibitor Pump after Relay 01 deactivates with a O minute Delay with an Activation Limit Timer set to 90 minutes all of which may be adjusted by the user Relay 03 Activates Biocide Pump using a Timer Which Timer and its settings can be changed as needed Pre Bleed and Pre Feed controls will also be available Relay 08 will be pre set to activate as the Alarm relay for the various Alarm conditions possible in this Operation Mode Inputs Available Only the Conductivity sensor Input will be available for control pre set to control the Bleed Valve relay The Alarms described below have a default one minute Alarm delay except the Flow Switch that by default has no delay set The Flow Switch will cause an Alarm condition if flow becomes insufficient 101 The Conductivity sensor will have its High Alarm
198. ing the duration to anything but zero selects that day but the user must also select the Use Mode Now item at the end of the list to start the 28 Day Timer control mode To deselect a particular day just set the On Duration back to zero minutes Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed The next two control modes in the Timer Only category Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed are not independent control modes These two additional or optional control modes add their features to any of the four previous Timer Start amp Stop Modes The user must be using one of the previous Timer Modes for these modes to have any effect In this description Relay 02 is used as an example of the Pump Relay usage which has these add on modes available The Bleed Valve usage does not offer these modes The Add PreBleed mode allows the user to bleed water from the system before the normally programmed Timer activation they have set up in one of the previous four modes This mode can bleed for a preset amount of time or have a Conductivity Set Point control when the bleed should stop vvy Figure 6 22 Relay 02 Auto Control Menu showing the Add PreBleed menus The Add Pre Feed mode allows the user to have another Relay activate before the 136 normally programmed Timer activation they have set up in one of the previous Timer Start amp Stop Modes This mode can only pre feed for a preset amount of time These two additional modes ca
199. inst the changes in the Interpreted Measurement display Interpreted Interpreted Measurement In this menu the user defines the value and the unit text As shown in Figure 8 48 the 6 4 mA raw measurement has been interpreted by the user settings to indicate 15 0 Grm Inpu t up 4 ilibratio n 4 N witcl Ot f y p perat p Sens er Y igi 1 n Digital In 2 igi n Lg 31 n 4 Lgl 2 n gi E In 4 Digital In mA gital n S 4 20mA n 2258 j OMA ror rm 0 nsett Jser t gt m In Calibrat T 4 1 gt v v Figure 8 48 Highlight on the Interpreted Measurement menu for 4 20mA In 01 227 The user controls this Interpreted Measurement both the value and the unit display by using the submenus shown to the right of the Interpreted menu item 15 0 Grm The first submenu item displaying 15 0 Grm in Figure 8 48 is the live calculated value for the Interpreted Measurement It is not editable no input tray but its value and units come from the settings made in the menus that follow User Units This is where the user defines the 3 character units for the Interpreted Measurement Figure 8 49 The factory default unit is mA so in the example the user must have used the Set New Name menu to change the User Units to Grm Figure 8 49 Highlight on the Interpreted Measurement sub menu User Units Input Set up 4 20mA In Figure 8 50 Highlight on the Interpreted Measurement sub menu 4 mA Value 228
200. ion file that was uploaded will be in use The Help System The Triton controller has a unique context sensitive Help System that provides comprehensive help text on any menu item simply by pressing the Help key This 306 feature is explained in Chapter 14 of this Reference Manual The Help System menu under the SysInfo amp Updt menu as shown in Figure 16 7 has a different purpose A M m wm o K M m la nu ActiveAlarms OutputStatus OutpurContri inputMeasure Input Set up Viewing Data WateriIndexes Operate Mode PasswdAccess HomeSernEdtt NetwrkConfig SysinfosUpdtdVview View DownloadHelp SystemUpdate Upload Help Figure 16 7 Highlight on the Help Systems menu item showing the two sub menus Using the two Help System submenus the user can download the entire Help text file to a USB Drive inserted into the port on the front panel of the controller or upload a copy of the Help text file The user would simply move the highlight onto the appropriate submenu item and press Enter A completion message will be displayed once the Help file is done being downloaded or uploaded as shown in Figure 16 8 a Menu Screen ActiveAlarms Outputstatus OutpurCo InputMea Input se Viewing Figure 16 8 Help System menu Download completion message 307 The Help file is downloaded as a text file with entries linked to the menu items with the associated Help text The user could edit that text file
201. ir own clear plastic T manifold and the Installation Guide Any additional options such as our digital network pH and ORP sensors or accessories would be included as ordered The comprehensive Triton Reference Manual you are reading is only available online at http www hydro watertreatment com water treatment controllers triton controller html Prepare to Mount the Enclosure The Triton controller enclosure has four mounting holes which are eight inches 8 apart horizontally and twelve and seven eighths inches 12 7 8 apart vertically For your convenience the top holes are keyhole shaped so you can hang the enclosure from a single attachment point then level the enclosure and mark the remaining attachment locations Please use all four attachment points to secure the controller We recommend the controller be mounted with the LCD at eye level or higher on a vibration free surface near a grounded 120V AC power supply 230V AC where applicable within 1000 feet of the sample loop where the sensors will be installed and close to the chemical delivery system and an Ethernet hub if utilized The following clearances are required for safe operation Top 2 inches Left Side 4 inches Right Side 4 inches Bottom 8 inches Do not install the controller near sources of electrical noise such as high voltage transformers variable speed motors radio transmitters and so forth Environmental 29
202. is downloaded as a text file with entries linked to the menu items with the associated Help text The user could edit that text file as they see fit customizing help instructions for their installation adding contact phone numbers perhaps even include a translation to another language Then the modified Help file could be uploaded to the same controller or brought to and uploaded to other Triton controllers 280 15 Network Configuration Overview The Network Configuration menu has two different sections shown in Figure 15 1 The Communications Settings menu CommSettings is for setting up the IP and Ethernet connections to the controller while the Plug n Play menu is for managing the Modbus digital network devices either probes or relay expansion boxes A Figure 15 1 Highlight on the NetwrkConfig menu showing the two sections CommSettings The Communications Settings menu has four submenus as shown in figure 15 2 LAN IP Setup is where all the settings are that relate to an IP Network connection The first definition is whether the user will connect the controller using a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or using a static IP address USB IP Setup menu holds the settings for communicating to a computer using the USB Mini B port on the front panel of the controller These settings should not have to be modified by the user EmailSetting is where the email addresses can be entered by the user
203. is older than two weeks 253 pH The third submenu is where the user must enter a pH value for the LSI and RSI index calculations Like the previous parameters there is a ValueForCalc Input Tray where the user enters the pH value and a Sensor Value display item that will show the measurement from the first pH sensor if installed for reference The ValueForCalc Input Tray will display Expired until a value is entered and revert to the expired indicator when the value is more than two weeks old CaCO3Hardnes This submenu is where the user must enter a Calcium Carbonate Hardness value from a wet test they have performed on the system water This parameter entry menu has only the ValueForCalc Input Tray where the user enters the CaCo3Hardnes value The Input Tray will display Expired until a value is entered and revertto the expired indicator when the value is older than two weeks TotlAlkaline This submenu is where the user must enter a Total Alkalinity value as C CO from a wet test they have performed on the system water This parameter entry menu has only the ValueForCalc Input Tray where the user enters the TotlAlkaline value The Input Tray will display Expired until a value is entered and revertto the expired indicator when the value is more than two weeks old LSI Index This is the submenu that display the calculated LSI Index value All the parameters must have values entered and be less than two weeks ol
204. ission of measurements from your Conductivity Temperature pH and ORP sensors even 1000 feet from the controller This robust packetized redundant checksum protected network communications is completely immune the electro magnetic interference that plagues analog probe communications in an industrial environment Pre programmed Operation Modes Every Triton controller has several simplified Ready to Use cooling tower water treatment programs pre programmed that may satisfy many user s water treatment needs For example a user can select the simple Conductivity controlled Bleed Operation Mode CndctvtBleed and the controller will be automatically configured to perform that task Relay 01 is designated to control a Bleed Valve using a Conductivity Set Point and so forth Many of the Alarm Settings are even pre configured but the user can adjust any of the settings to meet their particular needs Or a user can select one of the four user defined operation modes to control their Outputs using control modes that combine the measurements of Sensors Timers Water Meters and other Inputs with additional Pre Bleed Pre Feed and Lockout settings Large Daylight Readable Graphic Display Every Triton controller uses a large daylight readable LCD display almost 6 inches diagonally with an automatic backlight for dim conditions and adjustable contrast It displays 20 rows of 40 characters with a bold high contrast font Easy to Read and
205. ital Usage whether you have connected a Flow Switch Reed Switch water meter Hall Effect water meter Drum level sensor and so forth The Triton digital inputs can reliably detect pulses as rapid as 1000 Hz when being used with a Hall Effect Paddlewheel water meter 35 Powered Digital Input Hall Effect Paddlewheel Digital Input Wiring Examples 4 A 12VDC a i g Input Ground Open Collector Digital Input R 10k 47k Q for 12VDC 3 A f a q HE Unpowered Digital Input Reed Switch Drum Level R 47k 120k Q for 24VDC Attach pull up resistor R between power and input Output Connections Relay Outputs Every Triton controller comes with eight 8 high capacity electro mechanical relays and can have additional relays added by connecting Relay Expansion Boxes to the digital network As shown in the wiring guide to the right the relay connection blocks allow you to wire your output device using normally open or normally closed circuits Triton controllers with pre installed relay receptacles are wired normally open Also shown to the right the black slide switches above the relay connection block in the picture are the Wet Dry switches 36 Normally Closed ela Relay Wet Dry Switch Switch Switch Powered Un powered that control whether the relay provides power Wet or simply closes a set of unpowered contacts Dry
206. ith the appropriate menu items MenultemPath Before Value and After Value below it LoginAttempt Login Attempt A record of each appearance of the password screen and what happened on it Menus Access Level shows what Access level was granted after a proper password 235 was entered if one is entered The level is indicated by either Admin Level User Level 1 User Level 2 Read Only or No Access Pswrd Entry Password Entry stores the characters that were entered for this password entry attempt If user has Admin level access the actual characters are shown otherwise just asterisks are shown Pswrd Result Password Entry Result Good Passwrd or Bad Password Auto Logout An entry showing when the controller did its auto logout due to inactivity Menu MenultemPath Identifies what menu item was highlighted when the log out occurred A list of menu items is displayed showing the path to the menu item being identified Setting Edit Setting Change A record of any setting change made to any setting Change must be successful Menus MenultemPath Identifies the change location by showing the menu item whose value was altered A list of menu items showing the path to the menu item being identified Before Value Display of setting value before the change made After Value Display of setting value after the change was made Alarm User Alarm User Defined A record of anytime something e
207. iveAlarms menu explained in the Active Alarms chapter of this manual and use the Clear Alarm to restore normal operation The relay will not operate normally until the Alarm is cleared Don t set this time limit for too long allowing adverse conditions to exist for a long time but don t set it too short either to the point where it affects normal operation of the control method For example in this mode setting the Limit Timer to a time shorter than the Sample Time would be bad The default setting is 90 minutes Set Point Control Modes SetPnt Spike Set Point with Spike 123 This control mode Figure 6 12 is the same as the Set Point On Off mode with the additional feature of having a different Set Point used periodically The user can set up a 7 day or 28 Day spike schedule This is used to maintain one level of chemical addition normally like on weekdays or during the day with an automatic spike to a higher level of chemical addition periodically like nightly every weekend every other weekend and so forth v vvVVYYYYY Figure 6 12 The Set Point with Spike Control Mode The submenus Select Input Measurement NormalSetPnt ContrlEffect Dead Band and Limit Timer menus are identical to the corresponding menus in the Set Point On Off control mode Refer to the descriptions in that section above for explanations of those menus AddSpikeLock allows the user to increase the Lockout time during the
208. l In 4 set to GenrlPurpose The user can put custom labels or names on these states instead of the factory names Digtl Closed and Digital Open The user can also set either one of the two states to be the Alarm condition Therefore it is the user that decides which state is the good one and which is the bad state and then they can set the alarm conditions to match Inp t Set Ip amp alibration t w Sw i on ctivt emperature pH Sensor RP Sen r Figure 8 42 Highlight on Settings Menu for GenrlPurpose Digital Input Usage The factory default settings are to have the Closed state defined as Normal and 221 therefore the Open state is the DigitalAlarm condition Then there are the standard Alarm Settings menus for an Alarm Delay and the Alarm Actions The Settings Menu items are shown in Figure 8 42 Closed Name Closed State Name The user can choose any 12 character name for the Closed state of this Input Digtl Closed Use a name that makes the condition as clear as possible for example a name like DrumLevel OK will paint a better picture of what this state means than the factory default Digtl Closed ClosedStatus Closed State Status Here the user can choose whether the closed state for this Digital Input should be considered the Normal or DigitalAlarm status Normal is the default Closed Status There are the usual alarm menus below this item in the main menu for controlling
209. l controls were selected When the user highlights this menu item and presses the Enter key the Active Box will be removed from either the Manual Off or the Manual On menu item and drawn around the Auto Control menu item Whatever control mode was previously active for this relay will be re activated If there was not an Auto Control mode active before the manual controls were used the Active Box will simply be removed from the manual controls and the user will have to use the regular Use Mode Now menu item to activate an Auto Control mode Alarm Relay Usage Figure 6 7 shows that the Output Control menu for a relay with a usage designation of Alarm Relay The Auto Control menu has been removed and there are only two relay control menu items Relay Off and Relay On A very useful feature of the Triton controller is that any relay can used as an Alarm Relay and an Alarm Relay can be re assigned to control a Bleed Valve or be a Pump Relay The user is not forced to use a specific alarm relay or give up the versatility of using an alarm relay for some other purpose Even multiple relays may be designated with the Alarm Relay Usage if needed When a relay is designated as an Alarm Relay it is expected to be energizing an external Alarm indicator like an exterior Alarm Bell or Strobe Light The last of the high capacity relays Relay 08 is typically pre set at the factory as an Alarm Relay Figure 6 7 The Control
210. lay 01 when a High Alarm on the Conductivity sensor occurs or a Low Alarm on a pH sensor The user can have more than one of the Alarm Actions selected at a time so that multiple actions take place with the exception of the No Alarm Action NoAlarmActn menu item If the user highlights the NoAlarmActn item and presses Enter all the other items become de selected automatically the active box is removed from around them and only the NoAlarmActn item will be selected and have the active box around it The user can also individually select and deselect the various options with an automatic feature that if they deselect all the real action items on the menu the NoAlarmActn will be selected automatically and have the active box around it Similarly if the NoAlarmActn item is selected and the user highlights one of the other options and presses Enter the NoAlarmActn item is deselected automatically Clearing Alarms When an Alarm condition occurs on an Input any Relay being controlled by the Input is also affected in some way The Relay may be forced to activate or deactivate and Relays have their own Action Alarms settings that may cause other effects Normal operation of the controller cannot resume until the problem causing the alarm is taken care of and the Alarm is cleared either automatically or by the user in the Active Alarms menu The problem that caused the alarm should be resolved before the alarm condition is
211. ll be listed to the right of each category when the highlight is moved onto a category menu item SetPnt Modes These use an Input value Set Point to control the relay Timer Modes These activate and deactivate the relay using only a timer T amp StPt Modes The relay activates at a certain time but an Input value deactivates it WtrMtr Modes The relay activates using a volume measurement from a water meter OthrRlyModes These use another relay s activation deactivation to control this relay When do the control mode settings take effect The individual control modes found under the control mode categories described above each have a menu item that is the activator for that individual control mode Usually the activator is the last menu item in the control mode menus and is named something like Use Mode Now The settings in that control mode take effect the moment the activator menu item name is highlighted and the Enter key is pressed The Active Box is drawn around the activator menu item the name of the individual control mode the category name and the Auto Control item to indicate an auto control mode is now active If the user is changing a setting ina control mode that is already active the changes take effect as soon as they press Enter to complete the setting change The next sections look at the detailed settings in each individual control mode within their control mode categories 118
212. ll have to have the original window typically named Removable Disk E and the Triton Config window open at the same time The picture below shows them open and arranged so the user can drag the file from one to the other 303 gt Removable Disk E E loj xf File Edit View Favorites Tools Help CES y Es BS search MES Folders E la S x e z Address E E J a Go ARE Cp Triton_Logs 1161234321 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ar ES Triton_Configi 1161234321 gt ELIAS D J Search Folders y 4 i E Address a E Triton_Config1 1161234321 y Go Mame Size Type Date Modified Activity_Log bin 1KB BIN File 3 7 2011 4 40 PM 4 Data_Log bin 1 612 KB BIN File 3 8 2011 6 44 AM 4 System_Data bin 145KB BIN File 3 8 2011 9 43 AM is fie old xml 294KB XML Document 2 16 2011 4 56 PM E Triton_Menu_Template xrnl 145KB XML Document 3 3 2011 7 45 AM 4 My Computer B2 Holding down the Ctrl key usually one is at the left lower corner of your keyboard click on the System_Data bin file and drag a copy to the window of the USB drive while still holding down the Ctrl key You can tell you are making a copy buy the little sign next to the cursor arrow The picture below shows this Ctrl Drag in progress ARE File Edt View Favorites Tools Help Ar CE z j J Search Folders gt
213. logs files Admin Pswrd Admin Level Password This menu is where the Admin Level user can 260 change their password An example password is shown in clear in Figure 12 3 which is what an Admin Level user would see and there is the usual Edit Value submenu to the right so they can change their password A lower level user would see only a string of asterisks for the password Figure 12 3 Highlight on PasswdAccess Admin Menu Admin Pswrd showing password Figure 12 4 Highlight on PasswdAccess Admin Menu User 1 Pswrd showing password User 1 Pswrd This menu is where a user logged in with an Admin Level password can change the User Level 1 password An example password is shown in clear in Figure 12 4 which is what an Admin Level user would see and there is the usual Edit Value 261 submenu to the right so they can change the password A lower level user would see only a string of asterisks for the password D a Menu Admin Pswrd Acces User 1 Pswra yCnti MEET Wi ckedWitch gt Figure 12 5 Highlight on PasswdAccess Admin Menu User 2 Pswrd showing password User 2 Pswrd This menu is where a user logged in with the Admin Level password can change the User Level 2 password An example password is shown in clear in Figure 12 5 whichis what an Admin Level user would see and there is the usual Edit Value submenu to the right so they can change the password A l
214. lume with an Inhibitor feed activated by the Bleed deactivation 92 This operation mode like the previous one will activate the Bleed Valve when the Conductivity sensor value rises above the Set Point value but with the addition of an Inhibitor feed that is activated by the Bleed Valve deactivation Outputs Available Only Relay 01 pre named Bleed Valve Relay 02 pre named InhibitrPump and Relay 08 pre named Alarm Relay will be visible along with any optional 4 20mA Outputs if installed Auto Control Modes Available Relay 01 will be designated as controlling a Bleed Valve and the control mode willbe set to the Set Point On Off control mode using the Conductivity sensor for the Input That and the Set Point Time Proportional control mode will be the only control modes shown for Relay 01 Relay 02 will be designated as controlling a Chemical Pump but with only the Other Relay control modes available pre set to activate after Relay 01 deactivates They will be the only control modes shown for Relay 02 Relay 08 will be designated as an Alarm Relay intended to activate an external Alarm indicator like an exterior Bell or Strobe Default settings Relay 01 Activates Bleed Valve Set Point On Off Input is Conductivity sensor Control Effect is pre set to Force Low The Activation Limit Timer setting will be 90 minutes by default Relay 02 Activates Inhibitor Pump after Relay 01 deactivates with a 0 minute Del
215. ly Weekly or 28 Day 64 Conductivity controlled Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor with dual Biocide CB amp Feed 2Bio Identical to the previous RtU mode with the addition of a second Biocide feed also controlled by a Timer mode The Bleed valve is again controlled by a Conductivity sensor Set Point and the Inhibitor relay is activated by the Bleed valve deactivation Both Biocide relays are controlled by a Timer mode Time Percent Daily Weekly or 28 Day Conductivity Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor w ORP amp pH Control CB amp Fd ORP pH Similar to the previous mode but the Biocide is now an Oxidizing Biocide controlled by an ORP sensor Set Point or a Timer mode and the second Biocide has been traded for pH control using an acid pump controlled by a pH sensor measurement The Bleed valve is still controlled by a Conductivity sensor Set Point and the Inhibitor relay is still activated by the Bleed valve deactivation But now Relay 03 is expected to activate an Oxidizing Biocide pump controlled by an ORP sensor Set Point or a Timer and Relay 04 is preset to activate an Acid Pump under the control of a pH sensor Set Point In every Ready to Use mode the last high capacity relay installed in the controller Relay 08 pre named Alarm Relay is pre set to activate an external alarm indicator like a bell or strobe if an Alarm condition occurs More detailed explanations of these RtU modes are in the chapter Operation Modes
216. ly option of the Scheduler showing its sub menus In the Daily menu the user can define the time of day they would like the logs to be sent each day The standard 24 hour clock is used for this definition with 00 00 being the beginning of each day 12 00 being midday and 23 59 indicating the end of the day This pattern continues in the Weekly menu where the user can choose the day of the week Sunday Saturday as well as the time on that day when the logs will be sent to the user defined email address The last choice is the Monthly cycle which is selected by default indicated by the active box in Figure 9 15 In the Day Of Month submenu shown in Figure 9 16 the user defines what day of each month they want the logs sent limited to 1 28 to maintain consistency In the Time Of Day submenu they can define what time of that day the logs should be sent using the standard 24 hour clock The factory default settings are the first day of the month first thing in the morning Day 1 Time 00 00 To USB Drive These menus allow a user to download either or both of the log files to a USB drive that is plugged into the USB Type A port on the front panel of the controller Under the To USB Drive menu are two simple submenus shown in Figure 9 17 The first one can download the System Activity Log while the second submenu can download the By Time formatted Data Log 245 Viewing Data View Sys Log View DataLlog L
217. m Settings There are three alarm conditions for a Hall Effect Water Meter each with their own submenus High Alarm Hi RateAlarm and the LowRateAlarm High Alarm High Volume Alarm Exactly the same as the menu under the Reed Switch Settings Menu A typical Triton Alarm menu with a submenu is for setting the Volume at which the user want the Alarm to occur The range is 0 to 999 999 units of volume After the setting submenu are the usual Alarm submenus one for setting a optional Alarm Delay then an Alarm Actions menu for setting what the user wants to happen if a High Volume Alarm occurs and finally a submenu to clear a High Volume Alarm Hi RateAlarm High Flow Rate Alarm This Alarm menu is much like the High Volume Alarm menu witha submenu where the rate value at which an Alarm should occur can be defined with a range from 0 0 to 9999 9 volume units minute Then there are the usual submenus for the optional Alarm Delay and the Alarm Actions LowRate Alarm Low Flow Rate Alarm This menu is just like the High Flow Rate Alarm menu just described except the user is setting the low flow alarm value instead of the high flow alarm value Digital Input Usage DigtlCounter Figure 8 39 show the third digital input Digital In 3 designated as a Digital Counter in its Digital Input Usage menu The Digital Counter usage is a simple one each signal detected is added to a count value which the user can have interpreted in various wa
218. m the system before it had time to do its job One solution could be another Lockout This time the Lockout would be set in the Lockout Menu of the Biocide relay on the Bleed Valve with an Additional Delay of two hours The user is declaring The Bleed Valve Relay is in Lockout anytime this Biocide Relay is activated and for two hours after it deactivates Any activation that is prevented from occurring by a Lockout is simply postponed until the Lockout ends and any programmed additional delay expires Then the activation that was locked out will begin If more than one activation was postponed they will activate in the order they were postponed the first locked out activation starting first and so forth Even though the Lockout is easy to use there may be instances where the Other Relay control modes or the Timer Mode options for Pre Bleed and Pre Feed will serve the user s needs more effectively The Lockout menu is a list every Relay with the Bleed Valve or Pump Relay Usage except for the Relay whose Auto Control menu the Lockout menu is in To set a Lockout on one of the listed Relays the user simply highlights the Relay name and presses the Enter key The active box will be drawn around the name to indicate it has been selected At the end of the list of relays there is one more submenu Add LockTime Additional Lockout Time In this menu the user can set from 0 to 162 1440 minutes of additional lockout tim
219. mA Output Board Part 10094647 316 Main Board Fuses Two 2 16 ampere slow blow main fuses Schurter PN 0034 3129 and eight 8 6 3 ampere slow blow relay fuses Schurter PN 0034 3125 e Main Board Replacement Fuses Size 5x20mm One set of main board fuses 2 x 16A and 8 x 6 4A Part 10094690 USB Connectivity Kit e USB Connectivity Kit Controller to Computer Cable and USB Flash Drive One USB Type A to Mini B cable 1 one USB flash drive 1 Part 10094692 Contact Information For help with any questions or problems please contact Hydro Systems tell us you are calling about the Triton controller and ask for Customer Service Hydro Systems Co 3798 Round Bottom Road Cincinnati OH 45244 Phone 513 271 8800 Toll Free 800 543 7184 Fax 513 271 0160 5 http www hydrosystemsco com systems A DOVER company Hydro Systems 3798 Round Bottom Road Cincinnati OH 45244 Fax 513 271 0160 Phone 513 271 8800 Rev F09 13 10094621 317
220. me unit the weight will be displayed in lbs If the user selected either Itr or m3 as the volume unit the weight will be displayed in kg Last Reset The Date of Last Reset submenu item displays the date upon which a Reset was last performed on the Totalization value either manually using the Reset Total item just below or automatically using the daily reset feature called Auto Reset Reset Total The Reset Totalization submenu item is a manual method of resetting the Totalization value The user highlights the menu item and presses the Enter key to reset the volume Totalization value to zero Auto Reset The Automatic Totalization Reset submenu provides a way for the volume Totalization to be reset to zero every day automatically The submenu has a 24 hour clock the user can use to set at what time each day the Totalization is to be reset 00 00 begin of Day 12 00 Noon 23 59 end of Day Once the time is set highlight the UseAutoReset menu item and press the Enter key to activate this option The active box will be drawn around the menu item to show it 216 has been selected Flow Rate This is a live display of the calculated water flow rate past this water meter for reference The volume units will be the same as those chosen for the volume display and the time scale is permanently set to per minute An especially handy reference display if a High or Low Flow Rate Alarm occurs Alar
221. menu and help system files It is the System_Data bin file that stores all the configuration data for the controller Downloading the Config File System_Data bin To download the configuration file insert a standard USB flash drive or equivalent into the large USB Type A port on the front panel of the controller Log in and navigate to the last main menu the SysInfo amp Updt menu then to the Config File sub menu as shown in Figure 16 4 Then move the highlight to the right onto the Dwnld Config menu item and press Enter A dialog box will appear saying the download is in progress When the download is complete you can remove the USB device or continue to use the menus to download other files 301 Uploading the Config File Copying the System_Data bin file Uploading the configuration data is very simple but there is one trick the System Data bin file has to be copied out of the Triton Config folder to the top level of the USB drive that is going to be used for the upload This has to be done using a computer before you attempt the upload at the controller Removable Disk E 1 Insert the USB drive into the Ble Ed Mew Favores Tools Heb t Ter Search tokens i r computer and a window will open re F ie gt x9 ages w JE go showing its contents The window Dwa 3 Tran _Logs11 161234321 Fe Foker 4 14 2084 1 21 PM will probably be named Re
222. menu item SetPnt Modes category item and Auto Control menu item ntrol SetPnt ntl Directn ORE Du p pp y pp pp Y 1 3 Figure 3 18 The Set Point On Off Select Input sub menu To change the Set Point that activates the Bleed the user would first move the highlight 58 to the right onto the Select Input menu item as shown in Figure 3 18 The Conductivity sensor is shown as the selected Input for this Set Point control mode controlling the Bleed Valve You can tell because it has the active box around it The Go To Set up item at the bottom of the list is a shortcut to the Input Set up menu for the active item To change the Conductivity Set Point the user would use the Down arrow to move the highlight toward the Set Point menu item Figure 3 19 The Measurement Display The Measurement menu item shown in Figure 3 19 simply displays the current live measurement value from the selected Input for reference Figure 3 20 The Set Point menu and current value 59 When the highlight is moved down to the Set Point menu item the value that is currently in use is displayed to the right as shown in Figure 3 20 The dotted Input Tray is a reminder that this is an editable value and the user can expect to find an Edit Value submenu to the right In our example the Set Point is set to 1200 uS cm Moving the highlight to the right onto to the current value will e
223. menus in a Triton controller 00 00 begin of Day 12 00 Noon 23 59 end of Day Select the Edit Value submenu item to change the start time Daily Timer ME 00 00 gt Figure 6 28 The Timer amp Set Pont Daily Timer Time 01 Menu Use ThisTime Use This Time This is the activator for the particular time slot Since there is no duration in this mode the user needs to highlight the Use ThisTime menu item and press Enter to indicate this time slot is in use The active box willbe drawn around the time slot menu item to show it has been selected but don t forget to also select the Use Mode Now menu item at the bottom of the list of times to active the Daily Timer control mode Timer Start w Set Point Stop Modes Weekly Timer Weekly Cycle The Weekly Timer control mode only allows the user to activate the relay once a day on a weekly cycle Since the deactivation settings are made in the previous menus all the user defines here is what day of the week the relay activates on and the time of day the activation starts on each day that is being used 143 AA Ab EA A PD Figure 6 29 The Timer amp Set Point Weekly Timer Control Mode The user can also add a Pre Bleed or Pre Feed operation to the Weekly Cycle activations Remember that the Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed menus are not shown in the timer control menus of a relay controlling a Bleed Valve There are more details
224. movable E Trton_Corfigt 1161294321 Fhe Fokter 4 14 2001 1 51 PM Disk E A typical window is shown in the picture to the right 2 obeects D bytes J Mr Conger CHE 2 Double click the folder named yy yas ys mo Triton Config to open it A iO O P poses y at b OK window will open showing the Jaci y Log bin 57 KB 4 4 2041 1202 PM JUsta_Log bin 2 130KB BON hfe 4 4 2011 12 03 PM contents of that folder An example 2 System Data bin 48KE EN Fie 4 4 2031 12 06 PM of what the window should look like A ion Malo Fon ied KA Doc 2NEZOL Se pee R Triton Menu Template an t46KB XML Doc 3 10 2011 2 13 PM 1s shown to the right Sobres 20M F Mr Conpse The file to copy up to the top level of the USB drive is named System Data bin The cursor arrow pointing to it in the picture above There are many ways to copy the file and this procedure will document two easy methods Copy Method A Copy and Paste Al Single click the System_Data bin file so it is highlighted Then click on the Edit menu of the window move afie 01 458 PM HEID PA Doorsa 011 7 45 24 the cursor arrow to the Copy item and click the Copy command when itis highlighted That will make a copy of the file to the computer s clipboard The picture above shows the file highlighted along with the Copy command 302 A2 After clicking Copy find
225. n Reset menu shown in Figure 8 35 provides a way for the volume and weight Totalization to be reset to zero every day automatically The submenu has a 24 hour clock the user can use to set at what time each day the Totalization is to be reset 00 00 begin of Day 12 00 Noon 23 59 end of Day Once the time is set the user would highlight the UseAutoReset menu item and press the Enter key to activate this option The Active Box will be drawn around the menu item to show it has been selected Now that the Totalization and Reset Total amp Reset submenus have been examined this explanation will go to the last Settings Menu item the Alarm Settings Alarm Settings This is a typical Triton Alarm Settings menu as shown in Figure 8 36 The submenus allow the user to control what happens for the only alarm condition a 213 Reed Switch Water Meter has a High Volume Alarm The High Alarm menu offers the usual submenus for an alarm one for defining the Volume that should cause an alarm one for setting an optional Alarm Delay then an Alarm Actions menu for setting what should happen if a High Volume Alarm occurs Figure 8 36 Highlight on Digital In 1 Settings Menu Alarm Settings The UseTheAlarms menu item is the activator for all the Alarm Settings This gives the user an easy one step method to enable or disable the Alarms for an Input and prevents factory default settings from causing alarms until t
226. n menu showing its sub menus The View Version menu displays information about the software and menu templates 299 being used by the controller This menu could be used to determine if these files are the latest ones available from Hydro Systems To check for any software updates to the Triton Controller use your web browser and visit http www hydro watertreatment com water treatment controllers triton controller html The Configuration File t Menu Figure 16 4 Highlight on the Config File menu showing both sub menus The Configuration file holds every setting made to the controller every custom name control setting alarm value password changes made to Ready To Use operation modes and all the User Modes Downloading the Config File to a USB Flash Drive inserted into the larger USB Type A port on the front panel of the controller allows the user to make a backup of all the settings made to the controller This Config File could then be uploaded to the same controller or some other controller and after a power cycle the controller would become exactly like the controller at the time the Config File was downloaded Warning When the UploadConfig feature is used the controller will automatically restart after the upload is completed which may mean that timer mode pumps will turn on and other configured actions will occur One use for this powerful feature is that a company could develop a base confi
227. n of how soon the next Bleed activation will be comparing this live measurement to the Trigger Volume TriggerVolum Trigger Volume This menu is where the user defines what volume of Make up water should cause the relay to activate in gallons The user can specify from 1 to 999 999 gallons Bleed Meter This menu displays the currently selected Bleed water meter and has a submenu where the user can select which water meter is monitoring the Bleed water by highlighting the Input name in a list and pressing the Enter key There is also a handy Go To Set up shortcut will take the user directly to the Input Set up menu of the Input selected Just highlight and press Enter Measurement Another input value display this time a live display of the Bleed Water Meter volume measurement This accumulation value is reset to zero each time this control mode activates the Bleed Valve NOTE This can be a very useful measurement but it is easy to misunderstand The displayed value is reset to zero at the beginning of each Bleed activated by this mode The value should then increase until it matches the Volume to Bleed setting and then stop as the Bleed Valve is deactivated But this display of the Bleed Meter measurement is live and if the Bleed Valve is activated by some other process the measurement may increase well beyond the Volume to Bleed setting This can be a useful indication that other Bleeds are occurring if this measurement
228. n wasted wate A tt 161 Ad GEO CK TIME tl ata eL AA a aC 162 Output Alarms vesccsssccscscssussesensossasedcasssscensoosssseseasvsoassseesne seasesensnesesupenenssesenssssasesonsusoesenenscaseseasnosesesensdasesensussasssenanseees 163 AlarmSettngs 11 8 AA A AE a 163 Rly REAC HON A EA E a 164 TAPIA EONS rnin a a ee e E A 164 RlayRe acto arica e hei nE ere Ee o eE E E Eaa e R SOA EEn E E EEE eE ES 165 Force Of riirii r A A ERE RR TE 165 Foree Activen niina e E E R EEE E R e E rG 165 ALA CONS A IAEA OORE aE 165 NOAA A fi 165 A aia bail 165 A NN 165 Alarmas 165 O A EE E E E A AE EE A EE es ee a dd dl 165 What happens when an Alarm occus iii inaa E e a E E E E EEs 165 4 20 mA Analog General Purpose Outputs esesesesesesescososososesesesesesessosososososeseseseseseseocosososososesesesesessosossesesesese 166 Custom NM eah arh eorr le ween 167 A EPAI EIA E EAEEREN ATAA AATE EES 167 ADO Control a 168 Sel ect E dt 168 A O ON 169 ZOMA Val idad 169 Current Loop Calibration or 4 20 mA Loop CalibratiON coocooncicnnnnnnnnononnnnnoninnonnnononnonanononnononanncoccncnonos 170 Manual AMA a a R n T T ES 170 Mama 20MA a A a a e aE 170 Mamail 20m A A a a aE 170 Return LO AMO ii A EEEE EE R E iia aia 171 7 ACTIVE ALARMS cinco 172 QV OD VIOW A NN 172 ARC HH VEAL PINS a o dde ei 172 MUS A EEEE EAE EEE EEA 173 Go TOSE Uproar ea E E E EEE E REENE AEE AE EE A R a eas 173 Cle a Alaris A E ONE O E E T i Ss 173 Clearing Alai ti A R E
229. ne after another The theory is that by calibrating the sensor at two points within its range of measurements a more accurate correction can be calculated yielding a more accurate calibration Figure 8 23 Remember when doing any Reference Calibration the probe is expected to be removed from the system and used to measure the external References which means water treatment control will be suspended for the length of the calibration to prevent false alarms and unexpected relay activations Input Set up Conductivty Figure 8 24 2Pt Ref Cal with 8 000 uS cm entered for 1st Reference Value The user will see the same three reminder dialogs as were shown for the 1 Point Reference Calibration earlier and then be asked to input the first Reference value just like they would in the 1 Point Reference Calibration Figure 8 24 shows the user has entered 8 000 uS cm as the first Reference value The calibration process and dialogs are exactly the same as the 1 Point Reference Calibration except that there are two sets of them one for the first 1st Reference and another for the second 2nd Reference Refer to the 1 Point Reference Calibration explanation just before this section for detailed descriptions of the displays and responses expected when going through this reference style calibration process 198 Input NotForContrl One final control option for any Input is the menu item NotForContrl Not For Control I
230. ng the Alarms Similar to the automatic control modes for the relays the inputs or sensors have alarms that need to be activated by the user before they have any effect Every input listed under the Input Set up menu has its own AlarmSettngs menu that has a UseTheAlarms menu item After adjusting the values for the alarms the user must highlight the UseTheAlarms item and press Enter to activate the alarms Relay Usage By selecting a usage from the Relay Usage menu the user can let any relay control a Bleed Valve or a Chemical Pump or be an Alarm Relay From the factory Relay 01 is pre assigned the Bleed ValvUse Relays 02 to 07 are pre assigned the PumpRelayUse and Relay 08 is pre assigned the AlarmRlayUse But the user can change the Relay Usage as they desire So for example if they don t need an Alarm Relay they can change the Relay Usage for Relay 08 to PumpRelayUse and control another chemical pump Or multiple relays can be assigned the Bleed VlavUse to control multiple towers Digital Input Usage Similar to the usage feature for relays the eight Digital Inputs 814 also have a DigtlInUsage menu where the user can indicate how a particular digital input will be used Each choice changes the settings available to be appropriate to the digital input usage selected There are choices for a Hall Effect or Paddlewheel Water Meter a Reed Switch Water Meter a Digital Counter a simple two state
231. nnot be used together only one can be used at a time and always have to be used with one of the four previous Timer activation modes Timer Start amp Stop Modes Add PreBleed The Add PreBleed mode allows the user to bleed water from the system before the normally programmed Timer activation they have set up in one of the previous four Timer Start amp Stop Modes They can bleed for a pre set amount of time by using the TimerControl menu or have a Conductivity Set Point control when the bleed should stop by using the SetPtControl menu Bleed Relay This submenu is where the user would choose which relay should be activated in order to bleed the system before the normal Timer cycle activation The user can choose any relay other than one they are controlling with the Timer activation mode but typically Relay 01 is assigned to control the Bleed Valve Figure 6 23 The Pre Bleed TimerControl Menu TimerControl The Timer Control menu is for setting a pre bleed for a fixed amount of time The user would use the PreBleedTime Pre Bleed Time submenu to set how long they want the Bleed to drain and then highlight the UseTimerCntl menu item press the Enter key to activate this feature After activating TimerControl the user would also 137 have to activate Add PreBleed by selecting the Use PreBleed activator seen in Figure 6 23 The user may have to experiment and try several Bleed times to determine what time is be
232. nt Spike ccc essssscssssssecssseesecessseeesecssscseseeecscseeeesseseseeesasaceeeesasseseeeeeees 123 AddSpike LOCK vicio Pd fai eon ban Di ei 124 Spike Cl AA a Dti 124 Weekly Spike Aida adas 125 28 Day Spike ti A E E EET ET 125 NA NN 125 Spike Perdi a oo 125 Spike SEP catas 125 Set Point Control Modes S tPdtCyllEumii A i a 126 SIS COMPU A tdo don 126 MKUpPEadInputitvcrtanaians aclaradas ains 126 Cycles Vallerntia Rana bano aia eRe RRR Ree kali 127 Cycle SetP boca 127 Contrl Effect renaatta a EA ee do dd leo 127 GycleDeadBand s s cis itis ahi iu hitbaliet ben bears iether nares bition nee atid ne eines 127 Demat Mer ese ise ae Se RUA RU RE BAL Se RUS ARAL Sie mane Seat 127 Timer Start d Stop Control Mode Sirnes nenene dada lada 127 LUMP ELEN EN A E NN NN 128 Daly Timer italiano 128 WEE A A dc A 128 28 Day Timers sits ELTETE E AAA EE E EE EE EE AET ET 129 Add PreBleed Ain ea e aa a a aude Ea e e Alnus he endl cae and 129 Add RresPee discos seis E Aea aaaea ale oido Boa EEn aeea al 129 Timer Start amp Stop Modes Time Percent ss sesresesresesresesseseereseeresrerestesesrorestorestereseosereoseneoeeseesenesersess seee 129 Time Ciclo a 130 PEC ii A AAA AAA AAA AA AA AAA GD 130 Timer Start amp Stop Modes Daily Timer ce eeessseeseeessesseeeseseseseeecscseseeecscsceeeesssseseseessacseeeesaeeeeeseeeees 130 O0200 Saha sheen aii NN 132 On Durations eoi sess cae cases aa 132 Timer Start amp Stop Modes Weekly Timer 0
233. nt date setting with the usual Edit Value to the right for changing the date The other menu allows the user to choose the display format for all dates Figure 13 9 Highlight on Date Format showing the format choices and current selection The Date Format submenu gives the user a choice of two Date display formats The 272 first choice is a display style that puts the day value first and uses an alphabetic month abbreviation DD Mmm YYYY and the second choice is an all numerical style with the month value first MM DD YYYY Like the other formatting choices in these menus the user s choice affects all of the controller s date displays not just the date display on the Home Screen When the user highlights the Date Format submenu item the two choices are displayed to the right shown in Figure 13 9 with the current format indicated by the active box To change the date format the user can simply move the highlight onto the desired submenu item and press the Enter key The active box will be drawn around the submenu item and all date displays will immediately change to the selected format 28 Day Cycle is a Home Screen Edit menu that allows the user to set the date when the first cycle week begins and synchronizes any control modes using a 28 Day Cycle There is also a submenu item to remove the display of the cycle week from the Home Screen shown in Figure 13 10 in case the user is not using any 28 Day cycle cont
234. nteceuaducetelernsstenstaencelesanstderegndaceenseens 94 De fail SEt oS iii NA 95 Inputs Availables s cscciuicih adc hiatal cone est a e 95 AD OMA Out ais sate A te bok buchen A ete ee A 95 Make up Volume Controlled Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor eee sesssssessesesseecsesesseecsssceeeeessseeeeecseseseseeesseeeeees 96 Outputs Avallableritna ns bad audi anand ada 96 Auto Control Modes Available 2 0 ecccccccccecetesececucenescsnsetesecasncesestensnseceaducesevecnentenesaencetesanntstecgesapeteseens 96 D fault SiO iii iO Di 96 pits A 96 A LOTTA Di A AA AA ahaa 97 Conductivity Bleed Inhibitor Feed by Time Cycle Do cooccconniciciconnnnnonnnnonannnononnonnnannnnononononnonnnncnononannnacnonanon 97 Outputs Available ses enables ean a a aaa Rea UR BEER Anas ies 97 Auto Control Modes Available mareei esner ea aaee rE EEEE EEEE EEEE ENEE OEE EEE E 97 Del A a ee a gd ds ad ea ai 98 Mputs Available td 98 4 20mA Odd A hia eh a a Rel RAL RSL A A AA s 98 Conductivity Bleed Inhibitor Feed by Water Volume e ssseessseesessesssesrssrsrssrsrssrerssrstesrsrssrsterreesrsresrsrerese 98 O tp ts Avalable en r Ee E aA Re aio eaae Taaa Enea a AAEE ENTS 99 Auto Control Modes Available cccccecescesessssesseseeseseeseseesesceceseesesccsesecseceseesesceaeseeaesaeseeeeseeaeeaeaeeeaeeeeeeees 99 Default Settings As a e eee ls aa ode 99 neS a CENENE EE EAE E A A A A A A A A A ATAT 100 4 20mA Out AE E O E E E EN 100 Conductivity Bleed amp Feed Inhibi
235. ntrol Relay 01 RLA NALNE Relay 02 Relay Status Relay 03 Rela E Relay 04 Relay 05 Manual Off Timer Modes Relay 06 Manual On T amp aStPt Modes Relay 07 Manual Limit WtrMtr Modes b Relay 08 ReturnToAuto OthrRlyModes 4 20mA OutOl Lockout Menub 4 20mA OutO0Z2 AlarmSettnas 4 20mA OutO3 4 20mA Outo4 Figure 3 31 The Auto Control Menu for Bleed Valve Relay Usage 68 Input Set up and Calibration These menus are dedicated to the controller s Inputs the sensors that keep the user and the controller informed of the condition of the water in the cooling tower system vvvYvVVYYYYYYYYY Figure 3 32 The Input Set up and Calibration menu These sensors include such devices as the Flow Switch the Conductivity Temperature probe pH and ORP probes the digital inputs for Water Meters Drum Level sensors and the optional 4 20 mA Inputs The user would move the highlight to the Input Set up and Calibration menu Input Set up for three types of Input settings 1 Initial set up like custom name and where needed Input Usage assignment 2 The Alarm value settings and Alarm Actions 3 Initial calibration if desired and periodic calibrations as needed 1 The Digital Inputs also have a Usage menu like the Outputs so the user can easily define how the Digital Input will be used as a Flow Switch Water Meter Drum Level sensor and so forth and adjusts the Settings Menu to be appropriate for that usa
236. nu gives the user an optional Alarm Delay setting for this alarm used to prevent transient momentary problems from triggering the Alarm condition The time entered here is how long the potential alarm condition must persist before the Alarm is actually initiated An Alarm Delay of one 1 minute is the factory default AlarmActions Alarm Actions This menu appears just below the Alarm Delay menu and has the usual listof Alarm Actions that the user can modify to control what happens if an Alarm occurs By default the Alarm lamp on the controller s front panel is set to turn on The only Relay that is set to turn on is the Alarm Relay No Lockouts are set on any Outputs The option to send emails is on by default but it won t do anything useful until email addresses have been entered by the user Figure 8 43 Highlight on Digital Input Usage for Digital In 4 set to Flow Switch Digital Input Usage Flow Switch Figure 8 43 shows the fourth Digital Input again but now with the Flow Switch Usage selected This is another binary or two state Digital Input use but specially designed for simple Flow Switches 223 jital It AlarmSettnas gt Figure 8 44 Highlight on Settings Menu for Flow Switch Digital Input Usage The Flow Switch Usage is the simplest Digital Input Usage This usage will only recognize two states or conditions of the simple Flow Switch connected to it The closed or high condition
237. nu lists the 28 days in four cycle weeks Sunday 1 through Saturday 1 then Sunday 2 through Saturday 2 and so forth To use one of the 28 days the user would go to a day s submenus set the start time and since there is no duration to change from zero in this mode the user needs to select the Use This Day menu item to indicate the day is active The day prompt would then get the active box drawn around it After setting the days they want to use the user must then highlight Use Mode Now way down at the bottom of the list of 28 days and press Enter to activate the 28 Day Timer control option The active box would be drawn around the 28 Day Timer menu prompt and the control mode category T amp StPt Modes to indicate they are now in use Each of the 28 days starting with Sunday 1 and going through Saturday 4 has the same two submenu items as shown in Figure 6 32 one to set the start time for that day and the other to activate the day 00 00 This submenu item shows the time of day in 24 hour format that the relay activation would start For all time of day menus in a Triton controller 00 00 begin of Day 12 00 Noon 23 59 end of Day Select the Edit Value submenu item to change the start time 146 Figure 6 32 The Timer amp Set Point 28 Day Timer Sunday 1 Menu Use This Day This is the activator for the particular day Since there is no duration that is changed from z
238. nu prompt will show these control modes which use a Timer to activate and deactivate the relay Figure 6 14 The first four modes are full control modes while the last two are add ons to the main modes Time Percent Time Percentage This is a very simple Timer control mode The user defines a time cycle like one hour and then they define what percent of that time the relay should be activated for 50 for example Those settings would result in 30 minutes of activation every hour It is one way of activating a relay more often than the ten times a day available using the Daily Cycle mode Daily Timer Daily Cycle This mode can be programmed to activate the relay up to 10 different times a day but every day willbe the same The user defines at what time of day the relay activates and for how long for each of the ten time slots Weekly Timer Weekly Cycle This mode can be programmed to activate the relay once a day for each day of the week and each day can be set differently but every week will be the same The user defines what time of day the relay activates and for how long 128 28 Day Timer 28 Day Cycle This mode allows the user to activate a relay once a day on a 28 Day schedule and each day can be set differently but every 28 day cycle will be the same The user defines at what time the relay activates each day and for how long Since Relay 01 is being used in this explanation with the Bleed Valve c
239. nus to set the Input Alarm conditions High Alarm Low Alarm and so forth and to define what Alarm Actions should occur if an alarm occurs 179 Under the Alarm Settings menu willbe submenus for whatever Alarm conditions apply to a particular Input As shown in Figure 8 4 the Conductivity sensor has three alarm conditions a High value alarm a Low value alarm and a Sensor Error alarm A Sensor Error occurs if an Input reports values out of range or fails Input Set up amp Calibration witch i tivty onductiwvty ature Input Statu sor Measurement sensor In armSettng sE Alarm gt yital In 1 Calibration Low Alarm gt gital In 2 Notfori z Errore Digital In 3 1e Alarms Digital In 4 l 1911 2 In 5 Digital In 6 1911 3 rm Y igital In 38 1 20mA In 01 4 20mA In 02 4 20mA In 03 2 20mA i 04 Input Set up Conductivty Figure 8 5 High Alarm sub menus for the Conductivity sensor Then under each of the alarm condition menus are the same submenus shown for the High Alarm in Figure 8 5 180 3500 uS The current setting value for this alarm with Edit Valve to the right Alarm Delay An optional delay to prevent transient issues from triggering Alarms AlarmActions A list of user definable actions like Alarm Actions for Outputs High Alarm 3500 uS The first submenu under High Alarm displays and allows for editing of the High Alarm setting value shown as set to 3500 uS cm in Figure 8
240. o another Triton controller Menu vvvyYyY Figure 3 46 The System Information and Update menu The Triton controller has a very useful context sensitive Help system which can also be customized to fine tune the Help text to a user s particular needs If the display is on the Home Screen the user will get help about the Home Screen If the user has moved into the menus so a menu item is highlighted the help display will be about the menu item that is highlighted One special group of help screens is the entry check help screens These will appear automatically if the user tries to enter a value that is illegal or out of range and provide help with the attempted entry To get out of the Help system once it has been invoked simply press Help again the Back Cancel key or any non Arrow key on the front panel to get back to the normal display 82 Figure 3 47 The Help System menu The Help System menu however has a different purpose With the submenus of this menu item the user can download the entire Help text file to USB flash drive or upload a copy of the Help text file from a USB drive The Help file is downloaded as a text file with entries named after the menu items along with the associated Help text The user could then edit that text file as they see fit customizing help instructions for their installation adding contact phone numbers perhaps even include a translation to another language Then the modifie
241. o use the Time Percentage control mode set to activate Relay 02 for a user defined percentage of a user defined Time Cycle It will be the only Auto Control mode available for Relay 02 Relay 08 will be designated as an Alarm Relay intended to activate an external Alarm indicator like an exterior Bell or Strobe Default Settings Relay 01 Activates Bleed Valve Set Point On Off Input is Conductivity sensor Control Effect is pre set to Force Low The Activation Limit Timer setting will be 90 minutes by default Relay 02 Activates Inhibitor Pump using the Time Percent control mode which may be adjusted by the user Relay 08 will be pre set to activate as the Alarm relay for the various Alarm conditions possible in this Operation Mode Inputs Available Only the Conductivity sensor Input will be available in the Output Control menu with the Conductivity sensor used to control activation in this mode The Alarm conditions described below have a default one minute Alarm delay except the Flow Switch that by default has no delay set The Flow Switch will cause an Alarm condition if flow becomes insufficient The Conductivity sensor will have its High Alarm and Low Alarm available The Temperature sensor is available for Conductivity calibration and for alarms 4 20mA Out The first of the optional 4 20 milliamp outputs will be set to follow the Conductivity sensor for outside charting monitoring or recording purposes The remaining
242. og Interval DownloadLogsd Via Email SystmActivt yp Data By Timeb Figure 9 17 Highlight on To USB Drive under the Viewing Data DownloadLogs menus SystmActivty This first submenu allows the user to download the System Activity Log to a USB drive that is plugged into the front panel of the controller After inserting a USB drive into the larger USB Type A port on the front panel of the controller the user can highlight a Download Now sub menu item and press Enter to start the download First there will be a message window that indicates that the System Activity Log is being generated and then a second message will appear as the log is being downloaded warning the user not to remove the USB drive until the download is complete as shown in Figure 9 18 Viewing Data DownloadLogs Via Email To USB DrivedSystmActivt y ARE ry gt Figure 9 18 A download of the System Activity log in progress 246 Viewing Data DownloadLogs Via Email m TO USB DrivedSystmActivty Download Now Figure 9 19 Highlight on the Data By Time menu showing Download Now Data By Time The second submenu under the To USB Drive menu shown in Figure 91 9 allows the user to manually download the By Time formatted Data Log to a USB Drive plugged into the USB Type A port on the front panel of the controller This By Time data log is in a common format a flat database comma separated variable
243. ogram e Power up the Triton controller and log on using the default Administrator password e CHANGE THE DEFAULT PASSWORDS Write down the new ones and store the info securely e Choose an Operation Mode a pre programmed Ready to Use RtU mode or an unrestricted User Mode By default the Triton will be set to use User Mode 1 e Configure the Inputs or review Input Configuration if using RtU Operation Mode 1 Flow Switch for a Flow Switch you just need to activate the alarms see below a For a Digital Input select the appropriate Digital Input Usage DigtlInUsage b Adjust settings i Set a Custom name 11 Set alarm details Set value to cause the alarm and set the AlarmActions 111 Activate Alarms with UseTheAlarms menu item 111 Calibrate if necessary Configure the other Inputs Conductivty and so on Digital Inputs may need a Usage adjustment e Configure the Relays or review Relay Configuration if using RtU Operation Mode 1 Relay 01 a Selecta Relay Usage Bleed Valve is default for Relay 01 39 Bleed Valve Pump Relay Alarm Relay Not In Use b Pick a Control Mode Set Point Timer Water Meter c Adjust settings 1 Custom relay name 11 Control details Set Point or Timer settings Alarm Settings and so forth d Activate the Control Mode highlight Use Mode Now and press Enter 2 Relay 02 a Selecta Relay Usage Pump Relay is default for Relays 02 throu
244. on is technically the amount of dissolved solids in the system water divided by the amount of dissolved solids in the make up water but more subjectively it is a measure of water re use The higher the Cycles value the more water is being reused so the make up water and chemical cost savings are greater Pr vvv Figure 11 2 Highlight on the Water Indexes LSI RSI Calc menu LSI RSI Calc Figure 11 2 shows the submenus of the LSI RSI Calculations menu Conductivity The first submenu is where the user must enter a Conductivity value for the index calculations There are two submenus to the right of this item the first is ValueForCalc where the user enters the Conductivity value in micro Siemens and then a Sensor Value display item that shows the measurement from the first CTP Conductivity sensor for reference The ValueForCalc Input Tray will display Expired until a value is entered and changes back to the expired indicator when the value is more than two weeks old Temperature The next submenu is where the user must enter a Temperature value for the index calculations Just like the previous parameter there is a ValueForCalc Input Tray where the user enters the Temperature value and then a Sensor Value display item that shows the measurement from the first CTP Temperature sensor for reference The ValueForCalc Input Tray will display Expired until a value is entered and revert to the expired indicator when the value
245. on modes and the User Modes Ready to Use and User defined Operation Modes Every Triton Water Treatment Controller comes with several convenient pre programmed Ready to Use operation modes Or the user can create their own water treatment program within one of the User Modes Both categories are found in the Operation Mode Operate Mode menu as shown in Figure 3 25 Figure 3 25 The Operation Mode menu Ready to Use Modes The Ready to Use modes are pre programmed with common water treatment strategies simple modes like Conductivity controlled Bleed or programs as complex as Conductivity controlled Bleed and Feed with an Oxidizing Biocide under ORP sensor control and pH control with a pH sensor 62 More of these Ready to Use RtU modes may have become available since this manual was printed check the Hydro Systems Triton controller website to see if an update with new operation modes is available http www hydro watertreatment com water treatment controllers triton controller html Below are brief outlines of what the Ready to Use operation modes are designed to accomplish There is much more detail about each of these modes and how they might be used in the later sections of this Reference Manual named Ready to Use Operation Modes and User defined Operation Modes found in the Using the Triton Controller chapter Figure 3 26 The Ready to Use RtU Operation Modes Conducti
246. ontrol mode after you have made all your settings The Spike submenu items for any particular day are the same and include Spike Start Here is where the user sets the time on that day at which the Spike Set Point should take effect and the Spike Period should start Spike Period This menu item is for setting how long the user wants the Spike Set Point to be in effect This period of time starts at the Spike Start time programmed above and the user can set this time duration from one minute to 1440 minutes 24 hours Spike SetPnt Spike Set Point This will be the new Set Point value that takes effect during the Spike Period It follows the same Control Effect as the normal Set Point The user should employ the weekly 7 day cycle settings if they want the spike to occur the same way every day or every week The user should only bother with the 28 Day cycle settings if they need the spike to occur differently from week to week One use for the 28 Day cycle is to have two different biocides set to spike on alternate weeks The user can set up one biocide to spike on the odd weeks that start with Sunday 1 and Sunday 3 and set the second biocide to spike on the even weeks that start with Sunday 2 and Sunday 4 By the way another feature of the Triton controller is that all 28 Day Cycles are automatically synchronized See the Start Cycle menu explanation in the Home Screen Edit chapter of this manual The last of these Set Poin
247. ontrol relay usage the Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed control modes described below would not be listed in its Control Menu For the Chemical Pump control usage however these add on modes would appear after the 28 Day Timer mode Add PreBleed This is an optional mode that adds a pre bleed feature to the first four Timer Start amp Stop Modes described above It is designed to turn on the Bleed valve for a period before one of the above Timer cycle activations Add Pre Feed This is another optional mode that adds a pre feed feature to the first four Timer Start amp Stop Modes It allows the user to have a different relay activate and run for a pre set amount of time before one of the above Timer cycle activations Next the individual Timer Start amp Stop Modes are explained in the order they would appear in the menu ime Percent sea ycle E Mod Daily Timer Percentagt gt Aa Dar Figure 6 15 The Time Percentage Control Mode Timer Start amp Stop Modes Time Percent Time Percentage 129 This is the simplest of the Timer Start amp Stop Modes and the only one that allows more than ten activations per day In this mode the user specifies a recurring time period Time Cycle and the percentage of that time period Percentage for which the relay should be activated For example the user could choose 60 minutes and 50 which would result in the relay activating for 30 minutes out of every
248. or a Flow Switch If the Digital Input Flow Switch will be used in place of the standard Modbus Flow Switch go to the Alarm Actions menu for the Modbus Flow Switch and deactivate the alarms by deselecting the UseTheAlarms men item Flow Switch status displays are Normal when flow sufficient for sensor operation and chemical dispersion Flow Alarm when flow is stopped or insufficient for normal operation The third menu item is the Digital Input Usage menu where the user must declare how the Digital Input is going to be used in their water treatment system DigtlInUsage Figure 8 32 shows the Usage menu for Digital In 2 that has been assigned the Reed Switch Water Meter Usage WatrMtr Reed indicated by the active 209 box around that menu item Figure 8 32 shows all five Digital Input Usage choices WatrMtr Reed Reed Switch Water Meter Volume measurement only witha High Volume Alarm available WatrMtr Hall Hall Effect Water Meter Volume and Flow Rate measurements with High Volume High and Low Flow Rate Alarms offered DigtlCounter Digital Event Counter Count thousands of events with a High Total Count Alarm as wellas High and Low Count Rate Alarms available GenrlPurpose Drum Level General Purpose This usage can only sense two states for the Input Closed and Open which can be assigned logical values like Good and Bad or Full and Empty by the user The user also decides which of these states
249. or to be used to control the relay thrRlyMode i CIETE eS OST Lockout Men Sample Time A mSertt ng AG iIstmtBand gt y t gt Figure 6 11 The Set Point Time Proportional Control Mode Measurement This submenu item shows the current measurement value from the selected Input This is for display and reference use no editing is allowed in this menu Set Point This submenu is where the user can see and set the value that will cause the relay to activate Use the Edit Value submenu to the right of the current value to alter the Set Point value ContrlEffect Control Effect This submenu is where the user must set whether the relay activation is going to lower the input measurement Force Low or whether the relay activation is going to raise the input measurement Force High Force Low is the default Sample Time This submenu is for setting the time cycle at which the selected Input 122 measurement is compared to the Set Point which is also the longest amount of time for which the relay can be activated per cycle based on the Adjustment band value AdjustmtBand Adjustment Band This setting is a magnitude value that is compared to the difference between the Input measurement and the Set Point at the beginning of each Sample Time How close the difference is to the Adjustment Band value determines what portion of the Sample Time for which the relay will be activated Here is an example Say the user is
250. orts one for data stick downloads and the other for easy local connection to a computer to use the Web Interface However there are additional options if you need them 4 20 mA Input and Output options and a host of accessories from which to choose When reading this Reference Manual consider that there may be components and features discussed that are not present in the Triton controller you have purchased 4 20 mA Input Output Options One example is the optional 4 20 mA Input and Output boards which can be installed in any Triton controller If the user needs analog 4 20 mA Inputs and or 4 20 mA Outputs the Triton has three locations on the main board available for these options Either of these boards is available with two or four Inputs or Outputs and these boards can be used in any combination so from 2 to 12 of these 4 20 mA Inputs or Outputs can be installed Accessories pH sensors ORP sensors Relay Expansion Modules additional Conductivity Temperature probes Boiler Conductivty probes PVC Manifolds to install the sensors into fully Board Mounted systems and more Fortunately these options are all Plug n Play field installable due to the sophisticated software and digital network used by the Triton controller Simply plug the new sensors into the digital network daisy chained to other probes and they will be automatically recognized named and placed into the appropriate menus ready to use Be aware t
251. ould do is change these passwords keeping track of the new ones ina secure location vvvy Figure 3 41 The Password and Access Control menu The Admin Level password gives unlimited access to the controller s functions and settings including changing the passwords 71 More details about these settings are in the Passwords and Access Control section of the Using the Triton Controller chapter of this Reference Manual There are access control settings for each of the User Level passwords that allow fine tuning of the User Level access to the controller s settings Just one example of how this can be used is that an Admin Level user can disable the normal Read Only access that requires no password then remove all the User Level 2 ability to make changes leaving User Level 2 with read only access That would create a Read Only mode that requires a password to use Figure 3 42 The No Activity Timeout Limit menu The No Activity Timeout Limit NoActTimeOut will log out the current user if no key presses are made on the front panel or clicks in the Web Interface for the time set Any changes in progress are discarded and the setting reverts to the previous value The display returns to the Home screen and a password entry will be required again The factory default for the No Activity Timeout Limit is 10 minutes To manually log out so a password entry would be required again the user would return the cont
252. ower level user would see only a string of asterisks for the password ReadoOnlycCntl NoActTimeOut Figure 12 6 Highlight on PasswdAccess Admin Menu User 1 Acces showing menu access list 262 User 1 Acces User Level 1 Access The third submenu under the Admin Menu is where the Admin Level user can adjust the User Level 1 change access to the menus Figure 12 6 shows by the active box drawn around the menu names that by default User Level 1 is given change access to all the menus that contain settings All users have access to the two menus that contain no settings the Output Status and InputMeasure menus The access settings described are only for menus where changes can be made The Admin Level user can easily deny the User Level 1 control access to any of these menus by moving the highlight to the menu name they wish to restrict and pressing the Enter key to remove the active box from around the menu name Then when a User Level 1 tried to change a setting in that menu they would see an error message informing them that change access has been denied Be careful when denying access control to User Level 1 and think about what tasks they will be asked to perform The User Level 1 may need access control to some or all of the menus listed in order to perform their assigned duties Figure 12 7 Highlight on PasswdAccess Admin Menu ClearAllLogs menu item ClearAllLogs Clear All Lo
253. panel Figure 3 2 The Home Screen and Home key The first row of text on the Home screen is up to the user In Figure 3 2 itis shown naming the installation site but the user can enter any text they want as described later in the section called Home Screen Edit The second row of text shows the Operation mode the controller is running in and the Alarm status The Operation mode might be one of the Ready to Use pre programmed modes as shown or a User Mode the user has programmed the controller to use The Alarm status will either display No Alarms or will display the number of alarms for example 2 Alarms Next are the six status displays The user can choose any six inputs or outputs to be displayed here with the current measurement or status The items displayed by default may vary based on the controller s installed options or a Ready to Use configuration but normally the defaults will be the three standard sensors Flow Conductivity and Temperature followed by the pH and ORP sensors and then the Bleed Valve relay 44 The fourth group of text on the Home screen shows the current date an optional Cycle Week display and the time The user can choose the format of the date display All these edits are done in the Home Screen Edit HomeScrnEdit menu as explained later in this manual At the bottom of the display are soft labels for the Relay Activity lights which reflect whatever custom name t
254. put Auto Control Menu 4 20 Status The 4 20 mA Output Status menu displays either a live display of the milliamp output or the Input Error status which indicates the Input being tracked is 167 having some problem The 4 20 mA Output does not go into alarm if the Input being tracking has an error but the Status changes so the user can see there is a problem with the Input In fact there are no error conditions for a 4 20 mA Output they just keep on tracking Auto Control This is where the automatic tracking control settings will be found This 1s the typical and default usage for a 4 20 mA output where the changes in the 4 20 mA current mirror or track the performance or measurements of some other device The user can simply select the input they want tracked and the controller will automatically map the full measurement range of the input to the 4 20 mA Output range The user can change these mappings using the 4 mA Value and 20 mA Value menus This type of output is often used this way so the information can be recorded by an external recorder like a chart recorder or data logger or be sent to a Building Maintenance System or some other performance auditing system y Figure 6 51 4 20mA Out01 Auto Control Select Input menu The 4 20 mA Output Auto Control Menu is shown in Figure 6 50 There are three submenu items Select Input This menu is where the user selects which Input they
255. ration This mode is only useful if the controller has two Conductivity sensors available as Inputs and appropriately installed It allows control based on the ratio of the system water conductivity divided by the make up water conductivity Set Point Control Modes SetPnt OnOff Set Point On Off This control mode activates the relay when the selected Input s measurement passes a pre set value called the Set Point either rising above or falling below the Set Point value The relay is deactivated when the Set Point value is passed going the other way with a programmable dead band to prevent rapid relay cycling There is also an Activation Limit Timer setting in case of a sensor failure or other problem Figure 6 10 The Set Point On Off Control Mode The details for using this control mode are in the submenus Select Input is the first choice to make in the Set Point On Off mode The user must decide which Input the method going to evaluate or look at The currently selected Input 1s displayed to the right of the Select Input submenu item and there is a listof all the Inputs to the right of that 1f the user wants to change the Input choice Chose the device or sensor to be used to control the relay The first Input listed usually the Conductivity sensor Conductivity is the default Input Measurement This submenu item displays the current measurement value from the selected Input This is for display and
256. re 13 13 Highlight on HomeScrnEdit ContrastCntl showing sub menus ContrastCntl Contrast Control is the very last submenu in the Home Screen Edit 275 menu It allows the user to adjust the contrast of the front panel s liquid crystal display LCD The user can highlight either the Adj Darker of Adj Lighter menu item shown in Figure 13 13 and then press Enter repeatedly to adjust the contrast The user can also adjust the display contrast when the Home Screen itself is showing on the display by pressing the Left Arrow key to decrease contrast and the Right Arrow key to increase contrast There are 20 steps of adjustment available 276 14 Help System Overview The Triton controller has a very useful context sensitive Help system which can also be customized to fine tune the Help text to a user s particular needs A user can get help text displayed on a Triton controller by simply pressing the Help key on the front panel If the display is on the Home Screen the user will get help about the Home Screen If the user has moved into the menus so a menu item is highlighted the help display will be about the menu item that is highlighted For example Figure 14 1 shows the Menu Screen with the highlight on the Output Control OutputContrl menu vvYVVYVYYYYYYYY Figure 14 1 Highlight on Output Control menu showing list of Outputs To see the help text for the Output Control menu item the user can simply
257. re the activation of some other relay activates the relay under control Figure 6 40 The Other Relay Control Mode Category 156 Other Relay Control Mode Category OthrRlyModes These four very simple control modes use the activation of some other relay as the signal to activate this relay the relay being controlled by this control mode FeedWithSame Both relays activate and deactivate together at the same time FeedWithTime This relay activates when the other relay activates with an optional delay but stays activated for a user defined time duration FeedAfter T This relay activates after the other relay deactivates with an optional delay and stays activated for a user defined fixed time duration FeedAfter This relay activates after the other relay deactivates with an optional delay and stays activated for a user defined percentage of the other relay s activation time Notice the FeedWithTime and both of the FeedAfter modes have an optional Additional Delay setting to delay the activation for a user defined time beyond the other relay s activation or deactivation EZ dGetE fode s ARENA select Relay fter s Figure 6 41 The Feed With Other Relay Same Control Mode Other Relay Modes Feed WithSame Feed With Other Relay Same When this mode is employed the two relays activate and deactivate together Select Relay This submenu is where the user selects w
258. resses the Enter key the system update will begin A smaller message window will inform the user that the update is Uploading Applications then indicate it is Uploading Web Files Finally the update will complete and a final message 309 window will indicate the controller is about to restart as shown in Figure 16 12 When the controller starts back up the new system software is be in use A Menu Screen Figure 16 11 System update warning that the controller will restart when complete A Menu Screen ActiveAlarm tSstatu mu Outpu Output inputM input Viewin Water Operat Passwd Homesc Netwrk Sysint Help System SystenUpdatc gt i aiREmaS Figure 16 12 Message after update is complete indicating controller is about to restart 310 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Overview The Triton controller should require less maintenance and troubleshooting than other controllers as its digital sensors should need less calibrations and the menus make most controls easy for a user to find on their own But all sensors need cleaning eventually Modbus Sensor Maintenance These sophisticated digital sensors are extremely reliable and due to the digital Modbus network protocol they use for communication to the controller they are immune from most forms of electromagnetic interference However like any water condition sensor the sensor end is subject to fouling and chemical inter
259. rol modes and or doesn t want the cycle week displayed Figure 13 10 Highlight on 28 Day Cycle showing the two sub menus When the user highlights the Cycle Start menu item the first submenu displays the last cycle start date with the usual Edit Value item to right for editing A 28 Day cycle 273 always starts on a Sunday even if the date entered here is not a Sunday If a date is entered that is not a Sunday the previous Sunday is the first day of the new 28 Day cycle This can help the user start a new 28 Day cycle at the beginning of a month without worrying about what day of the week that is Figure 13 11 Highlight on Cycle Start showing last start date and StartNewCycl item The Start Cycle reference display is shown in Figure 13 11 as 01 Jan 2010 which shows the last setting that was used to start a 28 Day cycle But there are two ways a 28 Day cycle can be started On a new controller that has never had a 28 Day cycle started one way a cycle can be started is when the user employs a control mode that uses a 28 Day Cycle The Start Cycle date will automatically become the Sunday before that mode was selected and the cycle will move forward from there A message is also displayed to inform the user they have started a 28 Day Cycle that they are in Week 1 and that they need to come to this menu if they want to change the Start Cycle date Of course if the user came to this menu first and set a Start Cycle
260. rol the duration for which a process runs There are control modes allow the user to activate a relay at a certain time of day and control the duration for which the output will stay activated There are Timer control modes that activate at a certain time of day but stop based on some Input value There are Timer modes to force one relay s activation to wait a certain amount of time after some other relay has finished Most of these Timers have a Daily cycle a Weekly cycle and a 28 Day cycle available for the user s convenience There are even proportional Timer modes whose run time is self adjusting based on how long some other relay was activated or how far away a current Input sensor value is from a pre set value More detailed information about all these Timer control modes is in the User defined Operation Modes section of the Using the Triton Controller chapter of this manual Expansion Modules The Triton water treatment controller uses a digital network for easy Plug n Play system expansion The user can simply plug a Relay Expansion Module or Modbus Sensor into one of the network ports and immediately begin using the addition as if it was installed at the factory The user can plug a Relay Expansion Module into the network and four more high amperage Relay Outputs and four more Digital Inputs will appear in the controller s menus configurable just like the ones in the main controller and automatically numbere
261. roller display to the Home screen and allow one minute to pass with no key presses 78 Home Screen Edit The Home Screen Edit HomeSernEdit menu has a deceptively simple name Although itis the menu where the user can modify the appearance of the Home screen some of the choices affect all the displays in the entire menu system A Home Screen display is shown in Figure 3 43 It can display 20 rows of 40 characters The user can edit the top row text to hold any text they would like usually the site name or location is a good idea since this text is included in the downloaded logs to identify the controller they came from The Operation Mode currently in use is displayed on the next line of text along with the Alarm status Figure 3 43 The Home Screen The next block of text displayed is the Status Display The user can choose any six Inputs or Outputs to display their current measurement or status Next is a display of the current date a reminder of what week of a 28 Day cycle the controller is in and the current time Rows 12 through 18 are reserved for Password Requests and on the bottom two rows are Relay identification displays that will use whatever custom name the user assigns to the Relays The Relay Names are staggered over their respective Relay Activity Lamps using a smaller font O Home Screen Edit Menu HomeScrnEdit The Home Screen Edit menu is used to edit the items displayed on Home Screen
262. rrently locked out by some other control OvrTime Limit When the Activation Limit Timer setting has been exceeded Input Error Means the input controlling the relay has reported an error Not In Use A usage setting that hides the relay from most menus Relay Usage This menu is where a user makes the first control decision what this Relay will be used for in their water treatment system Any Relay can be designated as BleedValvUse Bleed Valve Usage To control a Bleed Valve Blowdown Use Blowdown Valve Usage To control a Boiler Blowdown Valve PumpRelayUse Chemical Pump Usage To control a Chemical Pump AlarmRlayUse Alarm Relay Usage To control an external Alarm indicator Not In Use Relay Not In Use To remove the relay from most menus Auto Control This menu is where the relay control settings can be found once the Relay Usage has been defined Most of this chapter is devoted to the Auto Control menu items The first decision the user makes in this menu is what control mode to use There are Set Point control modes that use Input sensor values to control the relay Timer only control modes modes that start at a certain Time but turn off based on a Set 109 Point modes that use a Water Meter volume to activate and even modes that allow some Other Relay to control this one The Auto Control menu is also where the Lockout and Alarm Settings are found But remember to designate the Relay Usage before going to the Au
263. rth The Data Log entries are made using a data logging interval which can be set from one minute to once a day The controller has enough memory locations reserved so that about 40 days worth of data can be logged for each Input and Output using a 30 minute logging interval Logging less often will allow even more days of data to be recorded When the log becomes full new data is still logged but the oldest data is deleted to make room The user can also view a Data Log of any Input or Output on the front panel display In the View DataLog menu all the Inputs and Outputs installed are listed with a date entry field to the right and a menu item to view the data for that date When the View Log 72 Now item is selected it is replaced with a list the times for the logged data most recent entries first Once the highlight is moved into the list of times the individual log entries are shown and the user can scroll up and down the data log with the Up and Down Arrow keys They can use the date entry field to look at the data from a different date ta flew DataLog UEIFLECAL 1 TE gt TULA Figure 3 35 The Data Log for the Conductivity sensor on 04 Apr 2011 The user may also download the data logs for archival purposes or to import into a software trending or graphing program The data can be downloaded in a By Time format is a single text file with the first line being a listing of all the Inputs and Outputs s
264. s They start at the Output they wish to control a water valve or chemical pump wired to one of the controller s Relays Then they decide how they want to control that relay manually using a Timer with a Sensor measurement by the activation of some other relay and so forth One advantage of this system is that a single sensor can be used to control multiple outputs each using their own Set Point measurement value Full Alphanumeric Keypad It looks and works just like the keypad on an oversized cell phone This allows fast direct input so the user is not pressing arrow keys to find the number or letter they want to enter Simple and easy Relay Control In a typical water treatment controller there are several electro mechanical relays The SIIR relays are used to turn on and off chemical pumps and water valves The Triton controller is designed in the same way The menus and controls emphasize Control by Output where the user can go to the Output Relay they want to control and find all the settings to control that output They can choose the Relay Usage they want then an Auto Control mode and adjust the settings of that mode to accomplish their goal There are manual controls as well as automatic control modes that use sensor values timer control modes control based on water meter volumes and even modes that use one relay to control another relay The user can access all of these options by going first to th
265. s that does not require a manual wet test to calculate In a Triton water treatment controller the Conductivity sensor is used to measure the TDS so two Conductivity sensors are required one measuring the System water and a second Conductivity sensor measuring the Make up water Then the Cycles value is simply calculated as the ratio of the conductivity of the System water divided by the conductivity of the Make up water The three submenus shown in Figure 11 3 are the live display of the Cycles value No Entry until the two conductivity sensors are selected and the two menus where the user selects the system and make up conductivity sensors The controller will by default select the first conductivity sensor installed named Conductivity by default 255 as the System Conductivity sensor and the second network sensor if present named Conductivty2 by default as the Make up Conductivity sensor If a Conductivity sensor is connected to the controller via the 4 20 mA Inputs the user will have to select that sensor manually in the submenus vyvvvvYYYYY v Figure 11 4 Highlight on the Water Indexes Wet Test Entry menu WetTestEntry Wet Test Entry The Wet Test Entry menu is just a place where the user can record the results of their manually performed water condition testing which allows the values entered to be downloaded with the controller s own sensor data The values entered by the user cannot be used
266. s shown in the picture the Up Arrow on the front panel would do nothing since the highlight is at the top of the menu But if the highlight were moved down then the Up Arrow key would move it back up Also if the user scrolls to the bottom of a very long menu so items go beyond the upper edge of the display the top item is replaced with an upward pointing arrowhead A to indicate there were more items out of sight Simply put the arrowheads show the user where menus are available to view and what arrow key to press to get there The upward pointing arrowhead A in the upper left corner of the display is a reminder that the Home Screen is above the Menu Screen If the highlight was on the Active Alarms menu item a user could access the Home Screen with one press of the Up arrow although it s easier to use the dedicated front panel Home key There are also rightward pointing arrowheads and a colon visible to right of the submenus items on the right side of the display The arrowheads pointing right indicate another submenu is available out of sight The colon means there is a display item to the right out of sight A display item is an information display with no submenu Figure 3 6 shows what the display would look like if the Right Arrow on the Navigator was pressed once to move into Relay 01 s custom name submenu One thing that happens is the whole menu moves or scrolls to the left so the user can see the ne
267. se There is no Auto Control menu or manual control menu items at all So before explaining a fully equipped Auto Control menu the text below explains the more limited Auto Control menus associated with the Relay Usage designations for Alarm Control and Not In Use and the manual control menu items Manual Control When the Relay Usage is set to Bleed ValvUse or PumpRelayUse below the Auto Control menu are the manual controls shown in Figure 6 5 These do just what the menu items say Manual Off turns the relay off Manual On turns the relay on and ReturnToAuto returns the relay control to whatever Auto Control mode was in use before the manual controls were selected The Manual Limit menu allows the user to set a time limit on how long the relay stays activated when using manual control as a just in case emergency shut off value or to control the relay s manual activation time vrrvrvvv Figure 6 5 Relay 01 showing the manual controls below the Auto Control menu Manual Off If the user highlights the Manual Off menu item and presses Enter the Relay will be immediately deactivated The Active Box will be removed from the Auto Control or Manual On menu item and drawn around the Manual Off menu item to 113 indicate it has been selected Manual On If user highlights the Manual On menu item and presses Enter the Relay willimmediately activate and stay activated until the user hi
268. se Set Point Control is the activator for this control option After making the settings they desire the user must highlight the UseSetPtCntl item and press Enter to select this control option After activating SetPtControl the user would also have to select the Use PreBleed activator Figure 6 24 to activate Add PreBleed Timer Start amp Stop Modes Add Pre Feed The Add Pre Feed menu allows the user to activate another relay before the relay they are controlling with one of the four previous Timer Start amp Stop Modes The pre feed relay can only be activated for a fixed amount of time This optional mode is typically used to introduce a Dispersant Penetrant or Surfactant before the addition of the chemical being controlled by one of the Timer control modes Figure 6 25 The Add Pre Feed Menu This optional Add Pre Feed mode has only three submenu items Feed Relay This submenu is where the user would select which one of the other relays will be activated before the normal Timer activation The user can choose any relay other than one they are controlling with the Timer Start amp Stop Mode To make the selection simply move the highlight until the appropriate relay is highlighted and then press the Enter key Pre FeedTime The Pre Feed Time submenu is where the user can see and adjust the amount of time that the pre feed relay will remain activated before the regular Timer controlled relay is activated T
269. sed to test the external alarm device connected to the Alarm Relay There are more details about the Alarm Relay and how it is used in the Alarm Settings section later in this chapter Not In Use When the Relay Usage of Not In Use is selected not only does the Auto Control menu and manual controls disappear for that Relay but all references to the Relay disappear from most of the Triton menu system It is still listed only in the Output Status menu and in the Output Control menu so the Relay Usage can be changed in the future The idea is to simplify the menus by hiding Outputs that are not in use There is a similar NotForContrl option for Inputs Hiding the relays that are not in use also prevents them from being selected by mistake when the user is deep into the menu structure making control decisions 116 Try to remember this feature itis very useful to get a clean simple menu display with only the items being used visible It is also a trouble shooting hint that if a Relay or Input seems to have disappeared from the menus one thing to check is if it has been designated as Not In Use or NotForContrl for Inputs If that is not the reason for an Input disappearing it may indicate the Input has been disconnected or removed from Triton s digital network using the NetwrkConfig Plug n Play menu One of the first things the user must check for is the proper Relay Usage settings depending on the
270. sent a message if activated detailing the nature of the alarm and including a data dump showing the input values and output status at the time of the alarm Each of the three alarm email menus have the same sub menus also shown in Figure 15 13 Email Address is the first of the sub menus This is where the user can enter an email address to which the alarm emails willbe sent Although the 12 character Input Tray may not display the entire address a special dialog is used when the Edit Value item is selected so email addresses up to 40 characters can be used AlarmMessage is the second sub menu where up to 40 characters of additional text can be sent along with the standard Alarm Email message In its sub menus are the usual 287 Input Tray and Edit Value items and this feature also uses a special dialog so up to 40 characters can be input for this message letwrkeConftig CommSettings ma sett 4Alarm Emails PARADE gt Email AlarmMessa je Figure 15 13 Highlight on Alarm Email1 showing 1ts submenus Send TestMsg does just what its name implies it will immediately send an alarm test email to the particular Alarm Email address Alarm Email1 in Figure 15 13 so the user can be sure a real alarm email will be received if an actual alarm condition occurs The Send TestMsg will send the email even if the Alarm Email is not activated but remember that the Use Email 1 activator must be selected
271. ser defines what this AlarmActions relay does when either of the alarms occurs The two choices are 1 Force Off Have the relay deactivated and locked so it cannot be re activated until the alarm is cleared 2 Force Active Have the relay activated and locked so it cannot be deactivated until the alarm is cleared For example if a Pump Relay goes into alarm its default Relay Reaction is forced deactivation Force Off The Alarm Actions is where the user defines what happens to the other relays when either of the alarms occurs along with some other alarm associated actions like turning on the Alarm Lamp on the front panel of the enclosure The user can turn on other relays Alarm Relays are selected automatically for this choice or they can Lockout other relays so they cannot be activated until the alarm is cleared For example if a relay controlling a Bleed Valve goes into alarm by default it puts a Lockout on all Pump Relays until the alarm is cleared The entire Output Alarm Settings menu structure is presented below in an outline form Menu Abbreviation Alarm Settings AlarmActions This Relay s Reaction RlayReaction Forced Deactivation Force Off Forced Activation Force Active Alarm Actions AlarmActions No Alarm Action No AlarmActn Alarm Lamp Alarm Lamp Turn a Relay On TurnRelay On Lockout a Relay AlarmLockout Send Alarm Emails Send Email Reasonable defa
272. should cause an Alarm condition Flow Switch A usage to support simple two state Flow Switches usually these are the float style flow switches Very simple menus with specific flow switch alarm defaults Figure 8 32 Highlight on Digital Input Usage under Input Set up for Digital In 1 SettingsMenu This is the main menu for these Inputs where the configuration and alarm settings are found The particular menu items available will vary based on the Digital Input Usage selected There is a complete explanation of all the various Setting Menu items right after this menu overview NotForContrl And lastly the handy Not For Control option This would remove the Digital Input from all the Output Control menus preventing the Digital Input from being 210 used to control an output relay It would still be listed here in the Input Set up menu so it can be used to monitor the water quality have the user set alarms and have the input s measurements stored in the Data Log Settings Menu details based on Digital Input Usage The submenu items under the Settings Menu change based on what Digital Input Usage is chosen The next few pages will describe all the possible menus showing the changes to the Settings Menu based on each Digital Input Usage selection igital In 3 DiatlinUsag jital In 4 SSnS SLENGEN VO t 1 E nt s re rr e YYYY Figure 8 33 Highlight on Settings Menu for WatrMtr Reed Digital
273. so the controller 281 can send Alarm Emails or periodically send data downloads by email There are also other email related settings stored here MAC Address is a display only menu that shows the Media Access Control address MAC address for a particular controller The setting is assigned at the factory and is used to create a unique identifier for any device communicating an Ethernet or IP network Figure 15 2 Highlight on the CommSettings menu showing the four sub menus Figure 15 3 Highlight on the LAN IP Setup menu showing the two address modes 282 LAN IP Setup DHCP vs Static Addressing Each system has pluses and minuses talk to the network administrator at the installation site to determine which method to use Use DHCP Adr will be selected as the default If the highlight is moved to the UseStaticAdr menu its four submenus and the activator are revealed as in Figure 15 4 NetwrkConfig CommSettings StaticIP Adri Static Mask P Static Gate P Browser Porte UseStaticNow Figure 15 4 Highlight on UseStaticAdr menu showing four submenus and activator StaticIP Adr is the menu where the user enters the static IP address assigned by their network administrator There are the usual Input Tray and Edit Value items but a special dialog is used when entering the value so that up to 40 digits can be employed CommSettings LAN IP Setup UseStaticAdr Figure 15 5 Special dialog
274. specifics of their water treatment strategy Now that the manual controls and the Relay Usages that eliminate the Auto Control menu have been examined it is time to explain the options of a more fully equipped Relay Usage like those used for Bleed Valve or Pump Relay control The differences between the Auto Control menus used with Bleed Valve control and Chemical Pump control are that Bleed Valve usage enables a special Bleed based on Make Up Volume control mode not available using the Pump Relay usage and the Pump Relay usage enables Pre Feed and Pre Bleed add on modes that are not available in the Bleed Valve usage vvyvyvyvyy Figure 6 8 The Relay 01 Auto Control Menu showing the control mode categories 117 Bleed Valve Usage Below is the explanation for the various categories of Auto Control modes and the individual control modes within those categories using the Bleed Valve Usage BleedValvUse as an example Auto Control Modes Category and Individual Going back to the example from the beginning of the chapter Relay 01 with a Relay Usage of Bleed Valve control the next menu to visit is the Auto Control menu When the highlight is moved onto the Auto Control Menu item a list of control mode categories will appear to the right as shown in Figure 6 8 The menu items listed to the right of the Auto Control menu are categories of control modes not the individual control modes The individual control modes wi
275. ssessessscessssessssessesessessscessscessscsesesessessscerses 27 Z INSTALLATION conidios dae 29 Unpacking and Mounting ooomommmnsminenenenenosioncisisrcrcicicicicicicacicacacacacacacacecacacaaaasocasaoncaaconocaaacocasocosocosoccccononenos 29 Unpack the Eon A EEE O dase aaa adh tinea ERR 29 Prepare to Mount the Enclosure cc cccccssscccssssecsccrsesensessecesesecccssencsscecessscessesenesseneeseacessesersscenseseneeasecens 29 Electrical Regui rements cccscssscssssccssssessssessssessssessesessessssessscesssssssessssessssersssecsessssessssecsssessesessesessesssssesecseres 30 Triton Main Board Connection Diagram seecsssssessessseseecessssscecessscsesseesscsceceescseseueessseeeeeesseseeeeees 31 A TN Modbus Digital Network Sensors pA and ORP Sensors iaa as tube 4 20 MA Inputs A ia Digital Input A nda diane nie A taa ted dd es 35 Output Connections cccscccsscccscssccssccssccscsesessessscessssessssessessssessscersscessesessessscessssessesecsesessessssessesessesecsessssessscerees 36 Relay Outputs ii e iii a 36 4 20 MA Outputs cani A A ROA ea 37 Treatment Program Set upp ccsccsssccsscccssssessssesssssssessssessssessssessesessessssessssessesecsessssessssersssessesecsessscessssessssseres 39 Default PASS words tit A Adi deeeeets 39 TO UP A AA T AAA AAA 39 3 DESCRIPTION OPFSONTRO ES ui 41 OVE VIEW 0scererererevseevevecevevevevesenesesesevevesesesenesesesseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseseses
276. ssessssessscessssessesessessssessssersscersesessesserees 200 Elo WS Witch caian aaa SH WS BURG RNS ASO SST MINS SN RE RR 200 CUS fOTMIN AIMS ese scsi tect sce cest A A EAE a en 200 SEES 2 222225 e Re A Seta EAR e hele ta et ie ss ie des lice ae eR ett rae Seg 200 Measurement tte otrora did 201 ALAS EOS latir 201 COndUCTIMIEY sca Se Se ins DOS ES DUDES DER AAR OURS ale 201 CO NO vieras 202 SU o a ne O a o o EA 202 Measurement rt tal odres 202 Alarte dcir allioli 202 CAMDEN 20 AAA A AAA E ev EA AE ICAA BO hav bs a And 202 Not Coni e dd vi di Ad 202 WOEMPO LAL UC ui a ai tias 203 CON 55 525 25 se tah Ses otc cites eeu a loa ee es asa us eae Lee eee 203 SLAMS can Ch eect e o Mert hte tet bes ela EE EE EE AEE EE AEA ENE AEEA EE EAEE REEE 203 MG ASUTEMENT 246 fected eet tort amp Gondvcetecotvccteceteanteaccssctecetscebecetesctesctssctecetsccbecetuantescessctisetecbeceteantisstuleuceteass 203 Alar St int tii ct S Eataa 204 Calibration AN 204 NotEor Contra te NE este o E A NL e o te See es AE 204 PHiSENS OR cad ce NO 204 Custom Name poset cs tec cece creates dto 205 S CEGUS 722 03 schs foe ciao ad AE ios ITO AER AA Be 205 MEA ee ee 205 Alarm O e alla 205 Calibration det torts matt Mosk toieectecete cede cctecsteacteosdoortecstvesteccteestccetvectevctucstecedveebecedvesteccdsesteecitedatecteectecsteos 205 NothorGonttrhias nts ee he AE EEE AEE atada edad 205 SS E NO 206 Custom Nadm A A E EA AA Ds TA 206 A NN ET 206 Mea a is 206 Alarte e t
277. ssionals in conformance to all national state and local codes As well as the controller enclosure you will also need to install any sensors supplied and connect output devices to the electro mechanical relays or the optional 4 20 mA outputs 30 Triton Main Board Connection Diagram m pO ge LN A Ta Relay Connection Block Main Power Fuses 16 Amp Relay Fuse 6 3 Amp DC Power Supply Connector 4 20 mA Board Headers RJ45 Ethernet Connector Digital Input Connections Auxiliary 24VDC Power Modbus Network Connectors Electro Mechanical Relay Wet Dry Slide Switch ps 1 of 8 2 1 of 8 1 3 1 3 x 8 1 x 4 2 1 of 8 1 of 8 Input Connections The Modbus digital Conductivity probe comes in a clear PVC T fitting with 1 inch NPT female fittings Establish a sample loop on the discharge side of the cooling tower recirculating pump to supply between 3 and 10 gallons per minute to the sensors Install isolation valves on each side of the sample loop so flow can be stopped for sensor inspection and maintenance To prevent damage to the PVC pipe fittings use no more than 3 layers of PTFE tape and screw the fittings together only finger tight Modbus Digital Network Sensors The digital network Modbus sensors connect to the controller or to each other using a keyed four pin locking connector on the Modbus cables Push the plug cable connector with t
278. ssword user1 by default allows about the same ability to make changes as the Admin password but an Admin Level can restrict the User 1 access control to read only access User Level 2 is the lowest level of control that can make changes From the factory the User 2 password user2 by default will give the user very little control ability but an Admin or User Level 1 user can increase the control ability to match User Level 1 or restrict access control until User Level 2 has read only access with a password Read Only Access does not allow any changes to be made By default anyone can press the Enter key when asked for a password and will be given read only access to all the menus and displays in the Triton menu structure Of course sensitive information like passwords are hidden from read only access but all the other menu screens and control settings that can be seen by the higher level users can be seen in Read Only access If that is a problem Read Only access can be disabled by an Admin or User Level 1 password user Whenever a user presses a key on the front panel of the controller that would move the display away from the Home screen or accesses the controller over the Ethernet comnection they will be asked to enter a password The level of access they are given depends on the password they enter PasswdAccess Password and Access Control The Password and Access control menu PasswdAccess is where higher lev
279. ssword Access Home Screen Edit and so forth 251 11 Water Condition Indexes Overview na WsterIindex s di vv NAL Figure 11 1 Highlight on the Water Indexes menu The Triton controller can calculate the following Indexes shown in Figure 11 1 Langelier Saturation Index LSI Index Ryznar Stability Index RSI Index Cycles of Concentration Value Cycles of C These are three popular water condition indexes used in Cooling Tower Water Treatment The first two LSI and RSI are focused on predicting scale formation but give some insight into corrosion especially if the pipes in the system are ferrous made of iron If the system includes significant sections of copper or cupronickel piping the corrosion predicting value of these indexes is reduced Be careful with interpreting those two Indexes however The LSI and RSI calculations both require the results of manual wet tests on the system s water and the results have to be entered into the controller before the Indexes can be properly calculated As the condition of the water changes over time the Index displayed may no longer accurately reflect the water s quality The indexes can only be considered good indicators of the water s quality when the results of manual wet tests are entered often and regularly The controller displays the last date the results of a wet test were entered 252 to help you judge how useful the index is Cycles of Concentrati
280. st to use for this setting at a particular installation SetPtControl The Set Point Control menu is for using a conductivity measurement to determine when the Pre Bleed should stop Use its submenu items to set up the Pre Bleed control then highlight the UseSetPtCntl menu item and press Enter to activate this feature A pre bleed that is being controlled by a Conductivity Set point always starts 90 minutes before the primary feed This should be enough time to accomplish the pre bleed before the primary feed is scheduled to start on all but the largest systems If the pre bleed has not finished when the time comes for the primary feed to begin the pre bleed is stopped so the primary feed can begin at the time it was scheduled to start Figure 6 24 The Pre Bleed SetPtControl Menu The submenu items for the Set Point Control method are CndctvtInput Conductivity Input is the menu where the user can choose which Input is measuring the system water s conductivity By default it is set to the first conductivity sensor named Conductivity at the factory PreBld SetPt Pre Bleed Set Point is where the user would enter the Conductivity value that should stop the Bleed drain This should be significantly lower than any set point established to start a Bleed The user may have to experiment to find the best value for this setting depending on their goals and the physical situation at a particular installation 138 UseSetPtCntl U
281. t value they would see the entry check Help display shown in Figure 14 4 Auto Control SetPnt Modes SetPnt oOnoft Select Input Measurement Set Poin Cntl Dir Delay Ba Limit Ti t Value Figure 14 4 Conductivity Set Point entry check help describing error Help System Menu A Menu Screen ActiveAlarms OutputStatus OutpurContri InputMeasure Input set up Viewing Data WaterIndexes Operate Mode PasswdAccess HomeSernEdtt NetwrkConfig SysinfosUpdt View Sysinfo View Version Config File DownloadHelp PowerFailure Upload Help SystemUpdate Figure 14 5 Highlight on the Help System menu showing its sub menus The Help System menu however has a different purpose The Help System menu is in the submenus of the System Information amp Update menu as shown in Figure 14 5 Using the two Help System submenus the user can download the entire Help text file to 279 a USB flash drive or upload a copy of the Help text file from a USB drive The user would simply move the highlight onto the appropriate submenu item and press Enter A completion message will be displayed once the Help file is done being downloaded or uploaded as shown in Figure 14 6 Outputco InputMea Input se Viewing Waterind Oper 9asswdAc HomesSern NetwrkCo SysIinfos rate Conrig File Help System PIN PowerfFailure Upload Help SystemUpdate Figure 14 6 Help System menu Download completion message The Help file
282. t Point Modes T amp StPt Modes activate a relay at a certain time of day but then use the measurement value of an input sensor to deactivate The Water Meter Modes WtrMtr Modes activate a relay based on a volume measurement from a water meter The Other Relay modes OthrRlyModes control the activation of this relay by the activation of some other relay vrrrvvv Figure 3 15 Relay 01 Auto Control Modes Lockout and Alarm menus The active box drawn around the SetPnt Modes category indicates the currently selected control mode for this Relay is in that category so that menu is where the user would go to change the Set Point A useful feature of the Triton controller is the user can use the same input sensor but with a different Set Point to control a different relay That is part of the Triton Control by Output philosophy To access the individual Set Point control modes the user would move the highlight to the right to the Set Point Modes category The text will scroll to the left and the individual Set Point control modes are displayed on the right as shown in Figure 3 16 56 The active box drawn around the submenu item SetPnt OnOff indicates the Set Point On Off control mode is currently the selected mode and therefore that menu is where to change the Input sensor s Set Point for this relay More details about the Set Point On Off control method as wellas all the other control modes are in the chapter
283. t control modes is only useful if the Triton controller has two Conductivity sensors installed This mode is designed to compare the TDS of the system water to the TDS of the make up water and control the output using the ratio of the two 125 conductivity measurements called the Cycles of the water Set Point Control Modes SetPnt Cycle Set Point Cycles of Concentration This is a simple Set Point On Off style control mode except it takes the ratio of two conductivity sensor measurements as its Input Measurement and compares that ratio to the user defined Cycle Set Point Figure 6 13 Other than using the ratio as the Input Measurement its other settings are the same as a normal Set Point On Off mode Figure 6 13 The Set Point Cycles of Concentration Control Mode This mode needs two conductivity sensors one measuring the system water and another measuring the make up water The system water conductivity is divided by the make up water conductivity to get the ratio known as the Cycles or Cycles of Concentration of the water For example if the system water has twice the conductivity of the make up water the Cycles value would be 2 SysCondInput System Conductivity Input This submenu allows the user to select which of the conductivity sensors is the system water conductivity sensor It is set by default to the first sensor listed which is normally the Conductivty sensor MkUpCndInput Make Up Con
284. t measurement or status which can be very handy The user can display a Relay s status Water Meter volumes Flow Switch status Input sensor values and so forth By default these six items will start with the Bleed Valve status the three standard sensors Flow Switch Conductivity and Temperature along with the next two Input sensors in the system but in the 6 Row Status menu the user can choose any six Inputs or Outputs to be used for this display The row 11 is left blank followed by a display of the current date a reminder of what week of a 28 Day cycle the controller is in and the current time Rows 13 through 18 are reserved for Password Requests and on the bottom two rows are Relay identification displays that willuse whatever custom name the user assigns to the Relays The Relay Names are staggered over their respective Relay Activity Lamps and use a smaller font see Figure 13 1 268 Home Screen Edit Menu HomeScrnEdit The user can edit the Home Screen display by using the Home Screen Edit menu La a Menu H w M p ActiveAlarms OutputsStatus OutputContrl inputMeasure Input Set up Viewing Data WaterIndexes Operate Mode PasswdAccess Top Row Edit NetwrkConfig 6 Row Status SysInfosUpdt Temp Scale Date Adjust 28 Day Cycle Time Adjust Contrasttntl Figure 13 3 Highlight on the Home Screen Edit menu Top Row Edit allows the user to change the text displayed on t
285. t on Dwnld Email1 showing its submenus Use Dwnld 1 is the activator for the first download email address The user must select this menu item when they want this email address to receive automatic data downloads The Active Box will be drawn around the activator and the parent menu item Dwnld Email to indicate it is active The activator allows the user to turn on and off the data download emails to a particular address without having to erase or re enter the email address The other two Dwnld Email menus do the same thing and have the same sub menus as the Dwnld Email1 example explained above SMTP Address is the menu where the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP server address can be defined by the user The default entry is appropriate for a cellular modem that can be purchased from Hydro Systems but if the controller is being used with some other Ethernet network this address would need to be changed to address of the SMTP server in use on that network There is only a single sub menu as shown in Figure 15 15 the Input Tray for the 289 SMTP server address with the usual Edit Value item it its right Although the 12 character Input Tray may not display the entire address that has been defined a special dialog appears when the Edit Value item is selected so addresses up to 40 characters can be input Figure 15 15 Highlight on SMTP Address showing the one submenu SMTP Port is the fourth Ema
286. t the probe is put into to check if the sensor measures the sample accurately As the dialog shown in Figure 8 22 explains once the probe is measuring the reference sample the user can choose to calibrate the probe to the reference value just keep using the measurement value displayed or cancel this calibration 196 Calibration can fail Due to the way input sensors interpret their electrical signals into the measurement values they cannot be calibrated if the error is too large Each type of sensor has a different allowable error and if the difference between the Reference value and the Sensor measurement is too large trying to calibrate the sensor to match the reference will fail and the sensor measurement will revert to its original value Failures can indicate a sensor is dirty and needs to be cleaned that a sensor is malfunctioning worn out and needs to be replaced or the controller itself is malfunctioning Input Set up Conductivty Figure 8 22 1Pt Ref Cal Display of Reference and Measurement values Input Set uplConductivty Condustintx Input Status Measurement AlarmSettngs Calibration ALlastCal Date NotForContrl Next Cal Due LPt Fieldcal 1Pt Ref Cal Figure 8 23 Input Set up Calibration 2Pt Ref Cal menu item for Conductivity sensor 197 2Pt Ref Cal 2 Point Reference Calibration A 2 Point Reference Calibration is just like doing two of the 1 Point Reference Calibrations o
287. the Relay Usage has been defined the next menu to visit is the Auto Control menu When the highlight is on the Auto Control menu item a list of control mode categories will appear to the right as shown in Figure 6 3 It is important to understand that the menu items listed to the right of the Auto Control menu are categories of control modes not the individual control modes The individual control modes will be shown to right of the categories when highlighted 111 Figure 6 3 The Auto Control Menu for Relay 01 with the Bleed Valve Usage SetPnt Modes use an Input value Set Point to control the relay Timer Modes activate and deactivate the relay using only a timer T amp StPt Modes activate at a certain time of day but deactivate on an Input value WtrMtr Modes activate the relay using a volume measurement from a water meter OthrRlyModes allow another relay s activation or deactivation to control this relay Figure 6 4 No Auto Control Menu for Relay 01 when set to Not In Use Different Relay Usages have Different Auto Control Menus This section will use Relay 01 as an example designated to be controlling a Bleed 112 Valve One reason for using Relay 01 is that the Bleed Valve Relay Usage fills the Auto Control menu with all the major control modes to use as examples But this is not the case with all Relay Usages Look at the example in Figure 6 4 with Relay 01 temporarily designated as Not In U
288. the icon for Go Up One Level shown below and click it to go back to the top level of the USB drive gt AjA z011 12 02 PM JData_Log bm 2 1304D SIN Pe 4 4 2011 12 03 PM d System para bin 14648 SIN Fle su Trton_Helo_Template mi 2406 OM Doc Triton Menu Template mi 14665 OM Doc 2 Actinty Log bin 2 701 A3 Now the user would be back at the top level of the USB drive the Fie ed Won Favorites Tods Hep Te window that first opened up when a the USB drive was inserted They po bad would click on the Edit menu of OT Gat mz the window move the cursor arrow to the Paste item and click the Paste command That will put a Pie Folder WOO az Am Teerts the Rents you have copetd de out nn the selected locaton copy of the System_Data bin into this window The picture shows the Paste command highlighted ready to click A4 When the System_Data bin file has been copied to the top level of the USB drive the user is ready to CO rten_togel 1141734321 Pte Poker 4 14 2011 1 21 PM upload the Config File to the mcr a a Triton Controller The picture to the l right shows the System_Data bin file e Eeun i objects 147 eb ES Cono successfully copied Copy Method B Cntl Drag and Drop If you did Copy Method A skip to Uploading below B1 To use the Cntl Drag and Drop method of copying the System Data bin file the user wi
289. the main menu item that gives access to these Ready to Use RtU modes is the Operate Mode menu This is also where the User Mode selections are found which will be explained after the RtU modes 90 When the user highlights the Ready to Use menu item the preprogrammed modes are listed to the right as shown in Figure 5 1 If a mode is active the Active Box will be drawn around its name Conductivity Controlled Bleed CndctvtBleed This is a very basic RtU mode which will simply activate the Bleed Valve when the Conductivity value rises past the user defined Set Point There are no other control options such as chemical additions and so forth Outputs Available Only Relay 01 pre named Bleed Valve and Relay 08 pre named Alarm Relay will be visible along with any 4 20 mA Outputs E CndctvtB Bleed Figure 5 3 Highlight on Conductivity Controlled Bleed Auto Control Modes Available Relay 01 will be designated as controlling a Bleed Valve and the control mode will be set to the Set Point On Off control mode with the Set Point Time Proportional mode available as an optional control mode for this relay Relay 08 will be designated as an Alarm Relay intended to activate an external Alarm indicator like an exterior Bell or Strobe Default Settings Relay 01 is pre set to the Bleed Valve Usage and the Set Point On Off control mode using the Conductivity sensor as the controlling Input The Control Effect
290. the normal deactivation does not occur If this activation time limit is exceeded the OvrTimeLimit Alarm condition occurs and the relay activates or deactivates depending on its RlayReaction setting in the Alarms Actions menu If this time limit is exceeded the user can go to the ActiveAlarms menu explained in detail in the Active Alarms chapter of this manual and use the Clear Alarm to restore normal operation The relay will not operate normally until the Alarm is cleared Don t set this activation time limit for too long a time allowing adverse conditions to exist for a long time but don t set it too short either to the point where it affects the normal operations of the control method The factory default setting is for 90 minutes Set Point Control Modes SetPnt TimeP Set Point Time Proportional Figure 6 11 Think of this mode as a time cycle that checks an Input measurement 121 against the Set Point at the beginning of a recurring time period If the measurement has passed the set point the relay is activated for a portion of the time period proportional to how far the measurement was from the set point Look at the Adjustment Band AdjustmtBand section below for a specific example Select Input is first choice to make in all the Set Point modes The currently selected Input is displayed to the right of the Input submenu item with a list of all the Inputs in use to the right of that Select the device or sens
291. ther than one they are controlling with the Timer Start amp Stop Mode To make the selection simply move the highlight until the appropriate relay is highlighted and then press the Enter key Figure 6 36 The Timer amp Set Point Add Pre Feed Menu Pre FeedTime The Pre Feed Time submenu is where the user can see and adjust the amount of time that the pre feed relay will remain activated before the regular Timer controlled relay is activated The user can choose from 0 to 1440 minutes 24 hours for this feed duration The default value for Pre FeedTime is zero minutes Setting Pre FeedTime to a non zero value will automatically activate the Add Pre Feed add on mode To deactivate Add Pre Feed simply set the Pre FeedTime value back to zero Use Pre Feed This is the activator for this add on mode The user must highlight this menu item and press Enter to activate the Add Pre Feed feature That s all there is to explain about the Timer Start with Set Point Stop Modes The next category of control modes is the Water Meter control modes WtrMtr Modes The Water Meter control modes activate the Relay based on a volume measurement of the water flowing past a Water Meter connected to the Triton controller 151 Water Meter Control Modes WtrMtr Modes These two control modes activate a Relay based on a measurement of water volume made by a water meter connected to one of the Digital Inputs The Water Meter
292. tings is A A A SS 223 Alam Delay ii A A td ro Ad 223 NR 223 Digital Input Usage Flow Switch eeessssssscesssessecescscseseeesscseseeecssseseeeessacseeessaeseseeesaeseeeeceeeesacees 223 Measure ment ii Apia 224 ES A OA NE 224 Al arin De Tay dt ads 224 Alarm ACON iE a E EEE NEE lech ndavetaledn ss celetuancigeans is cc 225 The4 20 mA Analog putsen nene e ae a a aE RRA Ea RRA eee ane 225 ORO 226 Md ed o ne lada ado do cla ae O 226 RawMeasurinitite tt AAA AAA R AAA EEE AED 227 A O RON 227 IN A NN 228 IE NN 228 AMA dose 229 ZOMAV ME A Ad AOS 229 AlarmSettn gsi A A ida eo 229 Lastla Date anni baina meandro din ata Vase dado Dias 232 NotPorConttl iii a nani egies 232 9 VIEWING DATA nic a A A AR A AAA A 233 OVELVICW A yg AO 233 USB Dat Stick vsr Ethernet Comme Ct in iio 233 System Activity Log and the Data Logs wo ee eessssscesesesseseeeseseseeessesessesscsceescacscecseeasscseseeasacseseeessesaeaseeseeaeas 233 System Activity LO A A aS des te ea A ENa 233 NIE W SYS LO tabaco iE eea EEE AOR 234 ACUM DY Pe tddi ladran 235 BG SIAL MIE NOE AE o E AAP AE receta EE dest 235 ANTONIO SOUE arista dida 236 Settins Edito 236 Alarm Us A AA e 236 ALA AO tt dde taba dida 236 AlarimCl tot td tl Sore dacctevesvavtevcssvetieccesctvantucateacanecteusesecdeccisactesorserbeccrsuctuestecebventecstestthees 237 NeW De VIGO oi tii ia tia tii 237 Device ROMO VA resida di E E A Ai 237 View Data ogai bs 238 NN 239 Download tt letrinas 2
293. tion that is changed from zero in this mode the user needs to highlight the Use This Day menu item and press Enter to indicate this day is in use The active box will be drawn around the day menu item to show it has been selected but don t forget to also select the Use Mode Now menu item at the bottom of the list of times to active the Weekly Timer control mode A AB 29 PS Gy ZB ds ON J Figure 6 31 The Timer amp Set Point 28 Day Timer Control Mode 145 Timer Start w Set Point Stop Modes 28 Day Timer 28 Day Cycle The 28 Day Timer control mode is essentially the same as the Weekly Timer mode The difference is the user can schedule 28 days of activation instead of just one week This would only be useful if the user needs different timer settings to be used on different weeks instead of the same timer settings being used every week Since the deactivation settings are made in the previous menus all the user defines here is what days the relay activates on and the time of day the activation starts on each day being used The user can also add a Pre Bleed or Pre Feed operation to the 28 Day Cycle activations Remember that the Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed menus are not shown in the timer control menus of a Relay controlling a Bleed Valve There are more details about the Add PreBleed and Add Pre Feed options in the own explanation sections later in this section The first 28 Day Timer subme
294. to Control menu as the items under the Auto Control menu change based on the Relay Usage selected Relay Usage The first choice to make when programming the Relay control is the Relay Usage The user simply indicates how the Relay will be used in their water treatment system by highlighted the appropriate Relay Usage item and pressing the Enter key In the example shown in Figure 6 2 the active box indicates Relay 01 has been designated as controlling a Bleed Valve JCPuUuL Figure 6 2 The Relay Usage menu for Relay 01 BleedValvUse Bleed Valve Usage Selecting the Bleed Valve Usage indicates that a Relay will be controlling a Cooling Tower Bleed Valve This choice changes the control modes offered to the user and makes a changes in how the Relay reacts to Alarms For example the reaction of a Relay controlling a Bleed Valve to most Alarms is to keep the Bleed Valve activated open while the reaction of a Relay controlling a chemical pump is usually to deactivate Blowdown Use Boiler Blowdown Valve Usage Selecting the Blowdown Valve 110 Usage indicates that a Relay will be controlling a Boiler Blowdown Valve This choice changes the control modes offered to the user and makes a changes in how the Relay reacts to Alarms For example in the Auto Control menu a new category of control modes is revealed when the Blowdown Usage is selected the Intermittent Sampling Set Point control modes Sample Modes Pump
295. to control anything The only reason for entering the wet test values in this menu is so that the values can be downloaded together with the controller s data Only one value can be stored for each test and the date and time of the entry is recorded along with the value each time a test result is entered As shown in Figure 11 4 there are several wet tests whose results can be entered on the controller If the user has any doubt about what wet test a particular menu item is for they can simply press the Help key on the front panel of the controller when the menu item is highlighted Below is a brief description of the wet test that each of the menu items is designed to record the value of 256 TotalHardnes Total Hardness Total hardness is the sum of concentrations of calcium and magnesium ions present when these are both expressed as CaCO3 CaCO3Hardnes Hardness as CaCO3 Hardness as CaCO3 or carbonate hardness is the measure of Calcium and Magnesium and other hard ions associated with carbonate CO32 and bicarbonate HCO3 ions contained in the water PhnlAlkaline Phenol Alkalinity P or Phenol Alkalinity is a measure of the water s alkalinity at higher pH levels above the indicator phenolphthalein s end point of pH 8 2 8 4 TotlAlkaline Total Alkalinity Also known as M Alkalinity is a measure of the water s alkalinity taken at lower pH levels above the indicator methyl orange s endpoint of pH 4 2 to 4 4
296. tof Alarm Actions that the user can modify to control what happens if an Alarm occurs By default the Alarm lamp on the controller s front panel is set to turn on The only Relay that is set to turn on is the Alarm Relay However unlike most other Inputs Lockouts are set on all Pump Relays when a NoFlow Alarm occurs The option to send alarm emails is active by default but it will not actually do anything useful until email addresses have been entered in the NetwrkConfig menu by the user The 4 20 mA Analog Inputs Any Triton water treatment Controller can be equipped with up to three optional 4 20 mA Input or Output boards Each of the three boards can be equipped with two or four 4 20 milliamp mA analog Inputs or two or four 4 20 mA analog Outputs Figure 8 45 Highlight on Input Set up for 4 20mA In 01 The following text willexamine the 4 20 mA Inputs see the Output Control chapter in this Reference Manual for a detailed description of the 4 20 mA Outputs 225 The 4 20 mA Inputs are very simple input sensors They merely monitor the changes in current amperage that occur on the circuit they are connected to and allow the user to interpret those changes as measurements of some phenomena occurring outside of the controller As well as interpreting the amperage changes the user can also set levels for a High Alarm and Low Alarm condition and control what happens if either of those Alarms occur Figure 8 45 sho
297. tom and sides of a menu item indicates that it is a user setting something the user can modify It might be text like the custom name for an Output or numbers like the Set Point value for a control mode But it always indicates a field that can be modified by the user Navigating the Menus Figure 3 5 Highlight on Relay 01 In Figure 3 5 the highlight is on the Output Control submenu item for Relay 01 The leftward pointing arrowhead lt 4 to the left of Relay 01 shows the highlight is in the submenu of the Output Control OutputContrl menu and that one press of the Left Arrow Navigator key on the front panel would move the highlight back to the Output Control menu item The rightward pointing arrowhead to the right of Relay 01 indicates that this menu item Relay 01 has a submenu which is seen displayed to the right It also shows where the highlight would move if the user presses the Right Arrow key on the front panel onto the custom name menu item which is showing the factory default custom name Bleed Valve 48 From where the highlight is shown in the picture the Down Arrow on the front panel would move the highlight down the list to Relay 02 Relay 03 and so forth If the controller had enough Outputs installed that the listextended beyond the bottom of the display the last row would have a downward pointing arrowhead Y to indicate there were more items out of sight From where the highlight i
298. tor with 1 Biocide oe eeeeeseseseeeescseeceecssseseeeeeseeseeesseeeeeeesesseeeeee 100 Outputs Avail able s iii ooo 101 Auto Control Modes Available nonnina aE EEEE 101 Default Settings ii ist cite hain dan Recor han A A AAA A een ea A a 101 Inputs Available s2sitennieiatiniiiilalcieladaiaheualal dualaual chabauel E A dialer 101 4 20mA A O a a ah 102 Conductivity Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor with 2 Biocides 0 eeeeeseseseeeeseseeeeeeesseseeeessseseeeeesseneneeesseeeeee 102 Outputs Avail Able ss sx esc tib esc oa 102 Auto Control Modes Available soreness aaea een earnen ines eannan Eara TEN ESEE 102 DARAS E e a aa a A a E E A E A O E A 103 Inputs Ayailable siisi nee a a aaea A Eae e aA Aan A E Aaaa A EA 103 4 20mA OUN a n a A aa aA Seah E e RNS a aaa Sue Ena A a aah 103 Conductivity controlled Bleed amp Feed with ORP and pH Control ooocnncinicicnnnnnnonononnnnnonnonananonncnononocnonanono 104 Outputs A Vail able is 104 Auto Control Modes Available siirron enoaan nas basinan Eara TEN Eoaea 104 Default Settings ina eE T Ud cuna ia 105 Inputs Available svcctennetiiieiil nan a a an eaea Tae aE Sanaa Eana a Ea E ae oan lied 105 ARA ea 106 User Modes User defined Operation Modes c cscessssessesesseseeseseeseseeeeseeseseeeeseeseseeaesecseeecaeeeeseeseeeeaeeeeaees 106 6 OUTPUT CONTROL ccicicinnsni conicnnicna nana r dci a ii ci 108 DA A q AO 108 Relay Control AAA 108 OutputContr i nnsh ons nandientichntecien ics attend E EEEE EEE
299. transmit for each unit of volume The allowed setting range is from 0 01 which would mean each 215 pulse represent 100 volume units to 20 000 which would mean 20 000 pulses would represent one volume unit The factory default setting is one 1 Volume Units Volume Units Here is the list of volume units that the user can pick to go with the K Factor value previously defined This submenu simply lists three choices gal US Fluid Gallons Itr Metric Fluid Liters m3 Metric Cubic Meters ml Metric Cubic Milliliters designed for flow verification meters The user highlights the units they want to use and presses the Enter key to make the choice The Active Box is drawn around their selection The factory default is gal Total amp Reset Totalization and Reset This menu is exactly the same as it is for the Reed Switch Usage with the same submenus and settings Now that the user has defined the volume units and how many pulses represent one of them the controller can start to produce a volume Totalization value a measurement of the Volume of water that has flowed past this water meter The first submenu shows the current volume Totalization value since the last reset Up to 999 999 units of volume can be displayed Right below the volume Totalization is a display of the weight of that volume of water This is calculated on the fly from the volume Totalization value If the user selected gal as the volu
300. trol pre set to control the Bleed Valve relay The Alarm conditions described below have a default one minute Alarm delay except the Flow Switch that by default has no delay set The Flow Switch will cause an Alarm condition if flow becomes insufficient The Conductivity sensor will have its High Alarm and Low Alarm available The Temperature sensor is available to allow for Conductivity calibration but can also be used to trigger alarms 4 20mA Out The first of the optional 4 20 milliamp outputs willbe set to follow the Conductivity sensor for outside charting monitoring or recording purposes The remaining 4 20mA output would not have any default setting and could be set to reflect the status of any of the available Inputs or Outputs 103 Conductivity controlled Bleed amp Feed with ORP and pH Control CB amp Fd ORP pH Similar to the previous mode but the first Biocide is expected to be an Oxidizing Biocide so its Auto Control mode is changed to use an ORP Sensor Set Point or Timer and the second Biocide has been traded for pH control using a pH sensor and Acid pump The Bleed Valve is still controlled by a Conductivity Set Point and the Inhibitor pump relay still activates and deactivates together with the Bleed Valve Outputs Available Relay 01 pre named Bleed Valve Relay 02 pre named InhibitrPump Relay 03 pre named Oxy Biocide Relay 04 pre named Acid Pump and Relay 08 pre named Alarm Relay will
301. ts interpreted into sensor measurements to support various analog sensors like corrosion probes ozone sensors and so forth Input Status Displays The various sensor Inputs have various status displays in various system menus Most Inputs the measurement sensors display one of these status messages Normal when the sensor is responding normally and has not exceeded any setting High Alarm indicates the sensor measurement has exceeded its High Alarm setting Low Alarm indicates the sensor measurement is below its Low Alarm setting Sere Sensor Error indicates a problem with the sensor usually an out of range value A Flow Switch however would only display these two status messages Normal when the flow past the switch is sufficient Flow Alarm if the flow is insufficient or there is no flow Any Dry Contact Reed Switch Water Meters installed would display either of Normal as long as the total volume measurement has not exceeded the preset limit High Alarm if the total volume measured exceeds the preset limit A Hall Effect or Paddlewheel Water Meter would display one of the following Normal as long as the volume or flow values have not exceeded their preset limits High Alarm if the volume measured total exceeds the preset volume limit Hi FlowAlarm if the flow rate exceeds the preset high flow rate limit LowFlow Alarm if the flow rate falls below a preset low flow rate limit The Co
302. ture sensor Status The Temperature sensor has four possible status codes Normal When the sensor is reporting values within its normal range High Alarm If the temperature measurement goes above a user defined value Low Alarm If the temperature measurement goes below a user defined value Sensor Error If the sensor reports values out of range or the controller recognizes that the sensor has failed Measurement The live display of the sensor s measurement value The Temperature 203 sensor can report values from 14 to 158 F 10 to 70 C AlarmSettngs The Conductivity sensor has three possible alarm conditions with submenus for setting the Alarm Actions and Alarm Delay for each of them High Alarm If the conductivity measurement goes above a user defined value Low Alarm If the conductivity measurement goes below a user defined value Sensor Error If the sensor reports values out of range or the controller recognizes the sensor has failed Calibration The submenus under this item explained in detail earlier in this chapter are where the sensor s measurements can be adjusted for greater accuracy or calibrated Unlike most sensors only one type of calibration is offered for Temperature sensors Field Calibration A simple 1 point calibration that does not require probe removal NotForContrl And lastly the handy Not For Control option This would remove the Temperature Input from all the Output Control menus
303. two types of calibration are offered for an ORP sensor Field Calibration A simple 1 point calibration that does not require probe removal 1 Point Reference Calibration A more involved calibration usually requires probe removal and cleaning and may use laboratory prepared reference samples An ORP sensor has two unique Calibration items related to how accurate the calibration process has been over time The two additional menu items are Calc d Slope Calculated Slope This displays the slope Change in the mV output of the ORP electrode expected mV Change of the ORP electrode as of the last calibration A perfect electrode would have a slope of 1 0 This slope value can be helpful when troubleshooting and deciding if the electrode needs to be replaced Calc dOffset Calculated Offset This displays the calibrated mV offset of the ORP sensor electrode when the signal is at OmV as of the last calibration This offset value can be helpful when troubleshooting and deciding if the electrode needs to be replaced NotForContrl And lastly the handy Not For Control option This would remove the ORP Input from all the Output Control menus preventing this ORP sensor from being used to control an output relay It would still be listed here in the Input Set up menu so it can be used to monitor the water quality have the user set alarms and have the sensor s measurements stored in the Data Log 207 The Digital Inputs
304. ubmenus High Alarm Hi Rate Alarm and the LowRateAlarm High Alarm High Total Alarm A typical high value alarm menu this one allows the user to define a value for the Totalization that will cause an Alarm if exceeded Remember that the Totalization is of Sheep not signals or counts The submenus for 219 this Alarm setting have all the usual alarm options lighting the front panel lamp turning on Relays the Alarm Relay is turned on by default using Lockout on Outputs sending emails making phone calls and clearing the Alarm The range of settings is from 0 to 999 999 Hi RateAlarm High Rate Alarm Another typical high value alarm menu this alarm is designed to alert personnel if the counts are increasing too rapidly that is to say if the rate that Sheep are being counted has increased beyond this user defined value It is very important to remember these alarms are being set on the rate at which the count of Sheep is increasing not the rate at which the signals are being detected although the two may be closely related The submenus for this Alarm setting have all the usual alarm options lighting the front panel lamp turning on Relays the Alarm Relay is turned on by default using Lockout on Outputs sending emails making phone calls and clearing the Alarm The range of settings is from 0 to 999 999 Counts Rate Unit LowRateAlarm Low Rate Alarm A typical low value alarm menu this alarm can alert personn
305. ult alarm actions are pre set at the factory by Hydro Systems but the user needs to understand the Triton Output Alarm system so they can review the settings 164 and make any adjustments appropriate for their installation RlayReaction This Relay s Reaction This menu allows the user to specify the reaction of this relay if an alarm occurs There are two choices Force Off This relay will be forced to deactivate and stay deactivated until the alarm is cleared Force Active This relay will be forced to activate and stay activated until the alarm is cleared AlarmActions Alarm Actions This menu allows the user to specify what alarm actions should take place if an alarm occurs There are several options No AlarmActn Alarm Lamp TurnRelay On AlarmLockout Send Email No Alarm Action Take no additional action do nothing other than the Relay Reaction defined All Alarms are logged in the System Activity Log evenif no alarm actions are specified Selecting this item automatically deselects or turns off all the other Alarm Actions listed below The bright red lamp on the front panel of the controller be can turned on flashing or constantly or it can be left turned off Allows the user to activate other relays if an alarm occurs Any Alarm Relay is pre selected by default Allows the user to Lockout other relays if an alarm occurs Send Alarm Email If active alarm emails will be sent over
306. umbered 5 through 8 and 9 through 12 respectively Each output channel has three jumper pins 1 2 and 3 as shown with a 2 pin jumper connecter installed If the connector is on pins 1 and 2 the output channel will be in Passive mode with only a signal current passing from Loop to Loop If the connector is on pins 2 and 3 the output channel will be in Active mode delivering 24 Volts DC at the Loop connection WARNING There are live electrical circuits inside the enclosure even when the front panel power switch is in the OFF position The power shall be removed from the controller before accessing the front door to the inside of the enclosure e Resistance Limit 24V 1 2k Ohms e Maximum current draw of 20 mA max 24VDC e 20 26 AWG wire is recommended for 4 20 mA connections e For long wire runs not over 325 feet 100 meters use shielded twisted pairs e Route signal wires in separate conduit at least 6 inches from any AC voltage 4 20 mA Output Wiring Examples Powered 4 20 mA Receiver Unpowered 2 or 3 Wire Receiver 38 Treatment Program Set up Default Passwords Admin Level Default Password admin User Level 1 Default Password user User Level 2 Default Password user2 Initial Set up Once you have connected the Input Sensors to the controller and the Relays to the devices they will control you should perform the following steps to set up your water treatment pr
307. unter usage for a Digital Input would display one of the following Normal as long as the total count and rate values do not exceed their preset limits High Alarm if the interpreted Total Count exceeds the preset limit Hi RateAlarm if the interpreted Count Rate exceeds the preset limit LowRateAlarm if the interpreted Count Rate falls below the preset limit A General Purpose Digital Input would use one of these two status displays Normal or DigitalAlarm based on settings the user makes in the menus for their control Inputs also have special Not For Control setting NotForContrl if the user does not want an input to appear in the Output Control menus This setting allows the Input to be used to monitor the cooling system have its measurements logged and set off alarms as desired but prevents it from being shown in the menus used to control an output relay Starting with the Output they wish to control the user will find relay usages and control modes that can use any of these Inputs even in combination to help them control their water treatment in a precise convenient way 26 ee Timers Although using sensor measurements to activate outputs can have advantages in certain situations the use of Timers is the most basic water treatment strategy The Triton controller gives the user many different ways to use Timers to implement their water treatment plan They start a process at a certain time of day and cont
308. ure 3 39 Water Indexes Wet Test Entry menu In the Conductivity menu the scale choices are uS micro Siemens per centimeter um micro mhos per centimeter and ppm parts per million The pH wet test entry always use pH as its scale Then in the next submenu the user enters the data value they want stored Once the value is entered the date and time displays change automatically to the date and time of this entry Figure 3 40 Wet Test Entry sub menus for Total Hardness 76 The most recent data is stored each time it is entered into the Triton Data Log along with all the data from the Triton Controller itself This is just for the convenience of the user so when they download the Triton data log either locally or remotely it includes their manually performed wet test data Password and Access Control The Password and Access control menu PasswdAccess can be used to e Set the passwords for the Administrator User Level 1 and User Level 2 users e Control the menus in which the User 1 and User 2 passwords will allow changes e To enable disable Read Only access when the Enter key is entered as a password e Change the No Activity Timeout Limit setting When a user first installs a new Triton controller the factory password for the Administrator access is admin and for the User Level access they are user1 and user2 One of the first things the administrator of the water treatment system sh
309. urement but the user can enter a measurement value from any source they prefer Figure 3 37 shows the Input Tray for the Conductivity data with the usual Edit Value item to the right The Triton sensor measurement is also shown There are similar data entry menus for each of the five required parameters The indexes are calculated and displayed when all the data entered is less than two weeks old Cycles of Concentration If the system has two Conductivity sensors one for the system water and one for the make up water then a Cycles of Concentration Cycles of C value can also be displayed This index is calculated constantly from the two conductivity measurements and does not require a manual test to calculate its value Therefore its display does not expire like the LSI and RSI indexes Figure 3 38 shows the Cycles of C menu A Menu Figure 3 38 Water Indexes Cycles of Concentration menu Wet Test Entry The Water Indexes menu also has a submenu where the user can store their manually performed wet test data The Triton controller does not use this data in any way it just stores any values entered so they can be downloaded along with the controller s own stored data in the Data Log Bie In each of the wet test data records as shown in Figure 3 40 the user first selects the scale value for the data either ppm parts per million m L milligrams per liter or g g grains per gallon Fig
310. ve But the Triton controller can also send the logs as an attachment to an email over an Ethernet connection There is even an Auto Download option that can periodically send the logs to three different email addresses automatically Yet another way the user can examine the stored data is at the front panel of the controller using the Viewing Data menu as explained below See Figure 9 1 System Activity Log and the Data Logs There are two different kinds of log files kept by the Triton controller There is the System Activity Log and then there is a Data Log associated with every Input and Output installed System Activity Log This log contains a comprehensive record of all the activity that occurs on the Triton controller every login attempt every alarm condition and every changes made to any settings even preserving the before and after values The Triton System Activity Log also records what the setting was before and after the 233 change so if a change was made in error the user has a record of what the setting was before the change Figure 9 1 Highlight on the Viewing Data menu Figure 9 2 shows the two submenus related to the System Activity Log one to view the System Activity Log View Sys Log on the front panel display and the other down at the bottom of the list to download the log DownloadLogs which is explained later in this section Figure 9 2 Highlight on the V
311. ve not exceeded their alarm limits High Alarm If the volume measured total exceeds the preset volume limit Hi FlowAlarm If the flow rate exceeds the preset high flow rate limit LowFlowAlarm If the flow rate falls below a preset low flow rate limit The Digital Counter usage for a Digital Input would display one of the following Normal When total count and rate values do not exceed their alarm limits High Alarm If the interpreted Total Count exceeds the preset limit Hi RateAlarm If the interpreted Count Rate exceeds the preset limit LowRateAlarm If the interpreted Count Rate falls below the preset limit Any General Purpose Digital Input would use one of these two status displays Normal or DigitalAlarm These displays are based on the user s settings for this usage A Flow Switch Digital Input would display either of Normal Displayed when the water flow is sufficient for normal operation Flow Alarm Displayed when the water flow stops or becomes insufficient Measurement The third submenu item is a live display of the Input sensor s current measurement for the user s reference The magnitude and units will vary with the Input The uS or micro Siemens unit shown for Conductivity is an abbreviation of the true measurement unit US cm micro Siemens per centimeter Alarm Settings AlarmSettngs Alarm Settings The fourth submenu is one of the main reasons a user would come to these Input Set up and Calibration me
312. vity controlled Bleed CndctvtBleed A very simple operation mode that does nothing more than open and close the Bleed Valve based on a Conductivity sensor Set Point This mode will simply Bleed down the system water when the Conductivity sensor value rises past the Set Point value the user establishes without any other control options such as chemical additions and so forth Conductivity controlled Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor CondBld amp Feed Much like the previous mode but with the addition of an Inhibitor feed controlled by Relay 02 The Bleed valve is still controlled by the Conductivity Set Point and the Inhibitor 263 pump relay activation is controlled by the Bleed valve deactivation Timer controlled Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor TimrBld amp Feed Similar to the previous CondBld amp Feed mode except the Bleed valve is controlled with a Timer instead of the Conductivity Set Point The Inhibitor pump activation is still controlled by the Bleed valve deactivation Make up Volume controlled Bleed amp Feed Inhibitor MkUpBld amp Feed Similar to the previous Bleed and Feed modes except the Bleed valve is activated by a volume of water and then deactivated after a user defined time duration The Inhibitor pump activation is still controlled by the Bleed valve deactivation Conductivity controlled Bleed Inhibitor as of Time Cycle CndBld Feed In this Control mode the Bleed valve is controlled by a Conductivity Set
313. want the 4 20 mA output to follow Just move the highlight to the Input desired and press Enter to select it As always shown in Figure 6 51 the first Input listed is the default selection and there 168 is a handy Go To Set up shortcut item at the end of the list that can take the user directly to the setup menu for the selected Input for their convenience 4mA Value This menu shown in Figure 6 52 is where the user can change the input value that will correspond to the 4 mA output level This would be the lowest normal value for the input by default Figure 6 52 The Auto Control 4 mA Value menu for 4 20mA Out01 Figure 6 53 The Auto Control 20 mA Value menu for 4 20mA Out01 20 mA Value Correspondingly this menu is where the user can change the input value 169 that will correspond to the 20mA output level By default this would be the highest normal value for the input selected Current Loop Calibration or 4 20 mA Loop Calibration The manual controls can be useful whenever the receiving device needs to be calibrated to the 4 20 mA signals coming from the controller This is often called a Current Loop Calibration or 4 20 mA Loop Calibration and the manual controls allow the user to calibrate an external device to the controller s output Manual 4mA This item adjusts the output to precisely 4 mA of electrical current The user just highlights this item and presses Enter and the
314. way users think With multiple sensor Set Points e Full Alphanumeric Keypad for simple easy entry of numbers and characters One Step Data Download with USB Data Stick Every Triton controller comes standard with a USB port on the front panel that allows the user to download the data logs from the controller in one easy step Just plug in a standard USB Data Stick and the data is downloaded ready to analyze and graph Open Expandable Architecture with Digital Network Need more Relays Need more Sensors Need them far away from the main controller Rejoice with Triton s digital expansion network it is all Plug n Play Add a Relay Expansion Module to get four more high capacity Relays and they will automatically be numbered appropriately and placed in the menus with the other Relays Add a new Modbus Sensor like a second Conductivity probe and the controller will 20 automatically know what kind of sensor has been added and what its measurement range is give it an appropriate name and add it to the menus next to any existing sensor s of the same kind In addition because these devices are being connected over our digital network they can be a hundred feet away from the main controller without the worries of signal strength and electromagnetic interference that can make analog signals so problematic over long distances Digital Network The sophisticated RS485 Digital Network using Modbus protocols means error free transm
315. wheads disappear because when entering a numerical value or text the front panel arrow keys change their function Inside an Input Tray the Right arrow will now move the insertion prompt to the right and the Left arrow will act as a Delete key If the user wants to cancel the whole entry process they can press the Back Cancel key and the custom name will revert to the 53 value it had before they started to make changes In this hypothetical example Relay 02 is activating an inhibitor pump so the custom name InhibitrPump seems logical In Figure 3 12 this new custom name for Relay 02 is showing as it was entered just before the Enter key is pressed Dutpu t E ay Relay RRN RUNI tew Name elay Rela atus Relay Re i ac elay A t Relay Ma la Relay le lal r a ay Mi n t pm Figure 3 12 New Custom Name before Enter key When the user is finished they would press the Enter key to set the new name for Relay 02 Figure 3 13 shows the display after the Enter was pressed to accept the new name ut 1E r lt ia Relay Pb ib 3 tr Pui ple Na Relay Relay Status Relay 0 Relay sagi ay Au ntr lay Q M if f Lay M ay 08 M Oma R Figure 3 13 New Custom Name after Enter key 54 The new name willreplace the previous name everywhere in the menu structure and on data logs and so forth The only place that will always say Relay 02 is the first submenu of the Output Control menu
316. ws the submenus for the first of these Inputs Custom Name Still using the factory default name 4 20mA In 01 in Figure 8 45 Any 12 character name can be assigned by the user and the custom name will be used throughout the menus A well chosenname can make the Input s function clear For example a 4 20 mA input monitoring chiller temperature might be more recognizable with acustom name Chiller Temp instead of the default name 4 20mA In 01 Figure 8 46 Highlight on the Status display menu for 4 20mA In 01 Status Current Input Status As shown in Figure 8 46 this is a live display of the status of this Input for reference A 4 20 mA Input will display one of the following four status codes Normal When the input is within 4 20 mA with no Alarm limits violated High Alarm If the interpreted value exceeds the High Alarm setting Low Alarm If the interpreted value falls below the Low Alarm setting Sensor Error If the input goes outside of the 4 20 mA range or the sensor fails 226 Input Set up 4 Calibration In tal In In 6 tal n Figure 8 47 Highlight on the Raw Measurement menu for 4 20mA In 01 RawMeasurmnt Raw Measurement A live display of the raw measurement being seen by this input in milliamps mA As shown in Figure 8 47 4 20mA In 01 is seeing an incoming amperage of 6 4 mA This display can be very handy when trouble shooting a problem or checking the raw amperage changes aga
317. xceeds a user alarm setting Could be a High or Low Alarm on a Sensor Input a Limit Timer Alarm for an Output and so forth Menus MenultemPath Identifies the alarm location by showing the menu item whose setting was violated A list of menu items showing the path to the menu item being identified AlarmSetting The user defined alarm value that was violated ValueAtAlarm The value at the time the Alarm occurred Depending on the Alarm Delay setting this value could differ significantly from the Alarm Setting value and the difference could be informative Alarm Auto Alarm Automated A record of anytime an Alarm occurs that is not a violation of a user definition Like a Sensor Error or Power Failure and power restoration even though it s not an alarm 236 Menu MenultemPath For these Alarms the appropriate menu item is identified to show which Alarm is being recorded A list of menu items showing the path to the item being identified Since there is no menu item for power restoration just the text PowerRestore is used to identify that event AlarmCleared Alarm Cleared A record made when any Alarm is cleared Menu MenultemPath Identifies the Alarm that was cleared Corresponds to an entry for one of the two Alarms explained just above A list of menu items showing the path to the item being identified New Device New Device Added A record made whenever a new Input or Output is detected
318. xpose the Edit Value prompt as shown in Figure 3 21 Figure 3 21 Exposing the Edit Value menu item Figure 3 22 Highlight on Edit Value ready to press Enter To help safeguard this important control value the user has to move the highlight to the Edit Value prompt before they can change the value When the highlight is on Edit 60 Value prompt as shown in Figure 3 22 the user can press Enter to change the value Another feature of the Triton is when entering a numerical value the user can enter the value directly using the keypad No need to enter leading zeros or position the insertion pointer in the entry field just enter the number directly with the front panel keypad Figure 3 23 shows the new value 1500 before the Enter key is pressed Figure 3 23 The new Set Point value before Enter is pressed Figure 3 24 shows the new 1500 uS cm Set Point value after Enter is pressed Figure 3 24 The new Set Point value after Enter is pressed To return to higher levels of the menu the user would press the Left arrow a few times 61 or press the Menu or Home keys on the front panel to get back to the top level instantly The previous two sections of this Reference Manual have described how to navigate the menus of your Triton water treatment controller how to change settings and how to enter text and numerical values The next section will explain the difference between the Ready to Use operati
319. xt level of menus Also notice that the text at the top of the screen has changed to help the user keep track of where they are in the menu system When the menu name currently in use scrolls out of view to the left itis then added to the top row of the display 49 Figure 3 6 Relay 01 Custom Name Notice the only arrowheads in Figure 3 6 are the leftward pointing ones lt 4 to the left of the Bleed Valve and Relay 01 menu items and the rightward pointing one to the right of the Bleed Valve menu item The leftward pointing arrowheads indicate that the user can press the Left Arrow to return to the list of Outputs or again to return to the main menu item OutputContrl which is the screen shown in Figure 3 5 The rightward pointing arrowhead indicates the user can press the Right Arrow key to move to the Set New Name item and the lack of rightward arrowhead after the Set New Name items means there is no more information or submenus to the right Later in this manual in the Inputting chapter an example will use the Set New Name item to change an Output s custom name These navigation techniques are used in identical ways for all the menus and submenus in the entire system These simple highlight movements using the Arrow keys enable the user to navigate through the entire list of features built into the Triton controller The next section explains the techniques for entering numerical values and alphabetic t
320. ys as defined in the Settings Menu This usage provides a Totalization value with a High Total Alarm and High and Low Rate Alarms based on the rate at which the signals are being detected Figure 8 40 shows the Settings Menu submenus for Digital In 3 designated as a Digital Counter 217 Input Set up 4 Calib Digita in 1 Digital In igital In Digital In 01911 21 in Digital In Digital In Digital In 4 20mA In 0 4 20mA In 02 4 20 In 03 4 20 n 04 a pr ds a mre YP Yo p pr podr pus re Gm D de de de OY OO f gt a A i 20mA In 03 A at se ZUMA in Figure 8 40 Highlight on Settings Menu for DigtlCounter Digital Input Usage Signal Name A three 3 character custom name can be given to the signals to make them more meaningful The factory default name is Cnt Counts but consider giving a more meaningful name to what is being counted for example Shp Sheep Signal Value In this submenu the user can define how many Sheep each pulse from the digital input represents The factory default is one 1 but for this explanation let s say the user has set this per Signal value to ten 10 so each pulse detected by this 218 Digital Input now represents 10 Sheep Rate Unit In this submenu the user can define what time period they want the controller to count by The factory default is to show the rate as h per hour but the user may selecta rate
321. ys with no control settings in them OutputStatus This is the second menu displayed on the Menu Screen as shown in Figure 10 1 It is just a reference display of every Output device with their current status displayed next to each one This menu is just an information display no changes can be made here The first submenu of the Output Status menu item is a list of all the Outputs displaying the Custom Name for convenience To the right of each Output name is a display item that shows its current Status message If a controller has so many Outputs installed that the list goes past the bottom of the display the user can simply move the highlight into the list and scroll down using the Down Arrow until they can see the Output they wish In the example shown in Figure 10 1 all the Outputs can be seen without scrolling 249 Figure 10 1 Highlight on OutputStatus menu showing the list and status displays All Relays use one of the following Status displays On NNNN min Displays the total minutes of the relay s current activation Relay is Off Indicates the relay is deactivated normally LkOut NN min Shows the relay is currently locked out by some other control OvrTimeLimit When the Limit Timer setting has been exceeded Input Error Means the input that is controlling the relay has reported an error Not In Use A usage setting that hides the relay from most menus The optional 4 20 mA outputs use one of the

Triton Water Treatment Controller Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents